THREE VOYAGES FOR THE DISCOVERY OF A NORTHWEST PASSAGE FROM THE ATLANTIC
TO THE PACIFIC, AND NARRATIVE OF AN ATTEMPT TO REACH THE NORTH POLE,
VOLUME I

by

SIR W. E. PARRY, CAPT. R.N., F.R.S.

In Two Volumes.

1844







[Illustration CAPTAIN W.E. PARRY R.N.]




PUBLISHERS' ADVERTISEMENT

The two volumes herewith presented to the public contain an
uninterrupted narrative, in Captain Parry's own words, of the five
voyages made by that distinguished navigator, under the sanction
of the British government, in search of a passage from the eastern
to the western side of the American Continent, through the Arctic
Ocean. Although abbreviated, the curtailment has been effected,
not by any change in the language of the original writer, but
merely by omitting all such details as were not inviting to the
general reader; and, in a word, changing the character of the work
from that of an official report to that of a narrative. The effort
has been to preserve all interesting and amusing particulars; to
record all facts and transactions of importance; to present an
accurate though brief notice of all valuable accessions to
geographic as well as general knowledge, effected in the progress
of the voyages; and, at the same time, to keep the reader's
attention ever on the alert by the rapid and uninterrupted
succession of striking incidents.

It is hoped that the aim here designated has been accomplished;
and that, in the abridged narrative of Parry's Voyages, there will
be found matter, not only to interest the reader for amusement,
but also to improve. The scenes and adventures recorded by the
navigator are in the highest degree novel and remarkable; and it
cannot be other than profitable to know what perils were
encountered, what courage, firmness, and ingenuity were displayed,
what moral and physical influences were developed, and what
triumphs of human skill were achieved, in the progress of voyages
undertaken solely to advance the interests of science.

H. & B.

New-York, May, 1840.




CONTENTS
of
THE FIRST VOLUME


INTRODUCTION.


CHAPTER I.

Passage across the Atlantic.--Enter Davis's Strait.--Unsuccessful
Attempt to penetrate the Ice to the Western Coast.--Voyage up the
Strait.--Passage through the Ice to the Western Coast.--Arrival
off Possession Bay, on the Southern Side of the Entrance into Sir
James Lancaster's Sound.


CHAPTER II.

Entrance into Sir James Lancaster's Sound of
Baffin.--Uninterrupted Passage to the Westward.--Discovery and
Examination of Prince Regent's Inlet.--Progress to the Southward
stopped by Ice.--Return to the Northward.--Pass Barrow's Strait,
and enter the Polar Sea.


CHAPTER III.

Favourable Appearances of an open Westerly Passage.--Land to the
Northward, a Series of Islands.--General Appearance of them.--Meet
with some Obstruction from low Islands surrounded with
Ice.--Remains of Esquimaux Huts, and natural Productions of Byam
Martin Island.--Tedious Navigation from Fogs and Ice.--Difficulty
of Steering a Proper Course.--Arrival and Landing on Melville
Island.--Proceed to the Westward, and reach the Meridian of 110°
W. Long., the first Stage in the Scale of Rewards granted by Act
of Parliament.


CHAPTER IV.

Further Examination of Melville Island.--Continuation of our
Progress to the Westward.--Long detention by the Ice.--Party sent
on Shore to hunt Deer and Musk-oxen.--Return in three Days, after
losing their Way.--Anxiety on their Account.--Proceed to the
Westward till finally stopped by the Ice.--In returning to the
Eastward, the Griper forced on the Beach by the Ice.--Search for,
and Discovery of, a Winter Harbour on Melville Island.--Operations
for securing the Ships in their Winter Quarters.


CHAPTER V.

Precautions for securing the Ships and Stores.--For promoting Good
Order, Cleanliness, Health, and Good-Humour among the Ships'
Companies.--Establishment of a Theatre and of the North Georgia
Gazette.--Erection of an Observatory on Shore.--Commence our
Winter's Amusements.--State of the Temperature, and various
Meteorological Phenomena.--Miscellaneous Occurrences to the Close
of the Year 1819.


CHAPTER VI.

First Appearance of Scurvy.--The Aurora Borealis and other
Meteorological Phenomena.--Visits of the Wolves.--Reappearance of
the Sun.--Extreme low Temperature.--Destruction of the House on
Shore by Fire.--Severe Frostbites occasioned by this Accident.


CHAPTER VII.

More temperate Weather.--House rebuilt.--Quantity of Ice collected
on the Hecla's lower Deck.--Meteorological Phenomena.--Conclusion
of Theatrical Entertainments.--Increased Sickness on board the
Griper.--Clothes first dried in the open Air.--Remarkable Halos
and Parhelia.--Snow Blindness.--Cutting the Ice round the Ships,
and other Occurrences to the Close of May.


CHAPTER VIII.

Journey across Melville Island to the Northern Shore, and Return
to the Ships by a different Route.


CHAPTER IX.

Occurrences at Winter Harbour in the early Part of June.--Gradual
Dissolution of the Ice upon the Sea and of the Snow upon the
Land.--Decease and Burial of William Scott.--Equipment of the
Ships completed.--Temperate Weather during the Month of
July.--Breaking up of the Ice near the Ships.--Move to the lower
Part of the Harbour.--Separation of the Ice at the
Entrance.--Prepare to Sail.--Abstract of Observations made in
Winter Harbour.


CHAPTER X.

Leave Winter Harbour.--Flattering Appearance of the Sea to the
Westward.--Stopped by the Ice near Cape Hay.--Farther Progress to
the Longitude of 113° 48' 22.5", being the Westernmost Meridian
hitherto reached in the Polar Sea, to the North of
America.--Banks's Land discovered.--Increased Extent and
Dimensions of the Ice.--Return to the Eastward, to endeavour to
penetrate the Ice to the Southward.--Re-enter Barrow's Strait, and
Survey its South Coast.--Pass through Sir James Lancaster's Sound
on our Return to England.


CHAPTER XI.

Progress down the Western Coast of Baffin's Bay.--Meet with the
Whalers.--Account of some Esquimaux in the Inlet called the River
Clyde.--Continue the Survey of the Coast till stopped by Ice in
the Latitude of 68¼°.--Obliged to run to the Eastward.--Fruitless
Attempts to regain the Land, and final Departure from the
Ice.--Remarks upon the probable Existence and Practicability of a
Northwest Passage, and upon the Whale Fishery.--Boisterous Weather
in Crossing the Atlantic.--Loss of the Hecla's Bowsprit and
Foremast.--Arrival in England.



SECOND VOYAGE.


PRELIMINARY CHAPTER.


CHAPTER I.

Passage across the Atlantic.--Removal of Stores from the Nautilus
Transport, at the Margin of the Ice.--Departure of the Nautilus
for England.--Enter the Ice in Hudson's Strait.--Perilous
Situation of the Hecla, and Loss of her Anchor.--Meet with the
Hudson's Bay Ships.--Passage up the Strait, and Communication with
the Natives inhabiting the Northern Shores.--Pass the Trinity
Islands of Fox.--Arrival off Southampton Island, where the
Researches of the Expedition commence.


CHAPTER II.

Review of the Geographical Information obtained by the Researches
of former Navigators on the Coast of the American Continent, in
the Neighbourhood of Wager River.--Discover and enter the Duke of
York's Bay, supposing it to be a Passage into the Sea called the
Welcome.--Leave the Duke of York's Bay, and proceed to the
Northwestward.--Passage of the Frozen Strait and Arrival in
Repulse Bay.--Continuity of Land there.--Observations on
Shore.--Remarks concerning the Geography, Tides, and Natural
History of this Part of the Continental Coast.


CHAPTER III.

Return to the Eastward through the Frozen Strait.--Discovery of
Hurd Channel.--Examined in a Boat.--Loss of the Fury's
Anchor.--Providential Escape of the Fury from Shipwreck.--Anchor
in Duckett Cove.--Farther Examination of the Coast by Boats and
Walking-parties.--Ships proceed through Hurd Channel.--Are drifted
by the Ice back to Southampton Island.--Unobstructed Run to the
Entrance of a large Inlet leading to the Northwestward.--Ships
made fast by Hawsers to the Rocks.--Farther Examination of the
Inlet commenced in the Boats.


CHAPTER IV.

Hoppner's Inlet entered and surveyed by the Boats.--Continuity of
Land there determined.--Proceed to examine another Opening leading
to the Westward.--Favourable Appearance of a continued Passage in
that direction.--Meet with some Esquimaux.--Arrival in Ross Bay,
being the Termination of Lyon Inlet.--Discovery and Examination of
various Creeks.--Return to the Ships, after finding the Land
entirely continuous.--Some Account of the Natural History of this
Part of the Coast.


CHAPTER V.

Farther Examination in the Boats for the Purpose of Connecting the
Shores of Lyon Inlet with that of Gore Bay.--Continuity of the
Land determined.--Fresh Detention by the Ice.--Boats carried over
Land.--Return to the Ships.--Progress out of the Inlet prevented
by the Ice.--The Fury grounds upon a Rock.--Anchor in Safety
Cove.--Heavy Easterly Gales.--Proceed out of the Inlet.--Arrival
in a Bay on the south Side of Winter Island.--Ships secured in
Winter-quarters.


CHAPTER VI.

Precautions for the Security of the Ships and their Stores--And
for the Health and Comfort of the Crews.--Establishment of
Theatrical Entertainments and Schools.--Erection of an Observatory
and House on Shore.--State of Health at this Period.--Partial
Disruption of the Ice in the Bay.--Anchors and Cables taken to the
Shore.--Gradual Increase of Cold, Appearance of the Aurora
Borealis on several Occasions, and various other Meteorological
Phenomena to the Close of the Year 1821.


CHAPTER VII.

Many Foxes caught.--Continued Open Water in the Offing.--Partial
Disruption of the Ice in the Bay.--Meteorological Phenomena, and
Temperature of Animals.--Arrival of a Tribe of Esquimaux.--First
Meeting and subsequent Intercourse with them.--Esquimaux in Want
of Provisions.--Supplied with Bread-dust.--Some Account of a
Sealing Excursion with them.--Fresh Disruption of the Ice in the
Bay.--Closing of the Winter Theatre.--Meteorological Phenomena
till the End of February, 1822.


CHAPTER VIII.

A Journey performed across Winter Island.--Sufferings of the Party
by Frost.--Departure of Some of the Esquimaux, and a separate
Village established on the Ice.--Various Meteorological
Phenomena.--Okotook and his Wife brought on board.--Anecdotes
relating to them.--Ships released from the Ice by sawing.


CHAPTER IX.

Increased Extent of open Water in the Offing.--A Travelling Party
despatched to the Northward.--Unsuccessful Attempt to raise
Vegetables on Shore.--Decease of James Pringle.--A Party of
Esquimaux build Huts near the Ships.--Return of the Travellers,
and Account of their Journey.--First Appearance of the
Plants.--Birds become numerous.--Commence cutting a Canal through
the Ice for liberating the Ships.--Illness and Decease of John
Reid and William Souter.--Breaking up of the Ice in the
Bay.--Account of Winter Island.--Abstract of Observations made
there.




TECHNICAL TERMS PECULIAR TO THE NAVIGATION AMONG ICE


BAY-ICE.--Ice newly formed upon the surface of the sea. The
expression is, however, applied also to ice a foot or two in
thickness.

BESET.--The situation of a ship when closely surrounded by ice.

BIGHT.--An indentation in a floe of ice, like a bay, by which name
it is sometimes called.

BLINK.--A peculiar brightness in the atmosphere, often assuming an
arch-like form, which is generally perceptible over ice or land
covered with snow. The blink of land, as well as that over _large_
quantities of ice, is usually of a yellowish cast.

BORE.--The operation of "boring" through loose ice consists in
entering it under a press of sail, and forcing the ship through by
separating the masses.

CALF.--A mass of ice lying under a floe near its margin, and, when
disengaged from that position, rising with violence to the surface
of the water. See TONGUE.

CLEAR WATER.--Any part of the sea unencumbered with ice.

CROW'S NEST.--A small circular house like a cask, fixed at the
masthead, in which the look-out man sits, either to guide the ship
through the ice or to give notice of whales.

DOCK.--In a floe may be natural or artificial; the former being
simply a small "bight," in which a ship is placed to secure her
from the danger of external pressure; and the latter, a square
space cut out with saws for a similar purpose.

FIELD.--A sheet of ice generally of great thickness, and of too
great extent to be seen over from a ship's masthead.

FLINCHING.--The operation of stripping a sea-animal of its skin
and blubber.

FLOE.--The same as a field, except that its extent can be
distinguished from a ship's masthead. A "bay-floe" is a floe of
ice newly formed.

FLOE-PIECE.--An expression generally applied to small pieces of
floes, not more than a furlong square.

A HOLE or POOL of Water.--A small space of "clear water," when the
rest of the sea is covered with ice.

HUMMOCK.--A mass of ice rising to a considerable height above the
general level of a floe, and forming a part of it. Hummocks are
originally raised by the pressure of floes against each other.

LAND-ICE.--Ice attached to the land, either in floes or in heavy
grounded masses lying near the shore.

LANE of Water.--A narrow channel among the masses of ice, through
which a boat or ship may pass.

LEAD.--A channel through the ice. A ship is said to "take the
right lead" when she follows a channel conducting her into a more
navigable sea, and _vice versâ_.

MAKING-OFF Blubber.--The operation of putting it into casks.

NIPPED.--The situation of a ship when forcibly pressed by ice.

PACK.--A large body of ice, consisting of separate masses, lying
close together, and whose extent cannot be seen.

PANCAKE-ICE.--Newly formed ice, assuming the peculiar conformation
of numberless patches of "sludge," and giving the surface of the
sea the appearance of a handsome pavement.

PATCH of Ice.--The same as a pack, but of small dimensions.

SAILING-ICE.--Ice of which the masses are so much separated as to
allow a ship to sail among them.

SALLYING a Ship.--The operation of causing her to roll, by the men
running in a body from side to side, so as to relieve her from the
adhesion and friction of the young ice around her.

SLUDGE.--Ice of the consistence of thick honey, offering little
impediment to a ship while in this state, but greatly favouring
the formation of a "bay-floe."

STREAM.--A long and narrow, but generally continuous, collection
of loose ice.

TONGUE.--A mass of ice projecting under water from an iceberg or
floe, and generally distinguishable at a considerable depth of
smooth water. It differs from a "calf" in being fixed to, or a
part of the larger body.

WATER-SKY.--A dark appearance in the sky, indicating "clear water"
in that direction, and forming a striking contrast with the
"blink" over land or ice.

YOUNG-ICE.--Nearly the same as "bay-ice," but generally applied to
ice more recently formed than the latter.




VOYAGE FOR THE DISCOVERY OF A NORTHWEST PASSAGE




INTRODUCTION.


Lieutenant Parry was appointed to the command of his majesty's
ship the Hecla, a bomb of 375 tons, on the 16th of January, 1819;
and the Griper, gun brig, 180 tons, commissioned by Lieutenant
Matthew Liddon, was at the same time directed to put herself under
his orders. The object of the expedition was to attempt the
discovery of a Northwest Passage into the Pacific. The vessels
were rigged after the manner of a bark, as being the most
convenient among the ice, and requiring the smallest number of men
to work them. They were furnished with provisions and stores for
two years; in addition to which, there was a large supply of fresh
meats and soups preserved in tin cases, essence of malt and hops,
essence of spruce, and other extra stores, adapted to cold
climates and a long voyage. The ships were ballasted entirely with
coals; an abundance of warm clothing was allowed, a wolfskin
blanket being supplied to each officer and man, besides a
housing-cloth, similar to that with which wagons are usually
covered, to make a sort of tent on board. Although the finding a
passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific was the main object of
the expedition, yet the ascertaining many points of natural
history, geography, &c., was considered a most important object,
never to be lost sight of. After they had passed the latitude of
65° north, they were from time to time to throw overboard a
bottle, closely sealed, containing a paper, stating the date and
position at which it was launched. Whenever they landed on the
northern coast of North America, they were to erect a pole, having
a flag, and bury a bottle at the foot of it, containing an
abstract of their proceedings and future intentions, for the
information of Lieutenant Franklin, who had been sent on a land
expedition to explore that coast from the mouth of the Coppermine
River of Hearne.

According to the official instructions, the interests of science
were not neglected, and many important facts were made out; among
the most curious, it may be mentioned, that it appears to be
proved that the North Pole is not the coldest point of the Arctic
hemisphere, but that the place where the expedition wintered is
one of the coldest spots on the face of the globe.




CHAPTER I.

Passage across the Atlantic.--Enter Davis's Strait.--Unsuccessful
Attempt to penetrate the Ice to the Western Coast.--Voyage up the
Strait.--Passage through the Ice to the Western Coast.--Arrival
off Possession Bay, on the Southern Side of the Entrance into Sir
James Lancaster's Sound.


In the beginning of May, 1819, the Hecla and Griper were towed
down the river; the guns and gunner's stores were received on
board on the 6th; and the instruments and chronometers were
embarked on the evening of the 8th, when the two ships anchored at
the Nore. The Griper, being a slower sailer, was occasionally
taken in tow by the Hecla, and they rounded the northern point of
the Orkneys, at the distance of two miles and a half; on Thursday,
the 20th of the same month.

Nothing of moment occurred for several days; but the wind veered
to the westward on the 30th, and increased to a fresh gale, with
an irregular sea and heavy rain, which brought us under our
close-reefed topsails. At half past one, P.M., we began to cross
the space in which the "Sunken Land of Buss" is laid down in
Steel's chart from England to Greenland; and, in the course of
this and the following day, we tried for soundings several times
without success.

Early in the morning of the 18th of June, in standing to the
northward, we fell in with the first "stream" of ice we had seen,
and soon after saw several icebergs. At daylight the water had
changed its colour to a dirty brownish tinge. The temperature of
the water was 36½°, being 3° colder than on the preceding night; a
decrease that was probably occasioned by our approach to the ice.
We ran through a narrow part of the stream, and found the ice
beyond it to be "packed" and heavy. The birds were more numerous
than usual; and, besides the fulmar peterels, boatswains, and
kittiwakes, we saw, for the first time, some rotges, dovekies, or
black guillemots, and terns, the latter known best to seamen by
the name of the Greenland swallow.

On the clearing up of a fog on the morning of the 24th, we saw a
long chain of icebergs, extending several miles, in a N.b.W. and
S.b.E. direction; and, as we approached them, we found a quantity
of "floe-ice" intermixed with them, beyond which, to the westward,
nothing but ice could be seen. At noon we had soundings, with one
hundred and twenty fathoms of line, on a bottom of fine sand,
which makes it probable that most of the icebergs were aground in
this place. In the afternoon we sailed within the edge of the ice,
as much as a light westerly wind would admit, in order to approach
the western land. Some curious effects of atmospheric refraction
were observed this evening, the low ice being at times considerably
raised in the horizon, and constantly altering its appearance.

The weather being nearly calm on the morning of the 25th, all the
boats were kept ahead, to tow the ships through the ice to the
westward. It remained tolerably open till four P.M., when a
breeze, freshening up from the eastward, caused the ice, through
which we had lately been towing, to close together so rapidly,
that we had scarcely time to hoist up the boats before the ships
were immovably "beset." The clear sea which we had left was about
four miles to the eastward of us, while to the westward nothing
but one extensive field of ice could be seen. It is impossible to
conceive a more helpless situation than that of a ship thus beset,
when all the power that can be applied will not alter the
direction of her head a single degree of the compass.

A large black whale, being the first, was seen near the ships. It
is usual for these animals to descend head foremost, displaying
the broad fork of their enormous tail above the surface of the
water; but, on this occasion, the ice was so close as not to admit
of this mode of descent, and the fish went down tail foremost, to
the great amusement of our Greenland sailors.

While in this state a large white bear came near the Griper, and
was killed by her people, but he sunk between the pieces of ice.
This animal had probably been attracted by the smell of some red
herrings which the men were frying at the time. It is a common
practice with the Greenland sailors to take advantage of the
strong sense of smelling which these creatures possess, by
enticing them near the ships in this manner.

The swell had somewhat subsided on the 29th, but the ships
remained firmly fixed in the ice as before. In the course of the
day we saw land bearing N. 69° W. about thirteen leagues distant,
appearing from the masthead like a group of islands, and situated
near to the entrance of Cumberland Strait: the soundings were one
hundred and thirty-five fathoms; the temperature of the sea at
that depth 30°; that of the surface being the same, and of the air
34°. On the 30th the ice began to slacken a little more about the
ships; and, after two hours' heaving with a hawser on each bow
brought to the capstan and windlass, we succeeded in moving the
Hecla about her own length to the eastward, where alone any clear
sea was visible. The ice continuing to open still more in the
course of the day, we were at length enabled to get both ships
into open water, after eight hours' incessant labour.

On the 1st and 2d of July, we continued to keep close to the edge
of the ice without perceiving any opening in it. Its outer margin
consisted of heavy detached masses, much washed by the sea, and
formed what is technically called "a pack," this name being given
to ice when so closely connected as not to admit the passage of a
ship between the masses. Within the margin of the pack, it
appeared to consist of heavy and extensive floes, having a bright
ice-blink over them; but no clear water could be discovered to the
westward. The birds, which had hitherto been seen since our first
approach to the ice, were fulmar peterels, little auks, looms, and
a few gulls.

On the morning of the 3d the wind blew strong from the eastward,
with a short, breaking sea, and thick, rainy weather, which made
our situation for some hours rather an unpleasant one, the ice
being close under our lee. Fortunately, however, we weathered it
by stretching back a few miles to the southward. In the afternoon
the wind moderated, and we tacked again to the northward, crossing
the Arctic circle at four P.M., in the longitude of 57° 27' W. We
passed at least fifty icebergs in the course of the day, many of
them of large dimensions. Towards midnight, the wind having
shifted to the southwest and moderated, another extensive chain of
very large icebergs appeared to the northward: as we approached
them the wind died away, and the ships' heads were kept to the
northward, only by the steerage way given to them by a heavy
southerly swell, which, dashing the loose ice with tremendous
force against the bergs, sometimes raised a white spray over the
latter to the height of more than one hundred feet, and, being
accompanied with a loud noise, exactly resembling the roar of
distant thunder, presented a scene at once sublime and terrific.
We could find no bottom near these icebergs with one hundred and
ten fathoms of line.

At four A.M. on the 4th we came to a quantity of loose ice, which
lay straggling among the bergs; and as there was a light breeze
from the southward, and I was anxious to avoid, if possible, the
necessity of going to the eastward, I pushed the Hecla into the
ice, in the hope of being able to make our way through it. We had
scarcely done so, however, before it fell calm; when the ship
became perfectly unmanageable, and was for some time at the mercy
of the swell, which drifted us fast towards the bergs. All the
boats were immediately sent ahead to tow; and the Griper's signal
was made not to enter the ice. After two hours' hard pulling, we
succeeded in getting the Hecla back again into clear water, and to
a sufficient distance from the icebergs, which it is very
dangerous to approach when there is a swell. At noon we were in
lat. 69° 50' 47", long. 57° 07' 56", being near the middle of the
narrowest part of Davis's Strait, which is here not more than
fifty leagues across.

On the 5th it was necessary to pass through some heavy streams of
ice, in order to avoid the loss of time by going round to the
eastward. On this, as on many other occasions, the advantage
possessed by a ship of considerable weight in the water, in
separating the heavy masses of ice, was Very apparent. In some of
the streams through which the Hecla passed, a vessel of a hundred
tons less burden must have been immovably beset. The Griper was on
this and many other occasions only enabled to follow the Hecla by
taking advantage of the openings made by the latter.

A herd of seahorses being seen lying on a piece of ice, our boat
succeeded in killing one of them. These animals usually lie
huddled together like pigs, one over the other, and are so
stupidly tame as to allow a boat to approach them within a few
yards without moving. When at length they are disturbed, they dash
into the water in great confusion. It may be worth remarking, as a
proof how tenacious the walrus sometimes is of life, that the
animal killed to-day struggled violently for ten minutes after it
was struck, and towed the boat twenty or thirty yards, after which
the iron of the harpoon broke; and yet it was found, on
examination, that the iron barb had penetrated both auricles of
the heart. A quantity of the blubber was put into casks, as a
winter's supply of lamp-oil.

A large bear being seen on a piece of ice, near which we were
passing on the 10th, a boat was despatched in pursuit, and our
people succeeded in killing and towing it on board. As these
animals sink immediately on being mortally wounded, some dexterity
is requisite to secure them, by first throwing a rope over the
neck, at which many of the Greenland seamen are remarkably expert.
It is customary for the boats of the whalers to have two or three
lines coiled in them, which not only gives them great stability,
but, with good management, makes it difficult for a bear, when
swimming, to put his paw upon the gunwale, which they generally
endeavour to do; whereas, with our boats, which are more light and
crank, and therefore very easily heeled over, I have more than
once seen a bear on the point of taking possession of them. Great
caution should therefore be used under such circumstances in
attacking these ferocious creatures. We have always found a
boarding-pike the most useful weapon for this purpose. The lance
used by the whalers will not easily penetrate the skin, and a
musket-ball, except when very close, is scarcely more efficacious.

On the 17th, the margin of the ice appearing more open than we had
yet seen it, and there being some appearance of a "water-sky" to
the northwest, I was induced to run the ships into the ice, though
the weather was too thick to allow us to see more than a mile or
two in that direction. We were, at noon, in latitude 72° 00' 21",
longitude 59° 43' 04", the depth of water being one hundred and
ninety fathoms, on a muddy bottom. The wind shortly after died
away, as usual, and, after making a number tacks, in order to gain
all we could to the westward, we found ourselves so closely,
hemmed in by the ice on every side, that there was no longer room
to work the ships, and we therefore made them fast to a floe till
the weather should clear up. The afternoon was employed in taking
on board a supply of water from the floe. It may be proper at once
to remark that, from this time till the end of the voyage,
snow-water was exclusively made use of on board the ships for
every purpose. During the summer months, it is found in abundance
in the pools upon the floes and icebergs; and in the winter, snow
was dissolved in the coppers for our daily consumption. The fog
cleared away in the evening, when we perceived that no farther
progress could be made through the ice, into which we sailed to
the westward about twelve miles. We were therefore once more under
the necessity of returning to the eastward, lest a change of wind
should beset the ships in their present situation.

A thick fog came on again at night, and prevailed till near noon
on the 18th, when we came to a close but narrow stream of ice,
lying exactly across our course, and at right angles to the main
body of the ice. As this stream extended to the eastward as far as
we could see from the "crow's nest," an endeavour was made to push
the ships with all sail through the narrowest part. The facility
with which this operation, technically called "boring," is
performed, depends chiefly on having a fresh and free wind, with
which we were not favoured on this occasion; so that, when we had
forced the ships about one hundred yards into the ice, their way
was completely stopped. The stream consisted of such small pieces
of ice, that, when an attempt was made to warp the ships ahead by
fastening lines to some of the heaviest masses near them, the ice
itself came home, without the ships being moved forward.--Every
effort to extricate them from this helpless situation proved
fruitless for more than two hours, when the Hecla was at length
backed out, and succeeded in pushing through another part of the
stream in which a small opening appeared just at that moment. All
our boats were immediately despatched to the assistance of the
Griper, which still remained beset, and which no effort could move
in any direction We at length resorted to the expedient of sending
a whale-line to her from the Hecla, and then, making all sail upon
the latter ship, we succeeded in towing her out, head to wind,
till she was enabled to proceed in clear water. The crossing of
this stream of ice, of which, the breadth scarcely exceeded three
hundred yards, occupied us constantly for more than five hours,
and may serve as an example of the detention to which ships are
liable in this kind of navigation.

Early on the morning of the 21st the fog cleared away, and
discovered to us the land called by Davis, Hope Sanderson and the
Woman's Islands, being the first land we had seen in sailing
northward into Baffin's Bay, from the lat. of 63¾°. We found
ourselves in the midst of a great number of very high icebergs, of
which I counted, from the crow's-nest, eighty-eight, besides many
smaller ones.

Having now reached the latitude of 73° without seeing a single
opening in the ice, and being unwilling to increase our distance
from Sir James Lancaster's Sound by proceeding much farther to the
northward, I determined once more to enter the ice in this place,
and to try the experiment of forcing our way through it, in order
to get into the open sea. Being therefore favoured with clear
weather, and a moderate breeze from the southeastward, we ran into
the ice, which for the first two miles consisted of detached
pieces, but afterward of floes of considerable extent, and six or
seven feet in thickness. The wind died away towards midnight, and
the weather was serene and clear.

At six A.M. on the 23d, a thick fog came on, which rendered it
impossible to see our way any farther. We therefore warped to an
iceberg, to which the ships were made fast at noon, to wait the
clearing up of the fog, being in lat. 73° 04' 10", long. 60° 11'
30". At eight P.M. the weather cleared up, and a few small pools
of open water were seen here and there, but the ice was generally
as close as before, and the wind being to the westward of north,
it was not deemed advisable to move.

The weather, being clear in the morning of the 25th, and a few
narrow lanes of water appearing to the westward, the Griper was
made fast astern of the Hecla; and her crew being sent to assist
in manning our capstan, we proceeded to warp the ships through the
ice. This method, which is often adopted by our whalers, has the
obvious advantage of applying the whole united force in separating
the masses of ice which lie in the way of the first ship, allowing
the second, or even third, to follow close astern, with very
little obstruction. In this manner we had advanced about four
miles to the westward by eight P.M., after eleven hours of very
laborious exertion; and having then come to the end of the clear
water, and the weather being again foggy, the ships were secured
in a deep "bight," or bay in a floe, called by the sailors a
"natural dock."

Early on the morning of the 26th there was clear water as far as
we could see to the westward, which, on account of the fog, did
not exceed the distance of three hundred yards. We made sail,
however, and having groped our way for about half a mile, found
the ice once more close in every direction except that in which we
had been sailing, obliging us to make the ships fast to a floe. At
half past three P.M. the weather cleared up, and a few narrow
lanes of water being seen to the westward, every exertion was
immediately made to get into them. On beginning to heave, however,
we found that the "hole" of water in which the Hecla lay was now
so completely enclosed by ice that no passage out of it could be
found. We tried every corner, but to no purpose; all the power we
could apply being insufficient to move the heavy masses of ice
which had fixed themselves firmly between us and the lanes of
water without. In the mean time, Lieutenant Liddon had succeeded
in advancing about three hundred yards, and had placed the
Griper's bow between two heavy floes, which it was necessary to
separate before any farther progress could be made. Both ships
continued to heave at their hawsers occasionally, as the ice
appeared to slacken a little, by which means they were now and
then drawn ahead a few inches at a time, but did not advance more
than half a dozen yards in the course of the night. By our nearing
several bergs to the northward, the ice appeared to be drifting in
that direction, the wind being moderate from the southward.

About three A.M., Tuesday, 27th, by a sudden motion of the ice, we
succeeded in getting the Hecla out of her confined situation, and
ran her up astern of the Griper. The clear water had made so much
to the westward, that a narrow neck of ice was all that was now
interposed between the ships and a large open space in that
quarter. Both ships' companies were therefore ordered upon the ice
to saw off the neck, when the floes suddenly opened sufficiently
to allow the Griper to push through under all sail. No time was
lost in the attempt to get the Hecla through after her; but, by
one of those accidents to which this navigation is liable, and
which render it so precarious and uncertain, a piece of loose ice,
which lay between the two ships, was drawn after the Griper by the
eddy produced by her motion, and completely blocked the narrow
passage through which we were about to follow. Before we could
remove this obstruction by hauling it back out of the channel, the
floes were again pressed together, wedging it firmly and immovably
between them: the saws were immediately set to work, and used with
great effect; but it was not till eleven o'clock that we
succeeded, after seven hours' labour, in getting the Hecla into
the lanes of clear water which opened more and more to the
westward.

On the 29th we had so much clear water, that the ships had a very
perceptible pitching motion, which, from the closeness of the ice,
does not very often occur in the Polar regions, and which is
therefore hailed with pleasure as an indication of an open sea. At
five P.M. the swell increased considerably, and, as the wind
freshened up from the northeast, the ice gradually disappeared; so
that by six o'clock we were sailing in an open sea, perfectly free
from obstruction of any kind.

We now seemed all at once to have got into the headquarters of the
whales. They were so numerous that I directed the number to be
counted during each watch, and no less than eighty-two are
mentioned in this day's log. Mr. Allison, the Greenland master,
considered them generally as large ones, and remarked that a fleet
of whalers might easily have obtained a cargo here in a few days.
In the afternoon the wind broke us of from the N.N.W., which
obliged us to cast off the Griper, and we carried all sail ahead
to make the land. We saw it at half past five P.M., being the high
land about Possession Bay, and at the same time several streams of
loose but heavy ice came in sight, which a fresh breeze was
drifting fast to the southeastward.

The wind increased to a fresh breeze on the morning of the 31st,
which prevented our making much way to the westward. We stood in
towards Cape Byam Martin, and sounded in eighty fathoms on a rocky
bottom, at the distance of two miles in an east direction from it.
We soon after discovered the flagstaff which had been erected on
Possession Mount on the former expedition; an object which, though
insignificant in itself, called up every person immediately on
deck to look at and to greet it as an old acquaintance.

The land immediately at the hack of Possession Bay rises in a
gentle slope from the sea, presenting an open and extensive space
of low ground, flanked by hills to the north and south. In this
valley, and even on the hills, to the height of six or seven
hundred feet above the sea, there was scarcely any snow, but the
mountains at the back were completely covered with it. Some pieces
of birch-bark having been picked up in the bed of this stream in
1818, which gave reason to suppose that wood might be found
growing in the interior, I directed Mr. Fisher to walk up it,
accompanied by a small party, and to occupy an hour or two while
the Griper was coming up, and Captain Sabine and myself were
employed upon the beach, in examining the nature and productions
of the country.

Mr. Fisher reported, on his return, that he had followed the
stream between three and four miles, where it turned to the
southwest, without discovering any indications of a wooded
country; but a sufficient explanation respecting the birch-bark
was perhaps furnished by his finding, at the distance of a quarter
of a mile from the sea, a piece of whalebone two feet ten inches
in length and two inches in breadth, having a number of circular
holes very neatly and regularly perforated along one of its edges,
which had undoubtedly formed part of an Esquimaux sledge. This
circumstance affording a proof of the Esquimaux having visited
this part of the coast at no very distant period, it was concluded
that the piece of bark above alluded to had been brought hither by
these people. From the appearance of the whalebone, it might have
been lying there for four or five years. That none of the
Esquimaux tribe had visited this part of the coast since we landed
there in 1818, was evident from the flagstaff then erected still
remaining untouched. Mr. Fisher found every part of the valley
quite free from snow as high as he ascended it: and the following
fact seems to render it probable that no great quantity either of
snow or sleet had fallen here since our last visit. Mr. Fisher had
not proceeded far, till, to his great surprise, he encountered the
tracks of human feet upon the banks of the stream, which appeared
so fresh that he at first imagined them to have been recently made
by some natives, but which, on examination, were distinctly
ascertained to be the marks of our own shoes, made eleven months
before.




CHAPTER II.

Entrance into Sir James Lancaster's Sound of
Baffin.--Uninterrupted Passage to the Westward.--Discovery and
Examination of Prince Regent's Inlet.--Progress to the Southward
stopped by Ice.--Return to the Northward.--Pass Barrow's Strait,
and enter the Polar Sea.


We were now about to enter and to explore that great sound or
inlet which has obtained a degree of celebrity beyond what it
might otherwise have been considered to possess, from the very
opposite opinions which have been held with regard to it. To us it
was peculiarly interesting, as being the point to which our
instructions more particularly directed our attention; and I may
add, what I believe we all felt, it was that point of the voyage
which was to determine the success or failure of the expedition,
according as one or other of the opposite opinions alluded to
should be corroborated. It will readily be conceived, then, how
great our anxiety was for a change of the westerly wind and swell,
which, on the 1st of August, set down Sir James Lancaster's Sound,
and prevented our making much progress. Several whales were seen
in the course of the day, and Mr. Allison remarked that this was
the only part of Baffin's Bay in which he had ever seen young
whales; for it is a matter of surprise to the whalers in general,
that they seldom or never meet with young ones on this fishery, as
they are accustomed to do in the seas of Spitzbergen.

The Griper continued to detain us so much, that I determined on
making the best of our way to the westward, and ordered the Hecla
to be hove to in the evening, and sent Lieutenant Liddon an
instruction, with some signals, which might facilitate our meeting
in case of fog; and I appointed as a place of rendezvous the
meridian of 85° west, and as near the middle of the sound as
circumstances would permit. As soon, therefore, as the boat
returned from the Griper, we carried a press of sail, and in the
course of the evening saw the northern shore of the sound looming
through the clouds which hung over it.

The weather being clear in the evening of the 2d, we had the first
distinct view of both sides of the sound; and the difference in
the character of the two shores was very apparent; that on the
south consisting of high and peaked mountains, completely
snow-clad, except on the lower parts, while the northern coast has
generally a smoother outline, and had, comparatively with the
other, little snow upon it; the difference in this last respect
appearing to depend principally on the difference in their
absolute height. The sea was open before us, free from ice or
land; and the Hecla pitched so much from the westerly swell in the
course of the day, as to throw the water once or twice into the
stern windows; a circumstance which, together with other
appearances, we were willing to attribute to an open sea in the
desired direction. More than forty black whales were seen during
the day.

We made little way on the 3d, but being favoured at length by the
easterly breeze which was bringing up the Griper, and for which we
had long been looking with much impatience, a crowd of sail was
set to carry us with all rapidity to the westward. It is more easy
to imagine than to describe the almost breathless anxiety which
was now visible in every countenance, while, as the breeze
continued to a fresh gale, we ran quickly up the sound. The
mastheads were crowded by the officers and men during the whole
afternoon; and an unconcerned observer, if any could have been
unconcerned on such an occasion, would have been amused by the
eagerness with which the various reports from the crow's-nest were
received; all, however, hitherto favourable to our most sanguine
hopes.

Our course was nearly due west, and the wind still continuing to
freshen, took us in a few hours nearly out of sight of the Griper.
The only ice which we met with consisted of a few large bergs very
much washed by the sea; and the weather being remarkably clear, so
as to enable us to run with perfect safety, we were by midnight,
in a great measure, relieved from our anxiety respecting the
supposed continuity of land at the bottom of this magnificent
inlet, having reached the longitude of 83° 12', where the two
shores are still above thirteen leagues apart, without the
slightest appearance of any land to the westward of us for four or
five points of the compass.

Having made the ship snug, so as to be in readiness to round to
should the land be seen ahead, and the Griper having come up
within a few miles of us, we again bore up at one A.M., the 4th.
At half past three, Lieutenant Beechey, who had relieved me on
deck, discovered from the crow's-nest a reef of rocks, in-shore of
us to the northward, on which the sea was breaking. The cliffs on
this part of the coast present a singular appearance, being
stratified horizontally, and having a number of regular projecting
masses of rock, broad at the bottom, and coming to a point at the
top, resembling so many buttresses, raised by art at equal
intervals.

After lying-to for an hour, we again bore up to the westward, and
soon after discovered a cape, afterward named by Captain Sabine,
CAPE FELLFOOT, which appeared to form the termination of this
coast; and as the haze, which still prevailed to the south,
prevented our seeing any land in that quarter, and the sea was
literally as free from ice as any part of the Atlantic, we began
to flatter ourselves that we had fairly entered the Polar Sea, and
some of the most sanguine among us had even calculated the bearing
and distance of Icy Cape, as a matter of no very difficult or
improbable accomplishment. This pleasing prospect was rendered the
more flattering by the sea having, as we thought, regained the
usual oceanic colour, and by a long swell which was rolling in
from the southward and eastward. At six P.M., however, land was
reported to be seen ahead. The vexation and anxiety produced on
every countenance by such a report were but too visible, until, on
a nearer approach, it was found to be only an island, of no very
large extent, and that, on each side of it, the horizon still
appeared clear for several points of the compass. At eight P.M. we
came to some ice of no great breadth or thickness, extending
several miles in a direction nearly parallel to our course; and as
we could see clear water over it to the southward, I was for some
time in the hope that it would prove a detached stream, from which
no obstruction to our progress westerly was to be apprehended. At
twenty minutes past ten, however, the weather having become hazy
and the wind light, we perceived that the ice, along which we had
been sailing for the last two hours, was joined, at the distance
of half a mile to the westward of us, to a compact and impenetrable
body of floes, which lay across the whole breadth of the strait,
formed by the island and the western point of Maxwell Bay. We
hauled our wind to the northward, just in time to avoid being
embayed in the ice, on the outer edge of which a considerable surf,
the effect of the late gale, was then rolling.

While the calm and thick weather lasted, a number of the officers
and men amused themselves in the boats, in endeavouring to kill
some of the white whales which were swimming about the ships in
great numbers; but the animals were so wary, that they would
scarcely suffer the boats to approach them within thirty or forty
yards without diving. Mr. Fisher described them to be generally
from eighteen to twenty feet in length; and he stated that he had
several times heard them emit a shrill, ringing sound, not unlike
that of musical glasses when badly played; This sound, he farther
observed, was most distinctly heard when they happened to swim
directly beneath the boat, even when they were several feet under
water, and ceased altogether on their coming to the surface. We
saw also, for the first time, one or two shoals of narwhals,
called by the sailors sea-unicorns.

A steady breeze springing up from the W.N.W. in the afternoon, the
ships stood to the northward till we had distinctly made out that
no passage to the westward could at present be found between the
ice and the land. The weather having become clear about this time,
we perceived that there was a large open space to the southward,
where no land was visible; and for this opening, over which there
was a dark water-sky, our course was now directed.

Since the time when we first entered Sir James Lancaster's Sound,
the sluggishness of the compasses, as well as the amount of their
irregularity produced by the attraction of the ship's iron, had
been found very rapidly, though uniformly, to increase as we
proceeded to the westward; so much, indeed, that, for the last two
days, we had been under the necessity of giving up altogether the
usual observations for determining the variation of the needle on
board the ships. This irregularity became more and more obvious as
we now advanced to the southward, which rendered it not improbable
that we were making a very near approach to the magnetic pole. For
the purposes of navigation, therefore, the compasses were from
this time no longer consulted; and in a few days afterward, the
binnacles were removed as useless lumber from the deck to the
carpenter's storeroom, where they remained during the rest of the
season.

A dark sky to the southwest had given us hopes of finding a
westerly passage to the south of the ice along which we were now
sailing; more especially as the inlet began to widen considerably
as we advanced in that direction: but at three A.M. on the morning
of the 8th, we perceived that the ice ran close in with a point of
land bearing S.b.E. from us, which appeared to form the southern
extremity of the eastern shore.

With the increasing width of the inlet we had flattered ourselves
with increasing hopes; but we soon experienced the mortification
of disappointment. The prospect from the crow's-nest began to
assume a very unpromising appearance, the whole of the western
horizon, from north round to S.b.E., being completely covered with
ice, consisting of heavy and extensive floes, beyond which no
indication of water was visible; instead of which there was a
bright and dazzling iceblink extending from shore to shore. The
western coast of the inlet, however, trended much more to the
westward than before, and no land was visible to the southwest,
though the horizon was so clear in that quarter, that, if any had
existed of moderate height, it might have been easily seen at this
time at the distance of ten or twelve leagues. From these
circumstances, the impression received at the time was, that the
land, both on the eastern and western side of this inlet, would be
one day found to consist of islands.

A breeze sprung up from the northward on the morning of the 12th,
but the weather was so foggy for some hours that we did not know
in what direction it was blowing. As soon as the fog cleared away,
so as to enable us to see a mile or two around us, we found that
the floe to which we had anchored was drifting fast down upon
another body of ice to leeward, threatening to enclose the ships
between them. We therefore cast off and made sail, in order to
beat to the northward, which we found great difficulty in doing,
owing to the quantity of loose ice with which this part of the
inlet was now covered. A remarkably thick fog obscured the eastern
land from our view this evening at the distance of five or six
miles, while the western coast was distinctly visible at four
times that distance.

The weather was beautifully calm and clear on the 13th, when,
being near an opening in the eastern shore, I took the opportunity
of examining it in a boat. It proved to be a bay, a mile wide at
its entrance, and three miles deep in an E.b.S. direction, having
a small but snug cove on the north side, formed by an island,
between which and the main land is a bar of rocks, which
completely shelters the cove from sea or drift ice. We found the
water so deep, that in rowing close along the shore we could
seldom get bottom with seven fathoms of line. The cliffs on the
south side of this bay, to which I gave the name of PORT BOWEN,
resemble, in many places, ruined towers and battlements; and
fragments of the rocks were constantly falling from above. At the
head of the bay is an extensive piece of low flat ground,
intersected by numerous rivulets, which, uniting at a short
distance from the beach, formed a deep and rapid stream, near the
mouth of which we landed. This spot was, I think, the most barren
I ever saw, the ground being almost entirely covered with small
pieces of slaty limestone, among which no vegetation appeared for
more than a mile, to which distance Mr. Ross and myself walked
inland, following the banks of the stream. Among the fragments we
picked up one piece of limestone, on which was the impression of a
fossil-shell. We saw here a great number of young black
guillemots, and a flock of ducks, which we supposed to be of the
eider species.

The narwhals were here very numerous; these animals appear fond of
remaining with their backs exposed above the surface of the water,
in the same manner as the whale, but for a much longer time, and
we frequently also observed their horns erect, and quite
stationary for several minutes together.

The whole of the 14th was occupied in an unsuccessful attempt to
find an opening in the ice to the westward, which remained
perfectly close and compact, with a bright iceblink over it.

The ice continued in the same unfavourable state on the 15th; and
being desirous of turning to some account this vexatious but
unavoidable detention, I left the ship, accompanied by Captain
Sabine and Mr. Hooper, in order to make some observations on
shore, and directed Lieutenant Liddon to send a boat from the
Griper for the same purpose. We landed in one of the numerous
valleys or ravines which occur on this part of the coast, and at a
few miles' distance very much resemble bays, being bounded by high
hills that have the appearance of bluff headlands. We ascended
with some difficulty the hill on the south side of the ravine,
which is very steep, and covered with innumerable detached blocks
of limestone, some of which are constantly rolling down from
above, and afford a very insecure footing. From the top of this
hill, which is about six or seven feet above the level of the sea,
and commands an extensive view to the westward, the prospect was
by no means favourable to the immediate accomplishment of our
object. No water could be seen over the ice to the northwest, and
a bright and dazzling blink covered the whole space comprised
between the islands and the north shore. It was a satisfaction,
however, to find that no _land_ appeared which was likely to
impede our progress; and we had been too much accustomed to the
obstruction occasioned by ice, and too well aware of the
suddenness with which that obstruction is often removed, to be at
all discouraged by present appearances.

On the top of this hill we deposited a bottle containing a short
notice of our visit, and raised over it a small mound of stones;
of these we found no want, for the surface was covered with small
pieces of schistose limestone, and nothing like soil or vegetation
could be seen.

On the 17th we had a fresh breeze from the S.S.W., with so thick a
fog that, in spite of the most unremitting attention to the sails
and the steerage, the ships were constantly receiving heavy shocks
from the loose masses of ice with which the sea was covered, and
which, in the present state of the weather, could not be
distinguished at a sufficient distance to avoid them. On the
weather clearing up in the afternoon, we saw for the first time a
remarkable bluff headland, which forms the northeastern point of
the entrance into Prince Regent's Inlet, and to which I gave the
name of CAPE YORK. A little to the eastward of Cape Fellfoot, we
observed six stripes of snow near the top of the cliff, being very
conspicuous at a great distance, when viewed from the southward.
These stripes, which are formed by the drift of snow between the
buttress-like projections before described, and which remained
equally conspicuous on our return the following year, have
probably at all times much the same appearance, at least about
this season of the year, and may, on this account, perhaps, be
deemed worthy of notice as a landmark.

There being still no prospect of getting a single mile to the
westward, in the neighbourhood of Prince Leopold's Islands, and a
breeze having freshened up from the eastward in the afternoon, I
determined to stand over once more towards the northern shore, in
order to try what could there be done towards effecting our
passage; and at nine P.M., after beating for several hours among
floes and streams of ice, we got into clear water near that coast,
where we found some swell from the eastward. There was just light
enough at midnight to enable us to read and write in the cabin.

The wind and sea increased on the 19th, with a heavy fall of snow,
which, together with the uselessness of the compasses, and the
narrow space in which we were working between the ice and the
land, combined to make our situation for several hours a very
unpleasant one.

On the 21st we had nothing to impede our progress but the want of
wind, the great opening through, which we had hitherto proceeded
from Baffin's Bay being now so perfectly clear of ice, that it was
impossible to believe it to be the same part of the sea, which,
but a day or two before, had been completely covered with floes to
the utmost extent of our view. In the forenoon we picked up a
small piece of wood, which appeared to have been the end of a
boat's yard, and which caused sundry amusing speculations among
our gentlemen; some of whom had just come to the very natural
conclusion that a ship had been here before us, and that,
therefore, we were not entitled to the honour of the first
discovery of that part of the sea on which we were now sailing;
when a stop was suddenly put to this and other ingenious
inductions by the information of one of the seamen, that he had
dropped it out of his boat a fortnight before. I could not get him
to recollect exactly the day on which it had been dropped, but
what he stated was sufficient to convince me that we were not at
that time more than ten or twelve leagues from our present
situation; perhaps not half so much; and that, therefore, here was
no current setting constantly in any one direction.

We perceived, as we proceeded, that the land along which we were
sailing, and which, with the exception of some small inlets, had
appeared to be hitherto continuous from Baffin's Bay, began now to
trend much to the northward, beyond Beechey Island, leaving a
large open space between that coast and the distant land to the
westward, which now appeared like an island, of which the extremes
to the north and south were distinctly visible. The latter was a
remarkable headland, having at its extremity two small table-hills,
somewhat resembling boats turned bottom upward, and was named
CAPE HOTHAM. At sunset we had a clear and extensive view to the
northward, between Cape Hotham and the eastern land. On the
latter, several headlands were discovered and named; between the
northernmost of these, called CAPE BOWDEN, and the island to the
westward, there was a channel of more than eight leagues in width,
in which neither land nor ice could be seen from the masthead. To
this noble channel I gave the name of WELLINGTON. The arrival off
this grand opening was an event for which we had long been looking
with much anxiety and impatience; for the continuity of land to
the northward had always been a source of uneasiness to us,
principally from the possibility that it might take a turn to the
southward and unite with the coast of America. The appearance of
this broad opening, free from ice, and of the land on each side of
it, more especially that on the west, leaving scarcely a doubt on
our minds of the latter being an island, relieved us from all
anxiety on that score; and every one felt that we were now finally
disentangled from the land which forms the western side of
Baffin's Bay; and that, in fact, we had actually entered the Polar
Sea.

Though two thirds of the month of August had now elapsed, I had
every reason to be satisfied with the progress which we had
hitherto made. I calculated upon the sea being navigable for six
weeks to come, and probably more, if the state of the ice would
permit us to edge away to the southward in our progress westerly:
our prospects, indeed, were truly exhilarating; the ships had
suffered no injury; we had plenty of provisions; crews in high
health and spirits; a sea, if not open, at least navigable; and a
zealous and unanimous determination, in both officers and men, to
accomplish, by all possible means, the grand object on which we
had the happiness to be employed.




CHAPTER III.

Favourable Appearances of an open Westerly Passage.--Land to the
Northward, a Series of Islands.--General Appearance of them.--Meet
with some Obstruction from low Islands surrounded with
Ice.--Remains of Esquimaux Huts, and natural Productions of Byam
Martin Island.--Tedious Navigation from Fogs and Ice.--Difficulty
of Steering a Proper Course.--Arrival and Landing on Melville
Island.--Proceed to the Westward, and reach the Meridian of 110°
W. Long., the first Stage in the Scale of Rewards granted by Act
of Parliament.


A calm which prevailed during the night kept us quite stationary
till three A.M. on the 23d, when a fresh breeze sprung up from the
northward, and all sail was made for Cape Hotham, to the southward
of which it was now my intention to seek a direct passage towards
Behring's Strait. Wellington Channel, to the northward of us, was
as open and navigable to the utmost extent of our view as any part
of the Atlantic; but as it lay at right angles to our coarse, and
there was still an opening at least ten leagues wide to the
southward of Cornwallis Island, I could have no hesitation in
deciding which of the two it was our business to pursue. It is
impossible to conceive anything more animating than the quick and
unobstructed run with which we were favoured, from Beechey Island
across to Cape Hotham. Most men have, probably, at one time or
another, experienced that elevation of spirits which is usually
produced by rapid motion of any kind; and it will readily be
conceived how much this feeling was heightened in us, in the few
instances in which it occurred, by the slow and tedious manner in
which the greater part of our navigation had been performed in
these seas.

At noon we had reached the longitude of 94° 43' 15", the latitude
by observation being 74° 20' 52", when we found that the land
which then formed the western extreme on this side was a second
island, which I called GRIFFITH ISLAND. The ice in this
neighbourhood was covered with innumerable "hummocks," and the
floes were from seven to ten feet in thickness.

After various unsuccessful attempts to get through the ice which
now lay in our way, we were at length so fortunate as to
accomplish this object by "boring" through a number of heavy
"streams," which occasioned the ships to receive many severe
shocks; and, at half an hour before midnight, we were able to,
pursue our course, through "sailing ice," to the westward.

The weather was at this time remarkably serene and clear; and
although we saw a line of ice to the southward of us, lying in a
direction nearly east and west, or parallel to the course on which
we were steering, and some more land appeared to the westward, yet
the space of open water was still so broad, and the prospect from
the masthead, upon the whole, so flattering, that I thought the
chances of our separation had now become greater than before; and
I therefore considered it right to furnish Lieutenant Liddon with
fresh instructions, and to appoint some new place of rendezvous in
case of unavoidable separation from the Hecla. At ten o'clock,
after having had a clear view of the ice and of the land about
sunset, and finding that there was at present no passage to the
westward, we hauled off to the southeast, in the hope of finding
some opening in the ice to the southward, by which we might get
round in the desired direction. We were encouraged in this hope by
a dark "water-sky" to the southward; but, after running along the
ice till half past eleven without perceiving any opening, we again
bore up. There was in this neighbourhood a great deal of that
particular kind of ice called by the sailors "dirty ice," on the
surface of which were strewed sand, stones, and, in some
instances, moss: ice of this kind must, of course, at one time or
other, have been in close contact with the land.

At ten A.M. I despatched Captain Sabine and Mr. Ross to the
eastern point of the island, which we were about to round in the
ships, in order to make the necessary observations, and to examine
the natural productions of the shore. Our latitude at noon was 75°
03' 12", long. 103° 44' 37", and the depth of water forty fathoms.
The gentlemen reported, on their return, that they had landed on a
sandy beach, near the east point of the island, which they found
to be more productive, and altogether more interesting, than any
other part of the shores of the Polar regions which we had yet
visited. The remains of Esquimaux habitations were found in four
different places. Six of these, which Captain Sabine had an
opportunity of examining, and which are situated on a level sandy
bank, at the side of a small ravine near the sea, are described by
him as consisting of stones rudely placed in a circular, or,
rather, an elliptical form. They were from seven to ten feet in
diameter; the broad, flat sides of the stones standing vertically,
and the whole structure, if such it may be called, being exactly
similar to that of the summer huts of the Esquimaux which we had
seen at Hare Island the preceding year. Attached to each of them
was a smaller circle, generally four or five feet in diameter,
which had probably been the fireplace. The small circles were
placed indifferently as to their direction from the huts to which
they belonged; and from the moss and sand which covered some of
the lower stones, particularly those which composed the flooring
of the huts, the whole encampment appeared to have been deserted
for several years. Very recent traces of the reindeer and musk-ox
were seen in many places; and a head of the latter, with several
reindeers' horns, was brought on board. A few patches of snow
remained in sheltered situations; the ravines, however, which were
numerous, bore the signs of recent and considerable floods, and
their bottoms were swampy, and covered with very luxuriant moss
and other vegetation, the character of which differed very little
from that of the land at the bottom of Possession Bay.

The dip of the magnetic needle was 88° 25' 58", and the variation
was now found to have changed from 128° 58' west, in the longitude
of 91° 48', where our last observations on shore had been made, to
165° 50' 09" east, at our present station; so that we had, in
sailing over the space included between those two meridians,
crossed immediately to the northward of the magnetic pole and had
undoubtedly passed over one of those spots upon the globe where
the needle would have been found to vary 180°, or, in other words,
where its north pole would have pointed due south.

The wind became very light from the eastward, and the weather
continued so foggy that nothing could be done during the night but
to stand off-and-on, by the soundings, between the ice and the
land. On the 29th, after a few hours of clear weather, the fog
came on again as thick as before; fortunately, however, we had
previously been enabled to take notice of several pieces of ice,
by steering for each of which in succession we came to the edge of
a floe, along which our course was to be pursued to the westward.
As long as we had this guidance, we advanced with great
confidence; but as soon as we came to the end of the floe, which
then turned off to the southward, the circumstances under which we
were sailing were perhaps such as have never occurred since the
early days of navigation. To the northward was the land; the ice,
as we supposed, to the southward; the compasses useless; and the
sun completely obscured by a fog so thick, that the Griper could
only now and then be seen at a cable's length astern. We had
literally, therefore, no mode, of regulating our course but by
once more trusting to the steadiness of the wind; and it was not a
little amusing, as well as novel, to see the quartermaster conning
the ship by looking at the dogvane.

The weather cleared a little at intervals, but not enough to
enable us to proceed till nine A.M. on the 31st, when we cast off
from the ice, with a very light air from the northward. We
occasionally caught a glimpse of land through the heavy fog-banks
with which the horizon was covered, which was sufficient to give
us an idea of the true direction in which we ought to steer. Soon
after noon we were once more enveloped in a fog, which, however,
was not so thick as to prevent our having recourse to a new
expedient for steering the ships, which circumstances at the time
naturally suggested to our minds. Before the fog recommenced, and
while we were sailing on the course which, by the bearings of the
land, we knew to be the right one, the Griper was exactly astern
of the Hecla, at the distance of about a quarter of a mile. The
weather being fortunately not so thick as to prevent our still
seeing her at that distance, the quartermaster was directed to
stand aft, near the taffrail, and to keep her constantly astern of
us, by which means we contrived to steer a tolerably straight
course to the westward. The Griper, on the other hand, naturally
kept the Hecla right ahead; and thus, however ridiculous it may
appear, it is nevertheless true, that we steered one ship entirely
by the other for a distance of ten miles out of sixteen and a
half, which we sailed between one and eleven P.M.

The wind died away on the morning of the 1st of September, and the
fog was succeeded by snow and sleet, which still rendered the
atmosphere extremely thick. At a quarter before four A.M., I was
informed by the officer of the watch that a breeze had sprung up,
and that there was very little ice near the ships. Anxious to take
advantage of these favourable circumstances, I directed all sail
to be made to the westward: there was no difficulty in complying
with the first part of this order; but to ascertain which way the
wind was blowing, and to which quarter of the horizon the ship's
head was to be directed, was a matter of no such easy accomplishment;
nor could we devise any means of determining this question till five
o'clock, when we obtained a sight of the sun through the fog, and
were thus enabled to shape our course, the wind being moderate from
the northward.

At one A.M. on the 2d, a star was seen, being the first that had
been visible to us for more than two months.

As we were making no way to the westward, I left the ship,
accompanied by a large party of officers and men, and was soon
after joined by the Griper's boats. The basis of this land is
sandstone; but we met with limestone also, occurring in loose
pieces on the surface, and several lumps of coal were brought in
by the parties who had traversed the island in different
directions. Our sportsmen were by no means successful, having seen
only two deer, which were too wild to allow them to get near them.
The dung of these animals, however, as well as that of the
musk-ox, was very abundant, especially in those places where the
moss was most luxuriant; every here and there we came to a spot of
this kind, consisting of one or two acres of ground, covered with
a rich vegetation, which was evidently the feeding-place of those
animals, there being quantities of their hair and wool lying
scattered about. Several heads of the musk-ox were picked up, and
one of the Hecla's seamen brought to the boat a narwhal's horn,
which he found on a hill more than a mile from the sea, and which
must have been carried thither by Esquimaux or by bears: three or
four brace of ptarmigan were killed, and these were the only
supply of this kind which we obtained. We found no indication of
this part of the island having been inhabited, unless the
narwhal's horn be considered as such.

The wind continued light and variable till half past eight A.M. on
the 3d, when a breeze from the northward once more enabled us to
make some progress. I was the more anxious to do so from having
perceived that the main ice had, for the last twenty-four hours,
been gradually, though slowly, closing on the shore, thereby
contracting the scarcely navigable channel in which we were
sailing. The land which formed our western extreme was a low
point, five miles to the westward of our place of observation the
preceding day, which I named Point Ross, and the ice had already
approached this point so much that there was considerable doubt
whether any passage could be found between them. We had scarcely
cleared the point when the wind failed us, and the boats were
immediately sent ahead to tow, but a breeze springing up shortly
after from the westward, obliged us to have recourse to another
method of gaining ground, which we had not hitherto practised:
this was by using small anchors and whale-lines as warps, by which
means we made great progress, till, at forty minutes after noon,
we were favoured by a fresh breeze, which soon took us into an
open space of clear water to the northward and westward. A little
to the westward of Point Ross there was a barrier of ice, composed
of heavy masses firmly fixed to the ground at nearly regular
intervals for about a mile, in a direction parallel to the beach.
At right angles to this a second tier projected, of the same kind
of ice, extending to the shore, so that the two together formed a
most complete harbour, within which, I believe, a ship might have
been placed in case of necessity, without much danger from the
pressure of the external floes of ice. It was natural for us to
keep in view the possibility of our being obliged to pass the
ensuing winter in such a harbour; and it must be confessed, that
the apparent practicability of finding such tolerable security for
the ships as this artificial harbour afforded, should we fail in
discovering a more safe and regular anchorage, added not a little
to the confidence with which our operations were carried on during
the remainder of the season.

At a quarter past nine P.M. we had the satisfaction of crossing
the meridian of 110° west from Greenwich, in the latitude of 74°
44' 20"; by which his majesty's ships under my orders became
entitled to the sum of five thousand pounds, being the reward
offered to such of his majesty's subjects as might succeed in
penetrating thus far to the westward within the Arctic Circle. In
order to commemorate the success which had hitherto attended our
exertions, the bluff headland which we had just passed was
subsequently called by the men BOUNTY CAPE; by which name I have
therefore distinguished it on the chart.

The wind increasing to a fresh gale from the northward in the
afternoon, and the ice still continuing to oppose an impenetrable
barrier to our farther progress, I determined to beat up to the
northern shore of the bay, and, if a tolerable roadstead could be
found, to drop our anchors till some change should take place.
This was accordingly done at three P.M., in seven fathoms' water.
This roadstead, which I called the BAY OF THE HECLA AND GRIPER,
affords very secure shelter with the wind from E.N.E. round by
north to S.W., and we found it more free from ice than any other
part of the southern coast of the island.

The Bay of the Hecla and Griper was the first spot where we had
dropped anchor since leaving the coast of Norfolk; a circumstance
which was rendered the more striking to us at the moment, as it
appeared to mark, in a very decided manner, the completion of one
stage of our voyage. The ensigns and pendants were hoisted as soon
as we had anchored, and it created in us no ordinary feelings of
pleasure to see the British flag waving for the first time in
these regions, which had hitherto been considered beyond the
limits of the habitable part of the world.




CHAPTER IV.

Further Examination of Melville Island.--Continuation of our
Progress to the Westward.--Long detention by the Ice.--Party sent
on Shore to hunt Deer and Musk-oxen.--Return in three Days, after
losing their Way.--Anxiety on their Account.--Proceed to the
Westward till finally stopped by the Ice.--In returning to the
Eastward, the Griper forced on the Beach by the Ice.--Search for,
and Discovery of, a Winter Harbour on Melville Island.--Operations
for securing the Ships in their Winter Quarters.


As the wind still continued to blow strong from the northward on
the morning of the 6th, without any appearance of opening a
passage for us past Cape Hearne, I took the opportunity of sending
all our boats from both ships at eight A.M., to bring on board a
quantity of moss-peat which our gentlemen reported having found
near a small lake at no great distance from the sea, and which I
directed to be substituted for part of our usual allowance of
coals. Captain Sabine also went on shore to make the requisite
observations; and several of the officers of both ships to sport,
and to collect specimens of natural history.

The wind beginning to moderate soon after noon, and there being at
length some appearance of motion in the ice near Cape Hearne, the
boats were immediately recalled from the shore, and returned at
two P.M., bringing some peat, which was found to burn tolerably,
but a smaller quantity than I had hoped to procure. We then made
sail for Cape Hearne, which we rounded at six o'clock, having no
soundings with from seventeen to twenty fathoms of line, at the
distance of a mile and a quarter from the point.

I was beginning once more to indulge in those flattering hopes, of
which often-repeated disappointments cannot altogether deprive us,
when I perceived from the crow's-nest a compact body of ice,
extending completely in to the shore near the point which formed
the western extreme. We ran sufficiently close to be assured that
no passage to the westward could at present be effected, the floes
being literally upon the beach, and not a drop of clear water
being visible beyond them. I then ordered the ships to be made
fast to a floe, being in eighty fathoms' water, at the distance of
four or five miles from the beach. The season had now so far
advanced as to make it absolutely necessary to secure the ships
every night from ten till two o'clock, the weather being too dark
during that interval to allow of our keeping under way in such a
navigation as this, deprived as we were of the use of compasses.

On the morning of the 8th, there being no prospect of any
immediate alteration in the ice, I directed the boats to be sent
on shore from both ships, to endeavour to procure some game, as
well as to examine the productions of this part of the island. On
going to the masthead, shortly after the boats had been
despatched, I found that the bight of ice in which the ships were
lying was not one floe, but formed by the close junction of two,
so that our situation was by no means so secure as I had supposed
for this bight was so far from being a protection to us, in case
of ice driving on shore, that it would probably be the means of
"nipping" us between the floes which formed it. I therefore
determined on immediately removing the ships in-shore, and went in
a boat to look out for a place for that purpose, there being no
alternative between this and our returning some distance to the
eastward, into the larger space of clear water which we had there
left behind us. I found that a heavy piece of ice aground in
twelve fathoms, at the distance of three hundred yards from the
beach, would suit our purpose for the Hecla, and another, in ten
fathoms, still nearer in-shore, was selected for the Griper. These
masses were from twenty to thirty feet above the sea, and each
about the length of the respective ships.

At four P.M., the weather being quite calm, the ships were towed
in-shore by the boats, and made fast in the places selected for
them.

Impatient and anxious as we were to make the most of the short
remainder of the present season, our mortification will easily be
imagined at perceiving, on the morning of the 9th, not only that
the ice was as close as ever to the westward, but that the floes
in our immediate neighbourhood were sensibly approaching the
shore. As there was no chance, therefore, of our being enabled to
move, I sent a party on shore at daylight to collect what coal
they could find, and in the course of the day, nearly two thirds
of a bushel, being about equal to the Hecla's daily expenditure,
was brought on board. Our sportsmen, who were out for several
hours, could only procure us a hare and a few ducks.

On the 11th there was no alteration in the ice near the ships and
Mr. Bushnan, whom I despatched at daylight to the western cape,
reported on his return, that appearances were equally unpromising
in that quarter. Mr. Dealy was fortunate enough to kill the first
musk-ox that our sportsmen had yet been able to get near; but, as
it was at the distance of eight or ten miles from the ships, our
present situation with regard to the ice would not allow of my
sending a party of men to bring it on board. A piece of the meat
which Mr. Dealy brought with him was considered to taste tolerably
well, but its smell was by no means tempting.

I must now mention an occurrence which had caused considerable
apprehension in our minds for the last two days, and the result of
which had very nearly proved of very serious importance to the
future welfare of the expedition. Early on the morning of the 11th
I received a note from Lieutenant Liddon, acquainting me that, at
daylight on the preceding day, Mr. Fife, with a party of six men,
had been despatched from the Griper, with the hope of surprising
some reindeer and musk-oxen, whose tracks had been seen in a
ravine to the westward of the ships. As they had not yet returned,
in compliance with the instructions given to Mr. Fife, and had
only been supplied with a small quantity of provisions, it was
natural to apprehend that they had lost their way in pursuit of
game. I therefore recommended to Lieutenant Liddon to send a party
in search of his people, and Messrs. Reid, Beverly, and Wakeham,
who immediately volunteered their services on the occasion, were
accordingly despatched for this purpose. Soon after their
departure, however, it began to snow, which rendered the
atmosphere so extremely thick, especially on the hills along which
they had to travel, that this party also lost their way, in spite
of every precaution, but fortunately got sight of our rockets
after dark, by which they were directed to the ships, and returned
at ten o'clock, almost exhausted with cold and fatigue, without
any intelligence of the absentees.

At daylight on the following morning, I sent Lieutenant Hoppner,
with the Heck's fore-royal-mast rigged as a flagstaff, which he
erected on a conspicuous hill four or five miles inland, hoisting
upon it a large ensign, which might be seen at a considerable
distance in every direction. This expedient occurred to us as a
more certain mode of directing our absentees towards the ships
than that of sending out a number of parties, which I could not,
in common prudence as well as humanity, permit to go to any great
distance from the ships; but the snow fell so thick, and the drift
was so great during the whole of the 12th, that no advantage could
at that time be expected from it, and another night came without
the absent party appearing.

Our apprehensions on their account was by this time increased to a
most painful degree, and I therefore ordered four parties, under
the command of careful officers, to be prepared to set out in
search of them the following morning. These parties carried with
them a number of pikes, having small flags attached to them, which
they were directed to plant at regular intervals, and which were
intended to answer the double purpose of guiding themselves on
their return and of directing the absent party, should they meet
with them, to the ships. For the latter purpose a bottle was fixed
to each pike, containing the necessary directions for their
guidance, and acquainting them that provisions would be found at
the large flagstaff on the hill. Our searching parties left the
ships soon after daylight, the wind still blowing hard from the
westward, with incessant snow, and the thermometer at 28°. This
weather continued without intermission during the day, and our
apprehensions for the safety of our people were excited to a most
alarming degree, when the sun began to descend behind the western
hills for the third time since they had left the ship; I will not,
therefore, attempt to describe the joyful feelings we suddenly
experienced, on the Griper's hoisting the signal appointed, to
inform us that her men, or a part of them, were seen on their
return. Soon, after we observed seven persons coming along the
beach to the eastward, who proved to be Mr. Nias and his party,
with four out of the seven men belonging to the Griper. From the
latter, consisting of a corporal of marines and three seamen, we
learned that they had lost their way within a few hours after
leaving the ship, and had wandered about without anything to guide
them till about ten o'clock on the following day, when they
descried the large flagstaff at a great distance. At this time the
whole party were together; but now unfortunately separated, in
consequence of a difference of opinion respecting the flagstaff,
which Mr. Fife mistook for a smaller one that had been erected
some days before at a considerable distance to the eastward of our
present situation; and with that impression, walked away in a
contrary direction, accompanied by two of his men. The other four,
who had now returned (of whom two were already much debilitated),
determined to make for the flagstaff. When they had walked some
distance and were enabled to ascertain what it was, one of them
endeavoured to overtake Mr. Fife, but was too much fatigued, and
returned to his comrades. They halted during a part of the night,
made a sort of hut of stones and turf to shelter them from the
weather, and kindled a little fire with gunpowder and moss to warm
their feet; they had never been in actual want of food, having
lived upon raw grouse, of which they were enabled to obtain a
quantity sufficient for their subsistence. In the morning they
once more set forward towards the flagstaff, which they reached
within three or four hours after Lieutenant Beechey had left some
provisions on the spot; having eaten some bread, and drunk a
little rum and water, a mixture which they described as perfectly
tasteless and clammy, they renewed their journey towards the
ships, and had not proceeded far, when, notwithstanding the snow
which was constantly falling, they met with footsteps which
directed them to Mr. Nias and his party, by whom they were
conducted to the ships.

The account they gave us of Mr. Fife and his two companions led us
to believe that we should find them, if still living, at a
considerable distance to the westward; and some parties were just
about to set out in that direction, when the trouble and anxiety
which this mistake would have occasioned us were prevented by the
arrival of another of the searching parties, with the information
that Mr. Fife and the two men were on their way to the ships,
being about five miles to the eastward. Some fresh hands were,
immediately sent to bring them in, and they arrived on board at
ten P.M. after an absence of ninety-one hours, and having been
exposed during three nights to the inclemency of the first wintry
weather we had experienced. Almost the whole of this party were
much exhausted by cold and fatigue, and several of them were
severely frostbitten in their toes and fingers; but, by the skill
and unremitted attention of our medical gentlemen, they were in a
few days enabled to return to their duty.

At three A.M. of Tuesday, the 14th, the thermometer fell to 9°;
and from this time the commencement of winter may fairly be dated.
On the 20th I considered it a duty incumbent upon me to call for
the opinions of the senior officers of the expedition as to the
expediency of immediately seeking a harbour in which the ships
might securely lie during the ensuing winter. The opinions of the
officers entirely concurring with my own as to the propriety of
immediately resorting to this measure, I determined, whenever the
ice and the weather would allow, to run back to the bay of the
Hecla and Griper, in which neighbourhood alone we had any reason
to believe that a suitable harbour might be found.

At half past two on the morning of the 22d, the night signal was
made to weigh, and we began to heave at our cables; but such was
the difficulty of raising our anchor and of hauling in our
hawsers, owing to the stiffness of the ropes from frost and the
quantity of ice which had accumulated about them, that it was five
o'clock before the ships were under way. Our rudder, also, was so
choked by the ice which had formed about it, that it could not be
moved till a boat had been hauled under the stern, and the ice
beaten and cut away from it. We ran along to the eastward without
any obstruction, in a channel about five miles wide, till we were
within four or five miles of Cape Hearne, where the bay-ice, in
unbroken sheets of about one third of an inch in thickness, began
to offer considerable impediment to our progress. We at length,
however, struck soundings with twenty-nine fathoms of line, and at
eight P.M. anchored in nine fathoms, on a muddy bottom, a little
to the eastward of our situation on the 5th.

In going to the westward we passed a shoal and open bay,
immediately adjacent to the harbour which we were now about to
examine, and soon after came to a reef of rocks, in some parts
nearly dry, extending, about three quarters of a mile to the
southward of a low point on the southeastern side of the harbour.
On rounding the reef, on which a quantity of heavy ice was lying
aground, we found that a continuous floe, four or five inches in
thickness, was formed over the whole harbour, which in every other
respect appeared to be fit for our purpose; and that it would be
necessary to cut a canal of two miles in length through the ice,
in order to get the ships into a secure situation for the winter.
We sounded the channel into the harbour about three quarters of a
mile, by making holes in the ice and dropping the lead through,
and found the depth from five to six fathoms.

The ships weighed at six A.M. on the 24th. the wind being still at
north, and the weather moderate and fine. As soon as the Hecla was
under sail, I went ahead in a boat to sound, and to select an
anchorage for the ships. Near the southwestern point of this
harbour there is a remarkable block of sandstone, somewhat
resembling the roof of a house, on which the ships names were
subsequently engraved by Mr. Fisher. This stone is very
conspicuous in coming from the eastward, and, when kept open to
the southward of the grounded ice at the end of the reef, forms a
good landing mark for the channel into the harbour. Off the end of
the reef the water deepened to six fathoms, and the Hecla's anchor
was dropped in eight fathoms, half a mile within the reef, and
close to the edge of the ice through which the canal was to be
cut. The Griper arrived soon after, and by half past eight A.M.
both ships were secured in the proper position for commencing the
intended operations.

As soon as our people had breakfasted, I proceeded with a small
party of men to sound and to mark with boarding-pikes upon the ice
the most direct channel we could find to the anchorage, having
left directions for every other officer and man in both ships to
be employed in cutting the canal. This operation was performed by
first marking out two parallel lines, distant from each other a
little more than the breadth of the larger ship. Along each of
these lines a cut was then made with an ice saw, and others again
at right angles to them, at intervals of from ten to twenty feet;
thus dividing the ice into a number of square pieces, which it was
again necessary to subdivide diagonally, in order to give room for
their being floated out of the canal. On returning from the upper
part of the harbour, where I had marked out what appeared to be
the best situation for our winter-quarters, I found that
considerable progress had been made in cutting the canal and in
floating the pieces out of it. To facilitate the latter part of
the process, the seamen, who are always fond of doing things in
their own way, took advantage of a fresh northerly breeze, by
setting some boats sails upon the pieces of ice, a contrivance
which saved both time and labour. This part of the operation,
however, was by far the most troublesome, principally on account
of the quantity of young ice which formed in the canal, and
especially about the entrance, where, before sunset, it had become
so thick that a passage could no longer be found for the detached
pieces without considerable trouble in breaking it. At half past
seven P.M. we weighed our anchors and began to warp up the canal,
but the northerly wind blew so fresh, and the people were so much
fatigued, having been almost constantly at work for nineteen
hours, that it was midnight before we reached the termination of
our first day's labour.

All hands were again set to work on the morning of the 25th, when
it was proposed to sink the pieces of ice, as they were cut, under
the floe, instead of floating them out, the latter mode having now
become impracticable on account of the lower part of the canal,
through which the ships had passed, being, hard frozen during the
night. To effect this, it was necessary for a certain number of
men to stand upon one end of the piece of ice which it was
intended to sink, while other parties, hauling at the same time
upon ropes attached to the opposite end, dragged the block under
that part of the floe on which the people stood. The officers of
both ships took the lead in this employ, several of them standing
up to their knees in water frequently during the day, with the
thermometer generally at 12°, and never higher than 16°. At six
P.M. we began to move the ships. The Griper was made fast astern
of the Hecla, and the two ships' companies being divided on each
bank of the canal, with ropes from the Hecla's gangways, soon drew
the ships along to the end of our second day's work.

Sunday, 26th.--I should on every account have been glad to make
this a day of rest to the officers and men; but the rapidity with
which the ice increased in thickness, in proportion as the general
temperature of the atmosphere diminished, would have rendered a
day's delay of serious importance. I ordered the work, therefore,
to be continued at the usual time in the morning; and such was the
spirited and cheerful manner in which this order was complied
with, as well as the skill which had now been acquired in the art
of sawing and sinking the ice, that although the thermometer was
at 6° in the morning, and rose no higher than 9° during the day,
we had completed the canal at noon, having effected more in four
hours than on either of the two preceding days. The whole length
of this canal was four thousand and eighty-two yards, or nearly
two miles and one third, and the average thickness of the ice was
seven inches.

At half past one P.M. we began to track the ships along in the
same manner as before, and at a quarter past three we reached our
winter-quarters, and hailed the event with three loud and hearty
cheers from both ships' companies. The ships were in five fathoms
water, a cable's length from the beach on the northwestern side of
the harbour, to which I gave the name of WINTER HARBOUR; and I
called the group of islands which we had discovered in the Polar
Sea the NORTH GEORGIAN ISLANDS.




CHAPTER V.

Precautions for securing the Ships and Stores.--For promoting Good
Order, Cleanliness, Health, and Good-Humour among the Ships'
Companies.--Establishment of a Theatre and of the North Georgia
Gazette.--Erection of an Observatory on Shore.--Commence our
Winter's Amusements.--State of the Temperature, and various
Meteorological Phenomena.--Miscellaneous Occurrences to the Close
of the Year 1819.


Having, on the 19th October, reached the station where, in all
probability, we were destined to remain for at least eight or nine
months, during three of, which we were not to see the face of the
sun, my attention was immediately and imperiously called to
various important duties; many of them of a singular nature, such
as had, for the first time, devolved on any officer in his
majesty's navy, and might, indeed, be considered of rare
occurrence in the whole history of navigation. The security of the
ships and the preservation of the various stores were objects of
immediate concern. A regular system to be adopted for the
maintenance of good order and cleanliness, as most conducive to
the health of the crews during the long, dark, and dreary winter,
equally demanded my attention.

Not a moment was lost, therefore, in the commencement of our
operations. The whole of the masts were dismantled except the
lower ones and the Hecla's main-topmast; the lower yards were
lashed fore and aft amidships, to support the planks of the
housing intended to be erected over the ships; and the whole of
this framework was afterward roofed over with a cloth. The boats,
spars, running rigging, and sails were removed on shore; and, as
soon as the ships were secured and housed over, my whole attention
was directed to the health and comfort of the officers and men.
The surgeon reported that not the slightest disposition to scurvy
had shown itself in either ship.

Soon after our arrival in Winter Harbour, when the temperature of
the atmosphere had fallen considerably below zero of Fahrenheit,
we found that the steam from the coppers, as well as the breath
and other vapour generated in the inhabited parts of the ship,
began to condense into drops upon the beams and the sides, to such
a degree as to keep them constantly wet. In order to remove this
serious evil, a large stone oven, cased with cast iron, in which
all our bread was baked daring the winter, was placed on the main
hatchway, and the stovepipe led fore and aft on one side of the
lower deck, the smoke being thus carried up the fore hatchway. On
the opposite side of the deck an apparatus had been attached to
the galley-range for conveying a current of heated air between
decks. This apparatus simply consisted of an iron box, about fifteen
inches square, through which passed three pipes of two inches
diameter, communicating below with the external air, and uniting
above in a metal box, fixed to the side of the galley-range; to
this box a copper stovepipe was attached, and conveyed to the
middle part of the lower deck. When a fire was made under the
air-vessel, the air became heated in its passage through the three
pipes, from which it was conveyed through the stovepipe to the
men's berths. While this apparatus was in good order, a moderate
fire produced a current of air of the temperature of 87°, at the
distance of seventeen feet from the fireplace; and with a pipe of
wood, or any other imperfect conductor of heat, which would not
allow of its escaping by the way, it might undoubtedly be carried
to a much greater distance. By these means we were enabled to get
rid of the moisture about the berths where the people messed; but
when the weather became more severely cold, it still accumulated
in the bed places occasionally to a serious and very alarming
degree. Among the means employed to prevent the injurious effects
arising from this annoyance, one of the most efficacious, perhaps,
was a screen made of fearnaught, fixed to the beams round the
galley, and dropping within eighteen inches of the deck, which
served to intercept the steam from the coppers, and prevent it,
as before, from curling along the beams, and condensing upon them
into drops.

For the preservation of health, and as a necessary measure of
economy, a few alterations were made in the quantity and quality
of the provisions issued. I directed the allowance of bread to be
permanently reduced to two thirds, a precaution which, perhaps, it
would have been as well to adopt from the commencement of the
voyage. A pound of preserved meat, together with one pint of
vegetable or concentrated soup per man, was substituted for one
pound of salt beef weekly; a proportion of beer and wine was
served in lieu of spirits; and a small quantity of sourkrout and
pickles, with as much vinegar as could be used, was issued at
regular intervals. The daily proportion of lime-juice and sugar
was mixed together, and with a proper quantity of water, was drunk
by each man in presence of an officer appointed to attend to this
duty. This latter precaution may appear to have been unnecessary
to those who are not aware how much sailors resemble children in
all those points in which their own health and comfort are
concerned. Whenever any game was procured, it was directed to be
invariably served in lieu of, and not in addition to, the
established allowance of other meat, except in a few extraordinary
cases; when such an indulgence was allowed; and in no one
instance, either in quantity or quality, was the slightest
preference given to the officers.

Great attention was paid to the clothing of the men, and one day
in the week was appointed for the examination of the men's shins
and gums by the medical gentlemen, in order that any slight
appearance of the scurvy might at once be detected, and checked by
timely and adequate means.

Under circumstances of leisure and inactivity, such as we were now
placed in, and with every prospect of its continuance for a very
large portion of the year, I was desirous of finding some
amusement for the men during this long and tedious interval. I
proposed, therefore, to the officers to get up a play occasionally
on board the Hecla, as the readiest means of preserving among our
crews that cheerfulness and good-humour which had hitherto
subsisted. In this proposal I was readily seconded by the officers
of both ships; and Lieutenant Beechey having been duly elected as
stage-manager, our first performance was fixed for the 5th of
November, to the great delight of the ships' companies. In these
amusements I gladly undertook a part myself, considering that an
example of cheerfulness, by giving a direct countenance to
everything that could contribute to it, was not the least
essential part of my duty, under the peculiar circumstances in
which we were placed.

In order still farther to promote good-humour among ourselves, as
well as to furnish amusing occupation during the hours of constant
darkness, we set on foot a weekly newspaper, which was to be
called the _North Georgia Gazette and Winter Chronicle_, and of
which Captain Sabine undertook to be the editor, under the promise
that it was to be supported by original contributions from the
officers of the two ships: and I can safely say, that the weekly
contributions had the happy effect of employing the leisure hours
of those who furnished them, and of diverting the mind from the
gloomy prospect which would sometimes obtrude itself on the
stoutest heart.

Immediately on our arrival in harbour, Captain Sabine had employed
himself in selecting a place for the observatory, which was
erected in a convenient spot, about seven hundred yards to the
westward of the ships. It was also considered advisable
immediately to set about building a house near the beach for the
reception of the clocks and instruments. For this purpose we made
use of a quantity of fir-plank, which was intended for the
construction of spare boats, and which was so cut as not to injure
it for that purpose. The ground was so hard frozen that it
required great labour to dig holes for the upright posts which
formed the support of the sides. The walls of this house being
double, with moss placed between the two, a high temperature
could, even in the severest weather which we might be doomed to
experience, be kept up in it without difficulty by a single stove.

After our arrival in port we saw several reindeer and a few coveys
of grouse; but the country is so destitute of everything like
cover of any kind, that our sportsmen were not successful in their
hunting excursions, and we procured only three reindeer previous
to the migration of these and the other animals from the island,
which took place before the close of the month of October, leaving
only the wolves and foxes to bear us company during the winter.
The full-grown deer which we killed in the autumn, gave us from
one hundred and twenty to one hundred and seventy pounds of meat
each, and a fawn weighed eighty-four pounds.

On the 1st of October, Captain Sabine's servant, having been at
some distance from the ships to examine a fox-trap, was pursued by
a large white bear, which followed his footsteps the whole way to
the ships, where he was wounded by several balls, but made his
escape after all. This bear, which was the only one we saw during
our stay in Winter Harbour, was observed to be more purely white
than any we had before seen, the colour of these animals being
generally that of a dirtyish yellow when contrasted with the
whiteness of the ice and snow.

Some deer being seen near the ships on the 10th, a party was
despatched after them, some of whom having wounded a stag, and
being led on by the ardour of pursuit, forgot my order that every
person should be on board before sunset, and did not return till
late, after we had suffered much apprehension their account. John
Pearson, a marine belonging to the Griper, who was the last that
returned on board, had his hands severely frostbitten, having
imprudently gone away without mittens, and with a musket in his
hand. A party of our people most providentially found him,
although the night was very dark, just as he had fallen down a
steep bank of snow, and was beginning to feel that degree of
torpor and drowsiness which, if indulged, inevitably proves fatal.
When he was brought on board his fingers were quite stiff, and
bent into the shape of that part of the musket which he had been
carrying; and the frost had so far destroyed the animation in his
fingers on one hand, that it was necessary to amputate three of
them a short time after, notwithstanding all the care and
attention paid to him by the medical gentlemen. The effect which
exposure to severe frost has in benumbing the mental as well as
the corporeal faculties, was very striking in this man, as well as
in two of the young gentlemen who returned after dark, and of whom
we were anxious to make inquiries respecting Pearson. When I sent
for them into my cabin, they looked wild, spoke thick and
indistinctly, and it was impossible to draw from them a rational
answer to any of our questions. After being on board for a short
time, the mental faculties appeared gradually to return with the
returning circulation, and it was not till then that a looker-on
could easily persuade himself that they had not been drinking too
freely. In order to guard in some measure against the danger of
persons losing their way, which was more and more to be
apprehended as the days became shorter and the ground more covered
with snow, which gives such a dreary sameness to the country, we
erected on all the hills within two or three miles of the harbour,
finger-posts pointing towards the ships.

I have before remarked that all the water which we made use of
while within the polar circle was procured from snow either
naturally or artificially dissolved. Soon after the ships were
laid up for the winter, it was necessary to have recourse entirely
to the latter process, which added materially to the expenditure
of fuel during the winter months. The snow for this purpose was
dug out of the drifts which had formed upon the ice round the
ships, and dissolved in the coppers. We found it necessary always
to strain the water thus procured, on account of the sand which
the heavy snowdrifts brought from the island, after which it was
quite pure and wholesome.

On the 16th it blew a strong gale from the northward, accompanied
by such a constant snowdrift, that, although the weather was quite
clear overhead, the boathouse at the distance of three or four
hundred yards could scarcely be seen from the ships. On such
occasions no person was permitted on any account to leave the
ships. Indeed, when this snowdrift occurred, as it frequently did
in the winter, with a hard gale and the thermometer very low, I
believe that no human being could have remained alive after an
hour's exposure to it. In order, therefore, to secure a
communication between the two ships, a distance not exceeding half
a cable's length, as well as from the ships to the house on shore,
a line was kept extended, as a guide from one to the other. The
meridian, altitude of the sun was observed this day by an
artificial horizon, which I noticed from the circumstance of its
being the last time we had an opportunity of observing it for
about four months.

On the 26th the sun afforded us sufficient light or writing and
reading in my cabin, the stern-windows exactly facing the south,
from half past nine till half past two; for the rest of the
four-and-twenty hours, we lived, of course, by candle-light.
Nothing could exceed the beauty of the sky to the southeast and
southwest at sunrise and sunset about this period: near the
horizon there was generally a rich bluish purple and a bright arch
of deep red above, the one mingling imperceptibly with the other.

It now became rather a painful experiment to touch any metallic
substance in the open air with the naked hand; the feeling
produced by it exactly resembling that occasioned by the opposite
extreme of intense heat, and taking off the skin from the part
affected. We found it necessary, therefore, to use great caution
in handling our sextants and other instruments, particularly the
eye-pieces of telescopes, which, if suffered to touch the face,
occasioned an intense burning pain; but this was easily remedied
by covering them over with soft leather. Another effect, with
regard to the use of instruments, began to appear about this time.
Whenever any instrument which had been some time exposed to the
atmosphere, so as to be cooled down to the same temperature, was
suddenly brought below into the cabins, the vapour was instantly
condensed all around it, so as to give the instrument the
appearance of smoking, and the glasses were covered almost
instantly with a thin coating of ice, the removal of which
required great caution, to prevent the risk of injuring them,
until it had gradually thawed, as they acquired the temperature of
the cabin. When a candle was placed in a certain direction from
the instrument with respect to the observer, a number of very
minute _spiculæ_ of snow were also seen sparkling around the
instrument, at the distance of two or three inches from it,
occasioned, as we supposed, by the cold atmosphere produced by the
low temperature of the instrument almost instantaneously
congealing into that form the vapour which floated in its
immediate neighbourhood.

The 4th of November being the last day that the sun would,
independently of the effects of refraction, be seen above our
horizon till the 8th of February, an interval of ninety-six days,
it was a matter of considerable regret to us that the weather
about this time was not sufficiently clear to allow us to see and
make observations on the disappearance of that luminary, in order
that something might be attempted towards determining the amount
of the atmospheric refraction at a low temperature. But though we
were not permitted to take a last farewell, for at least three
months, of that cheering orb, "of this great world both eye and
soul," we nevertheless felt that this day constituted an important
and memorable epoch in our voyage. We had some time before set
about the preparations for our winter's amusements; and the
theatre being ready, we opened on the 5th November, with the
representation of _Miss in her Teens_, which afforded to the men
such a fund of amusement as fully to justify the expectations we
had formed of the utility of theatrical entertainments under our
present circumstances, and to determine me to follow them up at
stated periods. I found, indeed, that even the occupation of
fitting up the theatre and taking it to pieces again, which
employed a number of the men for a day or two before and after
each performance, was a matter of no little importance, when the
immediate duties of the ship appeared by no means sufficient for
that purpose; for I dreaded the want of employment as one of the
worst evils that was likely to befall us.

About the time of the sun's leaving us, the wolves began to
approach the ships more boldly, howling most piteously on the
beach near us, sometimes for hours together, and on one or two
occasions coming alongside the ships, when everything was quiet at
night; but we seldom saw more than one or two together, and
therefore could form no idea of their number. These animals were
always very shy of coming near our people; and though evidently
suffering much from hunger, never attempted to attack any of them.
The white foxes used also to visit the ships at night, and one of
these was caught in a trap set under the Griper's bows. The
uneasiness displayed by this beautiful little animal during the
time of his confinement, whenever he heard the howling of a wolf
near the ships, impressed us with the opinion that the latter is
in the habit of hunting the fox as his prey.

The temperature of the atmosphere having about this time become
considerably lower than before, the cracking of the timbers was
very frequent and loud for a time; but generally ceased altogether
in an hour or two after this fall had taken place in the
thermometer, and did not occur again at the same temperature
during the winter. The wind blowing fresh from the northward, with
a heavy snowdrift, made the ship very cold below; so that the
breath and other vapour accumulated during the night in the bed
places and upon the beams, and then immediately froze; hence it
often occupied all hands for two or three hours during the day to
scrape the ice away, in order to prevent the bedding from becoming
wet by the increase of temperature occasioned by the fires. It was
therefore found necessary to keep some of the fires in between
decks at night, when the thermometer was below -15° or -20° in the
open air, especially when the wind was high. To assist in keeping
the lower decks warm, as well as to retard, in some slight degree,
the formation of ice immediately in contact with the ships' bends,
we banked the snow up against their sides as high as the main
chains; and canvass screens were nailed round all the hatchways on
the lower deck.

The stars of the second magnitude in Ursa Major were just
perceptible to the naked eye a little after noon this day, and the
Aurora Borealis appeared faintly in the southwest at night. About
this time our medical gentlemen began to remark the extreme
difficulty with which sores of every kind healed; a circumstance
that rendered it the more necessary to be cautious in exposing the
men to frostbites, lest the long inactivity and want of exercise
during the cure of sores, in other respects trifling, should
produce serious effects upon the general health of the patients.

During the following fortnight we were chiefly occupied in
observing various phenomena in the heavens, the vivid coruscations
of the Aurora Borealis, the falling of meteors, and in taking
lunar distances; but the difficulty of making observations in this
climate is inconceivably great; on one occasion the mercury of the
artificial horizon froze into a solid mass.

About this part of the winter we began to experience a more
serious inconvenience from the bursting of the lemon-juice bottles
by frost, the whole contents being frequently frozen into a solid
mass, except a small portion of highly concentrated acid in the
centre, which in most instances was found to have leaked out, so
that when the ice was thawed it was little better than water. This
evil increased to a very alarming degree in the course of the
winter: some cases being opened in which more than two thirds of
the lemon-juice was thus destroyed, and the remainder rendered
nearly inefficient.

It was at first supposed that this accident might have been
prevented by not quite filling the bottles, but it was afterward
found that the corks flying out did not save them from breaking.
We observed that the greatest damage was done in those cases which
were stowed nearest to the ship's side, and we therefore removed
all the rest amidships; a precaution which, had it been sooner
known and adopted, would probably have prevented at least a part
of the mischief. The vinegar also became frozen in the casks in
the same manner, and lost a great deal of its acidity when thawed.
This circumstance conferred an additional value on a few gallons
of very highly concentrated vinegar, which had been sent out on
trial upon this and the preceding voyage, and which, when mixed
with six or seven times its own quantity of water, was sufficiently
acid for every purpose. This vinegar, when exposed to the
temperature of 25° below zero, congealed only into a consistence
like that of the thickest honey, but was never sufficiently hard
to break any vessel which contained it. There can be no doubt,
therefore, that on this account, as well as to save stowage, this
kind of vinegar should exclusively be used in these regions; and
for similar reasons of still greater importance, the lemon-juice
should be concentrated.

We had now reached the shortest day, Wednesday, the 22d, and such
was the occupation which we had hitherto contrived to find during
the first half of our long and gloomy winter, that the quickness
with which it had come upon us was a subject of general remark. So
far, indeed, were we from wanting that occupation of which I had
been apprehensive, especially among the men that it accidentally
came to my knowledge about this period that they complained of not
having time to mend their clothes. This complaint I was as glad to
hear as desirous to rectify; and I therefore ordered that, in
future, one afternoon in each week should be set aside for that
particular purpose.

The circumstances of our situation being such as have never before
occurred to the crews of any of his majesty's ships, it may not,
perhaps, be considered wholly uninteresting to know in what manner
our time was thus so fully occupied throughout the long and severe
winter which it was our lot to experience, and particularly during
a three months' interval of nearly total darkness.

The officers and quartermasters were divided into four watches,
which were regularly kept as at sea, while the remainder of the
ships' company were allowed to enjoy their night's rest
undisturbed. The hands were turned up at a quarter before six, and
both decks were well rubbed with stones and warm sand before eight
o'clock, at which time, as usual at sea, both officers and men
went to breakfast. Three quarters of an hour being allowed after
breakfast for the men to prepare themselves for muster, we then
beat to divisions punctually at a quarter past nine, when every
person on board attended on the quarter deck, and a strict
inspection of the men took place as to their personal cleanliness,
and the good condition, as well as sufficient warmth of their
clothing. The reports of the officers having been made to me, the
people were then allowed to walk about, or, more usually, to run
round the upper deck, while I went down to examine the state of
that below. The state of this deck may be said, indeed, to have
constituted the chief source of our anxiety, and to have occupied
by far the greatest share of our attention at this period.
Whenever any dampness appeared, or, what more frequently happened,
any accumulation of ice had taken place during the preceding
night, the necessary means were immediately adopted for removing
it; in the former case usually by rubbing the wood with cloths,
and then directing the warm airpipe towards the place; and in the
latter by scraping off the ice, so as to prevent its wetting the
deck by any accidental increase of temperature. In this respect
the bed-places were particularly troublesome; the inner partition,
or that next the ship's side, being almost invariably covered with
more or less dampness or ice, according to the temperature of the
deck during the preceding night. This inconvenience might, to a
great degree, have been avoided by a sufficient quantity of fuel
to keep up two good fires on the lower deck throughout the
twenty-four hours; but our stock of coals would by no means permit
this, bearing in mind the possibility of our spending a second
winter within the Arctic circle; and this comfort could only,
therefore, be allowed on a few occasions during the most severe
part of the winter.

In the course of my examination of the lower deck I had always an
opportunity of seeing those few men who were on the sick list, and
of receiving from Mr. Edwards a report of their respective cases;
as also of consulting that gentleman as to the means of improving
the warmth, ventilation, and general comfort of the inhabited
parts of the ship. Having performed this duty, we returned to the
upper deck, where I personally inspected the men; after which they
were sent out to walk on shore, when the weather would permit,
till noon, when they returned on board to their dinner. When the
day was too inclement for them to take this exercise, they were
ordered to run round and round the deck, keeping step to the tune
of an organ, or, not unfrequently, to a song of their own singing.
Among the men were a few who did not at first quite like this
systematic mode of taking exercise; but when they found that no
plea except that of illness was admitted as an excuse, they not
only willingly and cheerfully complied, but made it the occasion
of much humour and frolic among themselves.

The officers, who dined at two o'clock, were also in the habit of
occupying one or two hours in the middle of the day in rambling on
shore, even in our darkest period, except when a fresh wind and a
heavy snowdrift confined them within the housing of the ships. It
may well be imagined that, at this period, there was but little to
be met with in our walks on shore which could either amuse or
interest us. The necessity of not exceeding the limited distance
of one or two miles, lest a snowdrift, which often rises very
suddenly, should prevent our return, added considerably to the
dull and tedious monotony which day after day presented itself. To
the southward was the sea, covered with one unbroken surface of
ice, uniform in its dazzling whiteness, except that, in some
parts, a few hummocks were seen thrown up somewhat above the
general level. Nor did the land offer much greater variety, being
almost entirely covered with snow, except here and there a brown
patch of bare ground in some exposed situations, where the wind
had not allowed the snow to remain. When viewed from the summit of
the neighbouring hills, on one of those calm and clear days which
not unfrequently occurred during the winter, the scene was such as
to induce contemplations which had, perhaps, more of melancholy
than of any other feeling. Not an object was to be seen on which
the eye could long rest with pleasure, unless when directed to the
spot where our ships lay and where our little colony was planted.
The smoke which there issued from the several fires, affording a
certain indication of the presence of man, gave a partial
cheerfulness to this part of the prospect; and the sound of
voices, which, during the cold weather, could be heard at a much
greater distance than usual, served now and then to break the
silence which reigned around us; a silence far different from that
peaceable composure which characterizes the landscape of a
cultivated country; it was the deathlike stillness of the most
dreary desolation, and the total absence of animated existence.
Such, indeed, was the want of objects to afford relief to the eye
or amusement to the mind, that a stone of more than usual size
appearing above the snow in the direction in which we were going,
immediately became a mark on which our eyes were unconsciously
fixed, and towards which we mechanically advanced.

We had frequent occasion, in our walks on shore, to remark the
deception which takes place in estimating the distance and
magnitude of objects when viewed over an unvaried surface of snow.
It was not uncommon for us to direct our steps towards what we
took for a large mass of stone at the distance of half a mile from
us, but which we were able to take up in our hands after one
minute's walk. This was more particularly the case when ascending
the brow of a hill, nor did we find that the deception became less
on account of the frequency with which we experienced its effects.

In the afternoon the men were usually occupied in drawing and
knotting yarns, and in making points and gaskets; a never-failing
resource where mere occupation is required, and which it was
necessary to perform entirely on the lower deck, the yarns
becoming so hard and brittle, when exposed on deck to the
temperature of the atmosphere, as to be too stiff for working, and
very easily broken. I may in this place remark, that our lower
rigging became extremely slack during the severity of the winter,
and gradually tightened again as the spring returned: effects the
very reverse of those which we had anticipated, and which I can
only account for by the extreme dryness of the atmosphere in the
middle of winter, and the subsequent increase of moisture.

At half past five in the evening the decks were cleared up, and at
six we again beat to divisions, when the same examination of the
men and of their berths and bed-places took place as in the
morning; the people then went to their supper, and the officers to
tea. After this time the men were permitted to amuse themselves as
they pleased, and games of various kinds, as well as dancing and
singing occasionally, went on upon the lower deck till nine
o'clock, when they went to bed and their lights were extinguished.
In order to guard against accidents by fire, where so many fires
and lights were necessarily in use, the quartermasters visited the
lower deck every half hour during the night, and made their report
to the officers of the watches that all was, in this respect, safe
below; and to secure a ready supply of water in case of fire, a
hole was cut twice a day in the ice, close alongside of each ship.
It is scarcely necessary to add, that the evening occupations of
the officers were of a more rational kind than those which engaged
the attention of the men. Of these, reading and writing were the
principal employments, to which were occasionally added a game of
chess, or a tune on the flute or violin, till half past ten, about
which time we all retired to rest.

Such were the employments which usually occupied us for six days
in the week, with such exceptions only as circumstances at the
time suggested. On Sundays divine service was invariably
performed, and a sermon read on board both ships; the prayer
appointed to be daily used at sea being altered, so as to adapt it
to the service in which we were engaged, the success which had
hitherto attended our efforts, and the peculiar circumstances
under which we were at present placed. The attention paid by the
men to the observance of their religious duties was such as to
reflect upon them the highest credit, and tended in no small
degree to the preservation of that regularity and good conduct for
which, with very few exceptions, they were invariably distinguished.

Our theatrical entertainments took place regularly once a
fortnight, and continued to prove a source of infinite amusement
to the men. Our stock of plays was so scanty, consisting of one or
two odd volumes, which happened accidentally to be on board, that
it was with difficulty we could find the means of varying the
performances sufficiently; our authors, therefore, set to work,
and produced, as a Christmas piece, a musical entertainment,
expressly adapted to our audience, and having such a reference to
the service on which we were engaged, and the success we had so
far experienced, as at once to afford a high degree of present
recreation, and to stimulate, if possible, the sanguine hopes
which were entertained by all on board, of the complete
accomplishment of our enterprise. We were at one time apprehensive
that the severity of the weather would prevent the continuance of
this amusement, but the perseverance of the officers overcame
every difficulty; and, perhaps for the first time since theatrical
entertainments were invented, more than one or two plays were
performed on board the Hecla with the thermometer below zero on
the stage.

The _North Georgia Gazette_, which I have already mentioned, was a
source of great amusement, not only to the contributors, but to
those who, from diffidence of their own talents or other reasons,
could not be prevailed on to add their mite to the little stock of
literary composition which was weekly demanded; for those who
declined to write were not unwilling to read, and more ready to
criticise than those who wielded the pen; but it was that
good-humoured sort of criticism that could not give offence. The
subjects handled in this paper were of course various, but
generally applicable to our own situation.

The return of each successive day had been always very decidedly
marked by a considerable twilight for some time about noon, that
on the shortest day being sufficient to enable us to walk out very
comfortably for about two hours.[*] There was usually, in clear
weather, a beautiful arch of bright red light overspreading the
southern horizon for an hour or two before and after noon, the
light increasing, of course, in strength, as the sun approached
the meridian. Short as the day now was, if, indeed, any part of
the twenty-four hours could be properly called by that name, the
reflection of light from the snow, aided occasionally by a bright
moon, was at all times sufficient to prevent our experiencing,
even under the most unfavourable circumstances, anything like the
gloomy night which occurs in more temperate climates. Especial
care was taken, during the time the sun was below the horizon, to
preserve the strictest regularity in the time of our meals, and in
the various occupations which engaged our attention during the
day; and this, together with the gradual and imperceptible manner
in which the days had shortened, prevented this kind of life, so
novel to us in reality, from appearing very inconvenient, or,
indeed, like anything out of the common way. It must be confessed,
however, that we were not sorry to arrive, without any serious
suffering, at the shortest day; and we watched, with no ordinary
degree of pleasure, the slow approach of the returning sun.

[Footnote: It will, perhaps, give the best idea of the power of
the sun's light afforded us on this day, to state, that we could,
at noon, read with tolerable ease the same sized type as that in
which this note is printed; but this could only be done by turning
the book directly towards the south.]

On Christmas day the weather was raw and cold, with a considerable
snowdrift, though the wind was only moderate from the N.W.; but
the snow which falls during the severe winter of this climate is
composed of spiculæ so extremely minute, that it requires very
little wind to raise it and carry it along. To mark the day in the
best manner which circumstances would permit divine service was
performed on board the ships; and I directed a small increase in
the men's usual proportion of fresh meat as a Christmas dinner, as
well as an additional allowance of grog, to drink the health of
their friends in England. The officers also met at a social and
friendly dinner, and the day passed with much of the same kind of
festivity by which it is usually distinguished at home; and, to
the credit of the men be it spoken, without any of that disorder
by which it is too often observed by seamen. A piece of English
roast-beef, which formed part of the officers' dinner, had been on
board since the preceding May, and preserved without salt during
that period merely by the antiseptic powers of a cold atmosphere.

A great many frostbites occurred about this time, 30th,
principally in the men's feet, even when they had been walking
quickly on shore for exercise. On examining their boots, Mr.
Edwards remarked, that the stiffness of the thick leather of which
they were made was such as to cramp the feet, and prevent the
circulation from going on freely; and that this alone was
sufficient to account for their feet having been frostbitten.
Being very desirous of avoiding these accidents, which, from the
increased sluggishness with which the sores healed, were more and
more likely to affect the general health of the patients by long
confinement, I directed a pair of canvass boots, lined with
blanketing or some other woollen stuff, to be made for each man,
using raw hide as soles: this completely answered the desired
purpose, as scarcely any frostbites in the feet afterward
occurred, except under circumstances of very severe exposure.




CHAPTER VI.

First Appearance of Scurvy.--The Aurora Borealis and other
Meteorological Phenomena.--Visits of the Wolves.--Reappearance of
the Sun.--Extreme low Temperature.--Destruction of the House on
Shore by Fire.--Severe Frostbites occasioned by this Accident.


January 1, 1820.--I received this morning the first unpleasant
report of the scurvy having made its appearance among us: Mr.
Scallon, the gunner of the Hecla, had for some days past been
complaining of pains in his legs, which Mr. Edwards at first took
to be rheumatic, but which, together with the appearance of his
gums, now left no doubt of the symptoms being scorbutic. It is so
uncommon a thing for this disease to make its first appearance
among the officers, that Mr. Edwards was naturally curious to
inquire into the cause of it; and at length discovered that Mr.
Scallon's bedding was in so damp a state, in consequence of the
deposite of moisture in his bed-place, which I have before
mentioned, as to leave no doubt that to this circumstance, as the
immediate exciting cause, his illness might justly be attributed.
The difficulty of preventing this deposite of moisture, and the
consequent accumulation of ice, was much greater in the officers'
bed-places than in those of the men, in consequence of the former
being necessarily placed in close contact with the ship's sides,
and forming an immediate communication, as it were, with the
external atmosphere; whereas in the latter there was a vacant
interval of eighteen inches in width interposed between them. To
prevent as much as possible, therefore, the injurious effects of
this evil upon the health of the officers, I appointed certain
days for the airing of their bedding by the fires, as well as for
that of the ships' companies. Every attention was paid to Mr.
Scallon's case by the medical gentlemen, and all our anti-scorbutics
were put in requisition for his recovery: these consisted
principally of preserved vegetable soups, lemon-juice, and sugar,
pickles, preserved currants and gooseberries, and spruce beer. I
began also, about this time, to raise a small quantity of mustard
and cress in my cabin, in small shallow boxes filled with mould,
and placed along the stovepipe; by these means, even in the severity
of winter, we could generally ensure a crop at the end of the sixth
or seventh day after sowing the seed, which, by keeping several
boxes at work, would give to two or three scorbutic patients nearly
an ounce of salad each daily, even though the necessary economy in
our coals did not allow of the fire being kept in at night. The
mustard and cress thus raised were necessarily colourless, from the
privation of light; but, as far as we could judge, they possessed
the same pungent aromatic taste as if grown under ordinary
circumstances. So effectual were these remedies in Mr. Scallon's
case, that, on the ninth evening from the attack, he was able to
walk about on the lower deck for some time, and he assured me that
he could then "run a race."

At noon on the 7th, the temperature of the atmosphere had got down
to 49° below zero, being the greatest degree of cold which we had
yet experienced; but the weather being quite calm, we walked on
shore for an hour without inconvenience, the sensation of cold
depending much more on the degree of wind at the time than on the
absolute temperature of the atmosphere as indicated by the
thermometer. In several of the accounts given of those countries
in which an intense degree of natural cold is experienced, some
effects are attributed to it which certainly did not come under
our observation in the course of this winter. The first of these
is the dreadful sensation said to be produced on the lungs,
causing them to feel as if torn asunder when the air is inhaled at
a very low temperature. No such sensation was ever experienced by
us, though in going from the cabins into the open air, and _vice
versâ_, we were constantly in the habit for some months of
undergoing a change of from 80° to 100°, and, in several
instances, 120° of temperature in less than one minute; and, what
is still more extraordinary, not a single inflammatory complaint,
beyond a slight cold, which was cured by common care in a day or
two, occurred during this particular period. The second is, the
vapour with which the air of an inhabited room is charged,
condensing into a shower of snow immediately on the opening of a
door or window communicating with the external atmosphere. This
goes much beyond anything that we had an opportunity of observing.
What happened with us was simply this: on the opening of the doors
at the top and bottom of our hatchway ladders, the vapour was
immediately condensed, by the sudden admission of the cold air,
into a visible form, exactly resembling a very thick smoke, which
settled on all the panels of the doors and bulkheads, and
immediately froze, by which means the latter were covered with a
thick coating of ice, which it was necessary frequently to scrape
off; but we never, to my knowledge, saw the conversion of the
vapour into snow during its fall.

On the evening of the 15th, the atmosphere being clear and serene,
we were gratified by a sight of the only very brilliant and
diversified display of Aurora Borealis which occurred during the
whole winter. I believe it to be almost impossible for words to
give an idea of the beauty and variety which this magnificent
phenomenon displayed.

About this time it had been remarked, that a white setter dog had
left the Griper for several nights past at the same time, and had
regularly returned after some hours' absence. As the daylight
increased, we had frequent opportunities of seeing him in company
with a she-wolf, with which he kept up an almost daily intercourse
for several weeks, till at length he returned no more to the
ships; having either lost his way by rambling to too great a
distance, or, what is more likely, perhaps, been destroyed by the
male wolves. Some time after, a large dog of mine, which was also
getting into the habit of occasionally remaining absent for some
time, returned on board a good deal lacerated and covered with
blood, having no doubt maintained a severe encounter with a male
wolf, which we traced to a considerable distance by the tracks on
the snow. An old dog, of the Newfoundland breed, that we had on
board the Hecla, was also in the habit of remaining out with the
wolves for a day or two together; and we frequently watched them
keeping company on the most friendly terms.

A wolf, which crossed the harbour close to the ships on the 25th,
was observed to be almost entirely white, his body long and
extremely lean, standing higher on his legs than any of the
Esquimaux dogs, but otherwise much resembling them; his tail was
long and bushy, and always hanging between his legs, and he kept
his head very low in running. It is extraordinary that we could
never succeed in killing or catching one of these animals, though
we were for months almost constantly endeavouring to do so.

On the 1st and 2d of February the weather was rather hazy, so that
the sun could not have been seen had it been above the horizon;
but the 3d was a beautifully clear and calm day. At eight A.M. a
cross, consisting of the usual vertical and horizontal rays, was
seen about the moon. At twenty minutes before apparent noon, the
sun was seen from the Hecla's main-top, at the height of fifty-one
feet above the sea, being the first time that this luminary had
been visible to us since the 11th of November, a period of
eighty-four days, being twelve days less than the time of its
remaining actually beneath the horizon, independently of the
effects of atmospherical refraction. On ascending the main-top, I
found the sun to be plainly visible over the land to the south;
but at noon there was a dusky sort of cloud hanging about the
horizon, which prevented our seeing anything like a defined limb,
so as to measure or estimate its altitude correctly.

At noon on the 7th we had the first clear view of the sun which we
had yet enjoyed since its reappearance above our horizon, and an
indistinct parhelion, or mock sun, slightly prismatic, was seen on
the eastern side of it, at the distance of 22°.

There was now sufficient daylight, from eight o'clock till four,
to enable us to perform with great facility any work outside the
ships. I was not sorry to commence upon some of the occupations
more immediately connected with the equipment of the ships for sea
than those to which we had hitherto been obliged to have recourse
as mere employment. We therefore began this day to collect stones
for ballast, of which it was calculated that the Hecla would
require in the spring nearly seventy tons, besides twenty tons of
additional water, to make up for the loss of weight by the
expenditure of provisions and stores. These stones were brought
down on sledges about half a mile to the beach, where they were
broken into a convenient size for stowage, and then weighed in
scales erected on the beach for the purpose; thus affording to the
men a considerable quantity of bodily exercise whenever the
weather would permit them to be so employed.

The distance at which sounds were heard in the open air, during
the continuance of intense cold, was so great as constantly to
afford matter of surprise to us, notwithstanding the frequency
with which we had occasion to remark it. We have, for instance,
often heard people distinctly conversing, in a common tone of
voice, at the distance of a mile; and to-day I heard a man singing
to himself as he walked along the beach, at even a greater
distance than this. Another circumstance also occurred to-day,
which may perhaps be considered as worthy of notice. Lieutenant
Beechey, and Messrs. Beverly and Fisher, in the course of a walk
which led them to a part of the harbour, about two miles directly
to leeward of the ships, were surprised by suddenly perceiving a
smell of smoke, so strong as even to impede their breathing, till,
by walking on a little farther, they got rid of it. This
circumstance shows to what a distance the smoke from the ships was
carried horizontally, owing to the difficulty with which it rises
at a very low temperature of the atmosphere.

From four P.M. on the 14th till half past seven on the following
morning, being an interval of fifteen hours and a half, during
which time the weather was clear and nearly calm, a thermometer,
fixed on a pole between the ships and the shore, never rose above
-54°, and was once during that interval, namely, at six in the
morning, as low as -55°. During the lowest temperature above
mentioned, which was the most intense degree of cold marked by the
spirit-thermometer during our stay in Winter Harbour, not the
slightest inconvenience was suffered from exposure to the open air
by a person well clothed, as long as the weather was perfectly
calm; but, in walking against a very light air of wind, a smart
sensation was experienced all over the face, accompanied by a pain
in the middle of the forehead, which soon became rather severe. We
amused ourselves in freezing some mercury during the continuance
of this cold weather, and by beating it out on an anvil previously
reduced to the temperature of the atmosphere; it did not appear to
be very malleable when in this state, usually breaking after two
or three blows from the hammer.

The increased length of the day, and the cheering presence of the
sun for several hours above the horizon, induced me, notwithstanding
the severity of the weather, to open the dead-lights of my
stern windows, in order to admit the daylight, of which, in our
occupations below, we had entirely been deprived for more than four
months. I had soon, however, occasion to find that this change was
rather premature, and that I had not rightly calculated on the length
of the winter in Melville Island. The Hecla was fitted with double
windows in her stern, the interval between the two sashes being about
two feet; and within these some curtains of baize had been nailed
close in the early part of the winter. On endeavouring now to remove
the curtains, they were found to be so strongly cemented to the
windows by the frozen vapour collected between them, that it was
necessary to cut them off in order to open the windows; and from the
space between the double sashes we removed more than twelve large
buckets full of ice or frozen vapour, which had accumulated in the
same manner.

About noon on the 16th, a parhelion, faintly prismatic, appeared
on each side of the sun, continuing only for half an hour.
Notwithstanding the low temperature of the external atmosphere,
the officers contrived to act, as usual, the play announced for
this evening; but it must be confessed that it was almost too cold
for either the actors or the audience to enjoy it, especially for
those of the former who undertook to appear in female dresses.

In the constant hope that each succeeding day would produce some
amendment in the weather, we endeavoured contentedly to put up
with the cold, which, however, continued to be so intense in the
cabin for several weeks after this, that it was impossible to sit
there without being warmly wrapped up; and it was not uncommon for
us, at this period, to reverse the usual order of things, by
throwing off our great coats when we went on deck to warm
ourselves by exercise (the only mode we had of doing so), and
immediately resuming them on coming below.

With our present temperature, the breath of a person at a little
distance looked exactly like the smoke of a musket just fired, and
that of a party of men employed upon the ice to-day resembled a
thick white cloud.

At a quarter past ten on Thursday, the 24th, while the men were
running round the decks for exercise, and were on that account
fortunately well clothed, the house on shore was discovered to be
on fire. All the officers and men of both ships instantly ran up
to extinguish it; and having, by great exertion, pulled off the
roof with ropes, and knocked down a part of the sides, so as to
allow snow to be thrown upon the flames, we succeeded in getting
it under after three quarters of an hour, and fortunately before
the fire had reached that end of the house where the two clocks,
together with the transit and other valuable instruments, were
standing in their cases. Having removed these, and covered the
ruins with snow, to prevent any remains of fire from breaking out
again, we returned on board till more temperate weather should
enable us to dig out the rest of the things, among which nothing
of any material consequence was subsequently found to have
suffered injury; and, having mustered the ships' companies to see
that they had put on dry clothes before going to dinner, they were
employed daring the rest of the day in drying those which had been
wet. The appearance which our faces presented at the fire was a
curious one, almost every nose and cheek having become quite white
with frostbites in five minutes after being exposed to the
weather; so that it was deemed necessary for the medical
gentlemen, together with some others appointed to assist them, to
go constantly round while the men were working at the fire, and to
rub with snow the parts affected, in order to restore animation.
Notwithstanding this precaution, which, however, saved many
frostbites, we had an addition of no less than sixteen men to the
sick lists of both ships in consequence of this accident. Among
these there were four or five cases which kept the patients
confined for several weeks; but John Smith, of the artillery, who
was Captain Sabine's servant, and who, together with Sergeant
Martin, happened to be in the house at the time the fire broke
out, was unfortunate enough to suffer much more severely. In their
anxiety to save the dipping-needle, which was standing close to
the stove, and of which they knew the value, they immediately ran
out with it; and Smith, not having time to put on his gloves, had
his fingers in half an hour so benumbed and the animation so
completely suspended, that on his being taken on board by Mr.
Edwards, and having his hands plunged into a basin of cold water,
the surface of the water was immediately frozen by the intense
cold thus suddenly communicated to it; and, notwithstanding the
most humane and unremitting attention paid to them by the medical
gentlemen, it was found necessary, some time after, to resort to
the amputation of a part of four fingers on one hand and three on
the other.




CHAPTER VII.

More temperate Weather.--House rebuilt.--Quantity of Ice collected
on the Hecla's lower Deck.--Meteorological Phenomena.--Conclusion
of Theatrical Entertainments.--Increased Sickness on board the
Griper.--Clothes first dried in the open Air.--Remarkable Halos
and Parhelia.--Snow Blindness.--Cutting the Ice round the Ships,
and other Occurrences to the Close of May.


Before sunrise on the morning of the 1st of March, Lieutenant
Beechey remarked so much bright red light near the southeastern
horizon, that he constantly thought the sun was rising nearly half
an hour before it actually appeared; there was a column of light
above the sun similar to those which we had before seen. The day
being clear and moderate, a party of men were employed in digging
out the things which were buried in the ruins; the clocks were
removed on board for examination, and preparations were made to
rebuild the house for their reception.

The 5th of March was the most mild and pleasant day we had
experienced for several weeks, and after divine service had been
performed, almost all the officers and men in both ships were glad
to take advantage of it, by enjoying a long walk upon the
neighbouring hills. The weather had been hazy, with light snow and
some clouds in the morning; but the latter gradually dispersed
after noon, affording us the first day to which we could attach
the idea of spring.

We continued to enjoy the same temperature and enlivening weather
on the 7th, and now began to flatter ourselves in earnest that the
season had taken that favourable change for which we had so long
been looking with extreme anxiety and impatience. This hope was
much strengthened by a circumstance which occurred to-day, and
which, trifling as it would have appeared in any other situation
than ours, was to us a matter of no small interest and satisfaction.
This was no other than the thawing of a small quantity of snow in
a favourable situation upon the black paintwork of the ship's stern,
which exactly faced the south; being the first time that such an
event had occurred for more than five months.

The severe weather which, until the last two or three days, we had
experienced, had been the means of keeping in a solid state all
the vapour which had accumulated and frozen upon the ship's sides
on the lower deck. As long as it continued in this state, it did
not prove a source of annoyance, especially as it had no
communication with the bed-places. The late mildness of the
weather, however, having caused a thaw to take place below, it now
became necessary immediately to scrape off the coating of ice, and
it will, perhaps, be scarcely credited, that we this day removed
about one hundred buckets full, each containing from five to six
gallons, being the accumulation which had taken place in an
interval of less than four weeks. It may be observed, that this
vapour must principally have been produced from the men's breath,
and from the steam of their victuals during meals, that from the
coppers being effectually carried on deck by the screen which I
have before mentioned.

On the 9th it blew a hard gale from the northward and westward,
raising a snowdrift, which made the day almost as inclement as in
the midst of winter. The wind very suddenly ceased in the evening,
and while the atmosphere near the ships was so serene and
undisturbed that the smoke rose quite perpendicularly, we saw the
snowdrift on the hills, at one or two miles' distance, whirled up
into the air, in columns several hundred feet high, and carried
along by the wind, sometimes to the north, and at others in the
opposite direction. The snow thus raised at times resembled
waterspouts, but more frequently appeared like smoke issuing from
the tops of the hills, and as such was at first represented to me.

It blew a strong breeze from the N.b.W., with a heavy snowdrift,
on the 12th, which continued, with little intermission, till near
noon on the 14th; affording us a convincing proof that the hopes
with which we had flattered ourselves of the speedy return of
spring were not yet to be accomplished.

On the 16th, there being little wind, the weather was again
pleasant and comfortable, though the thermometer remained very
low.

This evening the officers performed the farces of the _Citizen_
and the _Mayor of Garratt_, being the last of our theatrical
amusements for this winter, the season having now arrived when
there would no longer be a want of occupation for the men, and
when it became necessary also to remove a part of the roofing to
admit light to the officers' cabins. Our poets were again set to
work on this occasion, and an appropriate address was spoken on
the closing of the North Georgia Theatre, than which we may,
without vanity, be permitted to say, none had ever done more real
service to the community for whose benefit it was intended.

On the 23d we found, by digging a hole in the ice, in the middle
of the harbour, where the depth of water was four fathoms and a
quarter, that its thickness was six feet and a half, and the snow
on the surface of it eight inches deep. This may be considered a
fair specimen of the average formation of ice in this neighbourhood
since the middle of the preceding September: and as the freezing
process did not stop for six weeks after this, the produce of the
whole winter may, perhaps, be reasonably taken at seven, or seven
and a half feet. In chopping this ice with an axe the men found it
very hard and brittle, till they arrived within a foot of the lower
surface, where it became soft and spongy.

Being extremely anxious to get rid, as early as possible, of the
drying of our washed clothes upon the lower deck, I had to-day a
silk handkerchief washed and hung up under the stern, in order to
try the effect of the sun's rays upon it. In four hours it became
thoroughly dry, the thermometer in the shade being from -18° to
-6° at the time. This was the first article that had been dried
without artificial heat for six months, and it was yet another
month before flannel could be dried in the open air. When this is
considered, as well as that, during the same period, the airing of
the bedding, the drying of the bed-places, and the ventilation of
the inhabited parts of the ship, were wholly dependant on the same
means, and this with a very limited supply of fuel, it may,
perhaps be conceived, in some degree, what unremitting attention
was necessary to the preservation of health, under circumstances
so unfavourable and even prejudicial.

The morning of April 27th being very fine, and the thermometer at
+6°, the ship's company's bedding was hung up to air, between the
fore and main rigging, being the first time we had ventured to
bring it from the lower deck for nearly eight months. While it was
out, the berths and bed-places were fumigated with a composition
of gunpowder mixed with vinegar, and known familiarly by the name
of _devils_; an operation which had been regularly gone through
once a week during the winter.

For the last three or four days of April the snow on the black
cloth of our housing had begun to thaw a little during a few hours
in the middle of the day, and on the 30th so rapid a change took
place in the temperature of the atmosphere, that the thermometer
stood at the freezing, or, as it may more properly be termed in
this climate, the thawing point, being the first time that such an
event had occurred for nearly eight months, or since the 9th of
the preceding September. This temperature was to our feelings, so
much like that of summer, that I was under the necessity of using
my authority to prevent the men from making such an alteration in
their clothing as might have been attended with very dangerous
consequences. The thermometer had ranged from -32° to +32° in the
course of twenty days. There was, at this period, more snow upon
the ground than at any other time of the year, the average depth
on the lower parts of the land being four or five inches, but much
less upon the hills; while in the ravines a very large quantity
had been collected. The snow at this time became so soft, from the
influence of the sun upon it, as to make walking very laborious
and unpleasant.

The fine and temperate weather with which the month of April had
concluded, induced Captain Sabine to set the clocks going, in
order to commence his observations for the pendulum, and he now
took up his quarters entirely on shore for that purpose. On the
first of May, however, it blew a strong gale from the northward,
which made it impossible to keep up the desired temperature in the
house: and so heavy was the snowdrift, that in a few hours the
house was nearly covered, and we were obliged to communicate with
Captain Sabine and his attendants through a small window, from
which the snow was, with much labour, cleared away, the door being
quite inaccessible. We saw the sun at midnight for the first time
this season.

The gale and snowdrift continued on the following day, when we had
literally to dig out the sentries, who attended the fire at the
house, in order to have them relieved.

On the 6th, the thermometer rose no higher than +8½° during the
day; but, as the wind was moderate, and it was high time to
endeavour to get the ships once more fairly afloat, we commenced
the operation of cutting the ice about them. In order to prevent
the men suffering from wet and cold feet, a pair of strong boots
and boot-stockings were on this occasion served to each.

On the 15th, two or three coveys of ptarmigan were seen, after
which they became more and more numerous, and a brace or two were
almost daily procured for the sick, for whose use they were
exclusively reserved. As it was of the utmost importance, under
our present circumstances, that every ounce of game which we might
thus procure should be served in lieu of other meat, I now renewed
the orders formerly given, that every animal killed was to be
considered as public property; and, as such, to be regularly
issued like any other kind of provision, without the slightest
distinction between the messes of the officers and those of the
ships' companies.

Some of our men having, in the course of their shooting
excursions, been exposed for several hours to the glare of the sun
and snow, returned at night much affected with that painful
inflammation in the eyes occasioned by the reflection of intense
light from the snow, aided by the warmth of the sun, and called in
America "snow blindness." This complaint, of which the sensation
exactly resembles that produced by large particles of sand or dust
in the eyes, is cured by some tribes of American Indians by
holding them over the steam of warm water; but we found a cooling
wash, made by a small quantity of acetate of lead mixed with cold
water, more efficacious in relieving the irritation, which was
always done in three or four days, even in the most severe cases,
provided the eyes were carefully guarded from the light. As a
preventive of this complaint, a piece of black crape was given to
each man, to be worn as a kind of short veil attached to the hat,
which we found to be very serviceable. A still more convenient
mode, adopted by some of the officers, was found equally
efficacious; this consisted in taking the glasses out of a pair of
spectacles, and substituting black or green crape, the glass
having been found to heat the eyes and increase the irritation.

On the 17th we completed the operation of cutting the ice round
the Hecla, which was performed in the following manner. We began
by digging a large hole under the stern, being the same as that in
which the tide-pole was placed, in order to enter the saw, which
occupied us nearly two days, only a small number of men being able
to work at it. In the mean time, all the snow and rubbish was
cleared away from the ship's side, leaving only the solid ice to
work upon; and a trench, two feet wide, was cut the whole length
of the starboard side, from the stem to the rudder, keeping within
an inch or two of the bends; and taking care here and there to
leave a dike, to prevent the water which might ooze into one part
from filling up the others in which the men were working. In this
manner was the trench cut with axes to the depth of about four
feet and a half, leaving only eighteen inches for the saws to cut,
except in those places where the dikes remained. The saw, being
then entered in the hole under the stern, was worked in the usual
manner, being suspended by a triangle made of three spars: one cut
being made on the outer part of the trench, and a second within an
inch or two of the bends, in order to avoid injuring the planks. A
small portion of ice being broken off now and then by bars,
handspikes, and ice-chisels, floated, to the surface, and was
hooked out by piecemeal. This operation was a cold and tedious one
and required nine days to complete it. When the workmen had this
morning completed the trench within ten or twelve feet of the
stern, the ship suddenly disengaged herself from the ice, to which
she had before been firmly adhering on the larboard side, and rose
in the water about ten inches abaft, and nearly eighteen inches
forward, with a considerable surge. This circumstance it was not
difficult to explain. In the course of the winter, the strong
eddy-winds about the ships had formed round them a drift of snow
seven or eight feet deep in some parts, and perhaps weighing a
hundred tons; by which the ice, and the ships with it, were
carried down much below the natural level at which they would
otherwise have floated. In the mean time the ships had become
considerably lighter, from expenditure of several months'
provisions: so that, on both these accounts, they had naturally a
tendency to rise in the water as soon as they were set at liberty.

A party of hands were occupied in breaking and weighing the stones
for ballast, while others were getting out the sails and boats; and
our carpenters, armourers, coopers, and sailmakers having each
their respective employments, our little colony now presented the
most busy and bustling scene that can be imagined. It was found
necessary to caulk every part of the upper works, as well as all
the decks, the seams having been so much opened by the frost as to
require at least one, and in many parts two threads of oakum,
though the ship had scarcely ever laboured at all since she was
last caulked. I also at this time laid out a small garden, planting
it with radishes, onions, mustard, and cress; and a similar attempt
was made by Lieutenant Liddon; but, notwithstanding every care and
attention which could be paid to it, this experiment may be said to
have wholly failed, the radishes not exceeding an inch in length by
the latter end of July, and the other seeds being altogether thrown
away. I may remark, however, that some common ships' peas, which
were sown by our people for their amusement, were found to thrive
so well, that, had I been sooner aware of it, a great quantity of
the leaves at least of this vegetable might have been grown, which,
when boiled and eaten as greens, would have been no small treat to
persons deprived of fresh vegetable substance for more than ten
months.

Having considered that an examination of the extent and
productions of the island might be conducive to the improvement of
the geography and natural history of these regions, and the good
state of health enjoyed by the crews permitting a certain number
of men to be spared from each ship during their equipment for sea,
I now determined to undertake a journey into the interior for this
purpose, accompanied by a certain number of officers and men who
volunteered their services on the occasion; and the 1st of June
was fixed for our departure.

Early on the morning of the 24th Mr. Allison reported that he had
felt a few drops of rain fall upon his face, an event which we had
scarcely dared to anticipate so soon, but which was hailed with
much satisfaction, as nothing appears to be so effectual as rain
in producing the dissolution of the ice. The clouds had a watery
appearance throughout the day, and at half past eight in the
evening we were agreeably surprised by a smart shower of rain,
which was shortly after succeeded by several others.

Early on the morning of the 29th the wind increased to a fresh
gale from the northward and westward, which continued during the
day, with a heavy fall of snow and a tremendous drift, that
prevented our seeing to the distance of more than twenty yards
around the ships. The following day being fine, I took my
travelling party to the top of the northeast hill, in order to try
the cart which had been constructed for carrying the tents and
baggage, and which appeared to answer very well. The view from
this hill was not such as to offer much encouragement to our hopes
of future advancement to the westward. The sea still presented the
same unbroken and continuous surface of solid and impenetrable
ice, and this ice could not be less than from six to seven feet in
thickness, as we knew it to be about the ships. When to this
circumstance was added the consideration that scarcely the
slightest symptoms of thawing had yet appeared, and that in three
weeks from this period the sun would again begin to decline to the
southward, it must be confessed that the most sanguine and
enthusiastic among us had some reason to be staggered in the
expectations they had formed of the complete accomplishment of our
enterprise.




CHAPTER VIII.

Journey across Melville Island to the Northern Shore, and Return
to the Ships by a different Route.


The weather being favourable on the morning of the 1st of June, I
made such arrangements as were necessary previous to my departure
on our intended journey. I directed Lieutenants Liddon and Beechey
to proceed with all possible despatch in the equipment of the
ships for sea, having them ready to sail by the end of June, in
order that we might be able to take advantage of any favourable
alteration in the state of the ice at an earlier period than
present appearances allowed us to anticipate.

The party selected to accompany me, out of the numerous volunteers
on this occasion, consisted of Captain Sabine, Messrs. Fisher,
Nias, Reid, and Sergeant McMahon, of the marines, Sergeant Martin,
of the artillery, and three seamen and two marines belonging to
both ships, making a total of twelve, including myself. We were
supplied with provisions for three weeks, according to the daily
proportion of one pound of biscuit, two thirds of a pound of
preserved meat, one ounce of salep powder, one ounce of sugar, and
half a pint of spirits for each man. Two tents, of the kind called
in the army horsemen's tents, were made of blankets, with two
boarding-pikes fixed across at each end, and a ridge-rope along
the top, which, with stones laid upon the foot of the blankets,
made a very comfortable and portable shelter. These tents, with
the whole of the provisions, together with a _conjuror_ or cooking
apparatus, and a small quantity of wood for fuel, amounting on the
whole to eight hundred pounds, were carried upon a strong but
light cart constructed for the purpose: this method having been
decided on as the most convenient for the country in which we were
about to travel.

Each officer and man was also furnished with a blanket made into a
bag, with a drawing-string at each end, a pair of spare shoes, and
stockings, a flannel shirt, and a cap to sleep in. The clothing
and blankets were carried on our backs in knapsacks, those of the
officers weighing from seventeen to twenty-four pounds each, and
one between every two men weighing twenty-four pounds, to be
carried for half a day alternately.

At five P.M. we left the ships, accompanied by a large party of
officers and men from each, who were desirous of relieving us from
the weight of our knapsacks for an hour or two; and, having been
cheered by the ships on our departure, we went round the head of
the harbour, and ascended the northeast hill, our companions left
us at eight P.M., and we proceeded across a level plain almost
entirely covered with snow, which, however, was so hard as to make
the travelling very good; and the cart was dragged along without
difficulty. At eleven P.M. we came to three remarkable round
hills; composed entirely of sand and masses of sandstone, and
halted to dine close to the northward of them. Those parts of the
land which were clear of snow appeared to be more productive than
those in the immediate neighbourhood of Winter Harbour, the
dwarf-willow, sorrel, and poppy being more abundant, and the moss
more luxuriant; we, could not, however, collect a sufficient
quantity of the slender wood of the willow, in a dry state, for
the purpose of dissolving snow for water, and were therefore
obliged to use a part of the fuel which we had provided for that
purpose. The thermometer stood at 31° at midnight.

Having set off soon after midnight, at the distance of half a mile
in a N.b.E. direction we came to a piece of frozen water, half a
mile in length and two hundred yards wide, situated on the south
side of the range of hills which bound the prospect from Winter
Harbour. The ice on the surface of this lake or pond was in some
parts nearly dissolved, and in all too soft to allow us to cross
it. We halted at half past six A.M., and pitched the tents on the
hardest ground we could find, but it became quite swampy in the
course of the day. We killed seven ptarmigan, and saw two plovers
and two deer, being the first we had met with this season, with a
fawn so small as to leave no doubt of its having been dropped
since the arrival of the female upon the island. They were so wild
as not to allow us to approach them within a quarter of a mile.
The day was fine, with light and variable airs; the thermometer
stood at 34° in the shade at seven A.M., at which time it was
unfortunately broken.

We again set forward at two A.M. on the 3d, crossing one or two
ravines, running E.N.E. and W.S.W., in which there was a large
collection of snow, but as yet no appearance of water in the
bottom of them. Captain Sabine and myself, being considerably
ahead of the rest of the party, had sat down to wait for them,
when a fine reindeer came trotting up, and played round us for a
quarter of an hour, within thirty yards. We had no gun, nor do I
know that we should have killed it if we had, there being already
as much weight upon the cart as the men could well drag, and
having no fuel to spare for cooking; besides, we felt it would
have been but an ill return for the confidence which he seemed
willing to place in us. On hearing our people talking on the
opposite side of the ravine, the deer immediately crossed over,
and went directly up to them, with very little caution; and they
being less scrupulous than we were, one or two shots were
immediately fired at him, but without effect; on which he again
crossed over to where we were sitting, approaching us nearer than
before. As soon as we rose up and walked on, he accompanied us
like a dog, sometimes trotting ahead of us, and then returning
within forty or fifty yards. When we halted, at six A.M., to make
the usual observations, he remained by us till the rest of the
party came up, and then trotted off. The reindeer is by no means a
graceful animal; its high shoulders, and an awkward stoop in its
head, giving it rather a deformed appearance. Our new acquaintance
had no horns; he was of a brownish colour, with a black saddle, a
broad black rim round the eyes, and very white about the tail. We
observed that, whenever he was about to set off, he made a sort of
playful gambol, by rearing on his hind legs.

At two o'clock on the morning of the 4th we continued our journey
to the northward, over the same snowy and level plain as before,
than which it is impossible to conceive anything more dreary and
uninteresting. It frequently happened that, for an hour together,
not a single spot of uncovered ground could be seen. The breeze
freshened up to a gale from the S.S.E. as we proceeded, and the
men, as if determined not to forget that they were sailors, set a
large blanket upon the cart as a sail, which, upon the present
level ground, was found to be of material assistance. The snow was
deep and rather soft, which made the travelling heavy; and as the
wind produced a good deal of snowdrift, most of the bare patches
of ground became covered up, so that, when our time for halting
had arrived, not a piece of ground could be seen on which to pitch
the tents. Captain Sabine and myself went forward to look out for
a spot, and at length were fortunate to meet with one, on which
there was just room for our little encampment. It was with some
difficulty, by building a wall with stones and our knapsacks, that
we prevented its being covered with snow before the party came up,
which they did at half past seven A.M., having travelled ten miles
in a N.W.b.N. direction.

By the time we had secured the tents the wind blew hard, with a
continued fall, as well as drift of snow, so that we could not but
consider ourselves fortunate in having met with a spot of ground
in good time. Notwithstanding the inclemency of the weather, we
found the tents afford us very comfortable and sufficient shelter,
the cart being tilted up to windward of them, so as to break up
some measure the violence of the wind; and, when wrapped up, or,
rather, enclosed in our blanket bags, we were generally quite warm
enough to enjoy the most sound and refreshing repose.

It continued to blow and snow till seven P.M., when the wind
having veered to the S.W., and become more moderate, we struck the
tents; and having now placed the men's knapsacks on the cart, to
enable them to drag with greater facility, we proceeded on our
journey to the northward. We passed a narrow but deep ravine lying
across our course, in some parts of which the snow reached nearly
to a level with the banks, forming a kind of bridges or causeways,
on one of which we crossed without difficulty. The men had hoisted
one sail upon the cart at first setting off; but the wind being
now, as they expressed it, "on the larboard quarter," a second
blanket was rigged as a mainsail, to their great amusement as well
as relief.

After crossing a second ravine, on the north side of which the
ground rose considerably, we entered upon another snowy plain,
where there was nothing to be seen in any direction but snow and
sky. To make it the more dreary, a thick fog came on as the night
advanced; and as this prevented our taking any mark more than
fifty or a hundred yards ahead, we had to place the compass, by
which we were now entirely travelling, upon the ground every five
minutes; and as it traversed with great sluggishness, we made a
very crooked and uncertain course. For more than two hours we did
not pass a single spot of uncovered ground, nor even a stone
projecting above the snow.

The fog continued too thick to allow us to move till six A.M., at
which time we resumed our journey. There was a broad and distant
haze-bow of very white and dazzling light directly opposite the
sun. The weather being still too foggy to see more than a quarter
of a mile ahead, it was with considerable difficulty that we could
proceed on a tolerably straight course. To effect this, it was
necessary to determine the point on which we were walking by the
bearing of the sun, which was still visible, and the apparent
time, and then to take a mark ahead by which our course was to be
directed. From the thickness of the weather, however, it was
necessary to repeat this operation every five or ten minutes,
which, together with the uniform whiteness and intense glare of
the snow, became so extremely painful to the eyes, that Mr. Fisher
and myself, who went ahead as guides, soon became affected with
snow blindness, and the headmost man at the cart, whose business
it was constantly to watch our motions, began to suffer in a
similar manner from the same cause.

It may, perhaps, be conceived, then, under these circumstances,
how pleasing was the relief afforded by our seeing, at eight A.M.,
a stripe of black or uncovered land ahead, which proved to be the
bank of a ravine fifty or sixty feet deep and three hundred yards
wide, on the north side of which we pitched the tents, having made
good only one mile and a half, the snow being so soft and deep as
to make it difficult to drag the cart through it.

The latitude observed here was 75° 22' 43", and the longitude, by
the chronometer, 111° 14' 26"; in which situation a cylinder of
tin, containing an account of our visit, was deposited under a
pile of stones eight feet high and seven feet broad at the base.

The wind increased to a fresh breeze from the S.S.E. on the 6th,
with a sharp frost, making it very cold in the tents, which we
therefore struck at four A.M., and at the distance of half a mile
came to the summit of a hill overlooking what appeared to be a
frozen sea before us. We then descended the hill, with the
intention of pushing forward to determine whether the white and
level space before us was the sea or not. We had not proceeded
far, however, when the clouds began to gather heavily in the
southeast, and shortly after snow and sleet began to fall. Being
unwilling, therefore, to allow the men's clothes to be wet when
there was no absolute occasion for it, we halted on a piece of dry
ground, and, having built a wall six feet high to shelter us from
the weather, pitched the tents very comfortably under the lee of
it till the weather should allow us to proceed.

At six P.M., the wind having gradually got round to the N.N.E.,
and the weather being more clear and cold, I set out, accompanied
by Messrs. Nias and Reid, and a quartermaster of the Griper, with
the intention of examining the situation and appearance of the sea
to the northward; leaving the rest of the party, several of whom
were suffering from snow-blindness, though otherwise in good
health, to remain quietly in the tents till our return. Having
travelled N.N.W. a mile and a half through much deep snow, of
which a good deal had fallen during the day, we came to some ice
thrown up on the beach, having cracks in it parallel to the line
of the shore, which we immediately recognised to be of the same
kind as those to which we had so long been accustomed in Winter
Harbour, and which are occasioned by the rise and fall of the
tide. We turned to the westward along the beach, and at the
distance of two miles ascended a point of land in that direction,
from whence we had a commanding view of the objects around us. As
soon as we had gained the summit of this point, which is about
eighty feet above the sea, we had an additional confirmation that
it was the sea which we had now reached, the ice being thrown upon
the beach under the point, and as far as we could see to the
westward, in large, high, irregular masses, exactly similar to
those which had so often afforded us anchorage and shelter upon
the southern shores of the island. Being desirous, however, of
leaving nothing uncertain respecting it, we walked out a few
hundred yards upon the ice, and began with a boarding-pike and our
knives, which were all the tools we had, to dig a hole in it, in
order to taste the water beneath. After nearly two hours' labour,
we could only get down as many feet, the ice being very hard,
brittle, and transparent; more so, as we imagined, than salt-water
ice usually is, which made us the more desirous to get through it.
I therefore determined to return to our people, and to remove our
encampment hither, for the purpose of completing the hole through
the ice with all our hands, while we were obtaining the necessary
observations on shore.

On our return to the tents, we dined, and rested till one o'clock
on the morning of the 7th, when we set out for the point, at which
we did not arrive till half past four, the snow being here so deep
as to make the cart an improper, and, indeed, almost impracticable
mode of conveying our baggage. It froze all day in the shade, with
a fresh breeze from the north; and, though the tents were pitched
under the lee of the grounded ice upon the beach, we found it
extremely cold; all the pools of water were frozen hard during the
night, and, some of our canteens burst from the same cause. The
people were allowed to rest after their supper till four P.M., and
were then set to work upon the ice and in building a monument on
the top of the Point.

We dined at midnight; and at half past one A.M. on the 8th struck
the tents, and drew the cart to the higher part of the Point,
where we occupied two hours in completing our monument, which is
of a conical form, twelve feet broad at the base, and as many in
height. Within it were deposited a tin cylinder, containing an
account of the party who had left it, and one or two silver and
copper English coins. This monument may be seen at several miles'
distance from the sea or land side; and, as great pains were taken
by Mr. Fisher in constructing it, it may probably last for a long
period of years.

Having now satisfactorily determined the extent of Melville Island
to the northward upon this meridian, which corresponds very nearly
with that of Winter Harbour, and finished all the requisite
observations, I proposed pursuing our journey towards the Blue
Hills, which were still in sight at the distance of several
leagues to the westward; and, having advanced to the southwest as
long as circumstances should appear to make it interesting or
practicable, to return by a circuitous route to the ships. We
travelled in a W.½S. direction, in order to keep on a ridge along
the coast, which afforded the only tolerable walking, the snow
being very deep on the lower parts of the land. We halted at half
past seven A.M., on a fine sandy ground, which gave us the
softest, as well as the driest bed which we had yet experienced on
our journey, and which was situated close to a little hillock of
earth and moss, so full of the burrows of hares as to resemble a
warren. We tried to smoke them out by burning port-fire, but none
appeared; and it is remarkable, that though we constantly met with
the dung of these animals, especially in this place, where it
occurred very abundantly, we never saw one of them during the
journey. As soon as we had halted, we found that Mr. Reid's
knapsack had dropped off the cart; he had therefore to go back to
look for it, and did not return till eleven o'clock, being so much
affected by snow-blindness as to be scarcely able to see his way
to the tents. This circumstance was, sufficient to show the
advantage, and even the necessity, of travelling entirely by night
under these circumstances, the intense glare of light from the
snow during the day inevitably producing this painful irritation
in the eyes.

At a quarter past five P.M. we resumed our journey to the
southwest, and soon after crossed a snowy plain a mile and a
quarter in breadth, extending to the sea to the north, and as far
as the eye could reach to the south. Having travelled S.W.b.W.
seven miles, we halted, at half an hour before midnight, at the
distance of three or four miles from the sea, the weather being
very clear and fine, with a moderate breeze from the S.S.W.

Having rested after our dinner till half past two A.M., we set out
again to the southwest, making, however, a very crooked course on
account of the irregularity of the ground. In the first quarter of
a mile we passed the first running stream which we had seen this
season, and this was but a small one, from six to twelve inches
deep. The ground, as well as the pools of water, was frozen hard
during the last night, but thawed during the day, which made
travelling worse and worse, as the sun acquired power. We passed a
few horns of deer, killed three ptarmigans, and saw a pair of
ducks. The plumage of the cock grouse was still quite white,
except near the tip of the tail, where the feathers were of a fine
glossy black; but in every hen which we had lately killed, a very
perceptible alteration was apparent, even from day to day, and
their plumage had now nearly assumed that speckled colour which,
from its resemblance to that of the ground, is so admirably
adapted to preserve them from being seen at the season of their
incubation. We found it difficult, in general, to get near the
hens, which were very wild; but the male birds were at all times
stupidly tame.

At half past two A.M. on the 10th we struck the tents, and
proceeded to the S.W., the wind having got round to the S.E., with
continued snow. At the distance of two miles we entered upon a
level plain three miles wide, which, with the exception of a patch
here and there, was entirely covered with snow. The uncovered
parts of this plain were so wet as to be almost impassable for the
cart; and we were now as desirous of keeping on the snow as, at
the beginning of our journey from Winter Harbour, we had been
anxious to avoid it.

The weather continued hazy, with snow occasionally, but our
clothes dried in the sun towards noon; soon after which, however,
the snow became more thick and constant, so that we could scarcely
see a hundred yards around the tents. We waited for some time in
hope of the weather clearing, and then, at a quarter past five,
continued our journey; as we were under the necessity, however, of
directing our course entirely by compass, which is here a very
uncertain and deceitful guide, we made but a slow and tedious
progress. The wind freshened up to a gale from the S.E. soon after
we had set out, which made it impossible for us any longer to
pursue our journey, and we began to look out for a spot on which
the tents could be pitched, so as to afford us a dry flooring, if
not shelter, during the gale. Having crossed three ravines within
a mile and a quarter, we at length came to a very deep one, which
was nearly perpendicular on each side, with the snow overhanging
in some parts, so as to make it dangerous to go near the edge of
the bank. We were at length fortunate in finding a narrow, sloping
ridge of snow, leading down to the bottom of the ravine; and
having descended this with some difficulty, we found such good
shelter as to determine me to halt here for the night, which now
became more and more inclement.

The wind gradually veered to the N.N.W. in the morning, and the
weather having cleared up about half past four, we struck the
tents and set off to the southward. The south bank of the ravine
being nearly as steep, and much higher than the other, it was with
considerable labour and difficulty that we were able to get the
cart up it, in which, however, we succeeded by six o'clock, when
we found that we were travelling on much higher ground than
before, overlooking that which we had left the preceding evening.
Having proceeded four miles over a level country, with much snow
upon it, we suddenly and unexpectedly came in sight of the sea or
a lake, at the distance of two or three miles before us, just
appearing between two high and steep hills, which terminated a
deep and broad ravine. We hastened forward to the point of the
nearest hill, from whence the prospect was extremely grand and
picturesque. We were looking down nearly perpendicular from a
height of eight or nine hundred feet, on an extensive plain of
ice, of which, to the westward, we could perceive no termination
for a distance of five or six leagues, the prospect to the
eastward being obstructed by other hills. A thick mist or vapour
was at times carried rapidly along by the wind over this ice, to
which it was entirely confined, occasionally covering the top of
the island with a dense cloud. The impression made upon our minds
at the time was, that it was a frozen lake on which we were now
looking; but this conjecture, as it afterward appeared, proved
erroneous. The ravine at which we had arrived discharges its
waters into a snug cove two or three miles deep, at the head of
which we now proposed resting, if a place could be found at which
our descent into the ravine could be effected. The sides of the
ravine, which were very steep, were covered with innumerable
blocks, of sandstone of every size and shape, over which alone any
road could be found to the cove below. It was necessary,
therefore, to make the attempt, but it was impossible for the best
built carriage to travel long on such a road; and when we had half
descended the bank, which led into the ravine on its north side,
the axle-tree broke short in the middle. The baggage was therefore
taken off and carried down to the bottom, where the tents were
pitched at eleven A.M., the wheels being left where the cart broke
down, as sound as at first.

The latitude observed here was 75° 12' 50", the longitude, by
chronometer, 111° 50' 05", and the variation of the magnetic
needle 125° 12' 22" easterly. The wind being fresh from the
W.N.W., and the weather being cold and raw, we built a wall to the
windward of the tents, as a substitute for the usual shelter
afforded by the cart; after supper, the people, being a good deal
fatigued, were allowed to rest till near midnight, and then
employed in arranging the baggage so as to carry it on our
shoulders for the rest of the journey. The wood which composed the
light framework of the cart being now disposable as fuel, we were
glad to make use of it in cooking a few ptarmigan, which afforded
us another sumptuous meal. It is not perhaps, easy for those who
have never experienced it, to imagine how great a luxury anything
warm in this way becomes, after living entirely upon cold
provisions for some time in this rigid climate. This change was
occasionally the more pleasant to us, from the circumstance of the
preserved meats, on which we principally lived, being generally at
this time hard frozen when taken out of the canisters.

Having finished our arrangements with respect to the baggage,
which made it necessary that each of the men should carry between
sixty and seventy pounds, and the officers from forty to fifty, we
struck the tents at half past two on the morning of the 12th, and
proceeded along the eastern shore of the cove, towards a point
which forms the entrance on that side.

We arrived at the point at five o'clock, and as we could now
perceive that the lake or gulf extended a considerable distance to
the eastward as well as to the westward, and that it would require
a long time to go round in the former direction, I determined to
cross it on the ice; and as the distance to the opposite shore
seemed too great for one journey, the snow being soft upon the
ice, first to visit the island, and, having rested there, to
proceed to the southward. Having walked five miles in a S.S.W.
direction, we landed at seven A.M., near the southeast part of the
island. The wind was fresh from the westward, and the tents were
pitched near the beach, under the lee of the high part of the
island.

We rested till six P.M., and then set off across the ice for a
point to the E.S.E. The snow had now become so soft after the heat
of the day, that, loaded as we were, we often sunk nearly up to
the knees, which made travelling very laborious, and we were,
therefore, not sorry to get on shore by half past eight, having
walked, by our account, three miles and a half.

The spot on which we encamped appeared so favourable for obtaining
specimens of the different animals which frequent this island,
that I determined to remain here one day for the purpose of
sporting and examining its natural productions.

The sportsmen went out early in the morning, and soon after met
with a musk-ox feeding on a spot of luxuriant pasture-ground,
covered with the dung of these animals as well as of deer. They
fired at him from a considerable distance without wounding him,
and he set off at a very quick pace over the hills. The musk-ox
has the appearance of a very ill-proportioned little animal, its
hair being so long as to make its feet appear only two or three
inches in length; they seem, indeed, to be treading upon it at
every step, and the individual in question actually did so in some
instances, as the hair was found in several of the foot-tracks.
When disturbed and hunted, they frequently tore up the ground with
their horns, and turned round occasionally to look at their
pursuers, but they never attempted to attack any of them. Our
gentlemen also met with a herd of twelve deer, three only of which
had horns, and they were much the largest of the herd, and
constantly drove the others away when they attempted to stop. The
birds seen by our people were many brent-geese and ptarmigans,
several golden plovers, one or two "boatswains," and abundance of
snow-buntings. One or two mice were caught; like several others we
had seen, these were turning brown about the belly and head, and
the back was of a dark gray colour. In every part of the island
over which we travelled, the holes and tracks of these little
animals were occasionally seen; one of them, which Sergeant Martin
ran after, finding no hole near and that he could not escape, set
himself against a stone, as if endeavouring to defend himself, and
bit the sergeant's finger when he took hold of him.

On a point of land at the distance of three quarters of a mile to
the W.b.S. of the tents, and within a hundred yards of the sea,
the remains of six Esquimaux huts were discovered; they consisted
of rude circles, about six feet in diameter, constructed
irregularly of stones of all sizes and shapes, and raised to the
height of two feet from the ground: they were paved with large
slabs of white schistose sandstone, which is here abundant; the
moss had spread over this floor, and appeared to be the growth of
three or four years. In each of the huts, on one side, was a small
separate compartment forming a recess, projecting outward, which
had probably been their store-room; and at a few feet from one of
the huts was a smaller circle of stones, which had composed the
fireplace, the mark of fire being still perceptible upon them.

The day was fine and clear, with a moderate wind from the westward
till four P.M., when it died away, and was shortly after succeeded
by a breeze from the southward, with a fall of snow. We now
travelled due south, with the intention of getting sight of the
Table Hills, and returning by that route to the ships, as there
appeared to be nothing more within our reach of sufficient
interest to detain us any longer from them. At eight P.M., finding
that the people's clothes were becoming wet through by the sleet
which fell, we halted and pitched the tents.

Early on the morning of the 14th the wind veered to the westward,
and the weather became gradually more clear; we therefore continued
our journey to the southward, and came in sight of the Table Hills
bearing S.E. of us, and at eight A.M. pitched the tents on some dry
ground on the bank of a ravine. We moved on towards the Table Hills
at five P.M., and crossed several ravines without much water in
them, running generally to the northeastward. We halted between the
Table Hills at ten o'clock, having travelled eight miles over very
swampy ground, and with the snow up to our knees in some of the
hollows.

As soon as the observations were completed, we set off for Winter
Harbour, and having passed over much rich and wet ground,
abounding with sorrel, which now began to put forth its leaves
with more vigour, arrived on board at seven P.M., having been met,
and welcomed most heartily, by almost every officer and man
belonging to the ships; and it was no small satisfaction to me to
hear it remarked, that the whole of our travelling party appeared
in more robust health than when we left them.




CHAPTER IX.

Occurrences at Winter Harbour in the early Part of June.--Gradual
Dissolution of the Ice upon the Sea and of the Snow upon the
Land.--Decease and Burial of William Scott.--Equipment of the
Ships completed.--Temperate Weather during the Month of
July.--Breaking up of the Ice near the Ships.--Move to the lower
Part of the Harbour.--Separation of the Ice at the
Entrance.--Prepare to Sail.--Abstract of Observations made in
Winter Harbour.


I had the happiness to find, on my return, that the officers and
men in both ships continued to enjoy the same good health as
before, with the exception of Scott, who was still the only man in
the Hecla's sick-list, and whose complaint seemed such as to
baffle every attempt that had been made to produce an amendment. A
constant disposition to fainting and a languid sort of despondency
had been, for some time past, the only symptoms which had induced
Mr. Edwards to continue the antiscorbutic treatment; and this it
was sometimes absolutely necessary to discontinue for a day or two
together, on account of the weak state of his bowels. During my
absence he had been much worse than before, notwithstanding the
greatest care and attention paid to him; but he was now once more
better. He had lived almost entirely on the ptarmigan and ducks,
of which a sufficient quantity had been procured to serve the sick
and convalescent in both ships abundantly, and none had at this
time been issued to any officer or man in the expedition.

The equipment of the ships had gone on satisfactorily during my
absence, the Griper being nearly ready for sea, the Hecla not
quite so forward, on account of the heavy work with the ballast,
of which sixty-five tons had been brought on board, to supply the
deficiency of weight in her holds. The survey of the provisions,
fuel, and other stores was completed, and the quantity and
condition of them, with the exception of the lemon-juice and
vinegar before mentioned, were found to be satisfactory. With
respect to vermin, I may here mention, that not a mouse, or rat,
or maggot of any kind ever appeared on board, to my knowledge,
during this voyage.

A very perceptible change had taken place in the ice of the
harbour on its upper surface, it being covered with innumerable
pools of water, chiefly brackish, except close in-shore, where the
tides had lifted the ice considerably above the level of the sea.

Having observed that the sorrel was now so far advanced in foliage
as to be easily gathered in sufficient quantity for eating, I gave
orders that two afternoons in each week should be occupied by all
hands in collecting the leaves of this plant; each man being
required to bring in, for the present, one ounce, to be served in
lieu of lemon-juice, pickles, and dried herbs, which had been
hitherto issued. The growth of the sorrel was from this time so
quick, and the quantity of it so great on every part of the ground
about the harbour, that we shortly after sent the men out every
afternoon for an hour or two; in which time, besides the advantage
of a healthy walk, they could, without difficulty, pick nearly a
pound each of this valuable antiscorbutic, of which they were all
extremely fond. Of the good effects produced upon our health by
the unlimited use of fresh vegetable substances, thus bountifully
supplied by the hand of Nature, even where least to be expected,
little doubt can be entertained, as it is well known to be a
never-failing specific for scorbutic affections, to which all
persons deprived of it for a length of time are probably more or
less predisposed.

By the 20th of June, the land in the immediate neighbourhood of
the ships, and especially in low and sheltered situations, was
much covered with the handsome purple flower of the _saxifraga
oppositifolia_, which was at this time in great perfection, and
gave something like cheerfulness and animation to a scene hitherto
indescribably dreary in its appearance.

The suddenness with which the changes take place during the short
season which may be called summer in this climate, must appear
very striking when it is remembered that, for a part of the first
week in June, we were under the necessity of thawing artificially
the snow which we made use of for water during the early part of
our journey to the northward; that, during the second week, the
ground was in most parts so wet and swampy that we could with
difficulty travel; and that, had we not returned before the end of
the third week, we should probably have been prevented doing so
for some time, by the impossibility of crossing the ravines
without great danger of being carried away by the torrents, an
accident that happened to our hunting parties on one or two
occasions in endeavouring to return with their game to the ships.

On the 22d, at four P.M., a thermometer, in the shade on board the
Hecla, stood at 51°, being the highest temperature we had yet
registered this season.

On the 24th we had frequent showers of snow, which occur in this
climate more or less at all times of the year; at this season,
however, when the earth is warm, it seldom or never lies on the
ground for a whole day together.

Lieutenant Beechey, on his return from a hunting excursion at
midnight on the 26th, reported that the ice along shore in that
direction appeared in a more forward state of dissolution than
near Winter Harbour, there being almost water enough in some
places to allow a boat to pass, with several large cracks in the
ice extending from the land some distance to seaward. The deep had
now become much more wild near the tents, and it was therefore
necessary to shift the ground a little. Lieutenant Beechey
succeeded in killing one of these animals, by lying down quietly,
and imitating the voice of a fawn, when the deer immediately came
up to him within gunshot. The horns of the deer killed at this
season, as Mr. Fisher remarks, were "covered with a soft skin
having a downy pile or hair upon it; the horns themselves were
soft, and at the tips flexible and easily broken." The foxes, of
which they saw several, "had a black spot or patch on each side of
the hind-quarters or hams."

On the 29th, one of the men, in returning on board from the daily
occupation of gathering sorrel, found in a hole upon the ice a
small fish, which appeared to be of the whiting species; and, on
going to examine the place where it was picked up, Mr. Edwards and
myself found two others exactly similar. As there was as yet no
communication between the sea and the upper surface of the ice
sufficiently large to admit these fish, it became a matter of
question in what manner they had got into the situation in which
we found them. It appeared most likely that they were frozen on
the surface of the water at the beginning of winter, when the
frost first commenced, and perhaps, therefore, had been floating
there dead. We remarked that, whenever any hard substance is laid
upon the ice in small quantities, it soon makes a deep hole for
itself, by the heat it absorbs and radiates, by which the ice
around it is melted. There were at this time upon the ice
innumerable holes of this kind, some forming small, and others
large pools of water; and in every one of these, without
exception, some extraneous substance, such as seaweed, sand, and
not unfrequently a number of small putrid shrimps were found. In
one of these holes the fish alluded to were found. It was curious
to see how directly contrary was the effect produced upon the ice
by a quantity of straw which was put out upon it in the early part
of May, and which, by preventing the access of warmth, had now
become raised above the general surface more than two feet;
affording a strong practical example of the principle on which
straw is made use of in ice-houses, and, what was at that time of
more importance to us, a proof, how much the upper surface of the
ice had been insensibly wasted by dissolution.

Lieutenant Hoppner returned on the evening of the 29th from his
hunting excursion to the southwest, bringing with him some game,
and, what was to us much more acceptable, the welcome information
that the ice had been observed in motion in the offing on the 22d.
This circumstance was first observed by Messrs. Skene and Fife,
who were of Lieutenant Hoppner's party, and who were awakened by a
loud grinding noise, which, as they had soon the satisfaction to
find, was occasioned by the heavy field-ice setting rapidly to the
eastward, at the distance of five miles from the land, and
apparently at the rate of a mile an hour. The wind was at this
time moderate, but on the preceding day it had blown a fresh
northerly gale.

For some days past Scott had been gradually growing worse, and on
the evening of the 29th he was so far exhausted that Mr. Edwards
did not expect him to survive through the night. At two A.M. on
the 30th I was informed by that gentleman that Scott was dying;
and, before I could get my clothes on, he had breathed his last,
without any apparent pain.

On Sunday, the 2d of July, after divine service had been
performed, the body of the deceased was committed to the earth, on
a level piece of ground about a hundred yards from the beach; with
every solemnity which the occasion demanded, and the circumstances
of our situation would permit. The ensigns and pendants were
lowered half-mast during the procession, and the remains of our
unfortunate shipmate were attended to the grave by every officer
and man in both ships. A neat tombstone was afterward placed at
the head of the grave by Mr. Fisher, who carved upon it the name
of the deceased, with the other usual information.

The dissolution of the ice of the harbour went on so rapidly in
the early part of July, that we were greatly surprised, on the
6th, in finding that, in several of the pools of water on its
upper surface, holes were washed quite through to the sea beneath.
On examining several of these, we found that the average thickness
of the ice in the upper part of the harbour, where the ships were
lying, did not exceed two feet, which was much less than we had
any idea of. Towards the mouth of the harbour, however, where the
water was deeper, no such holes made their appearance for some
days after this. It must here be remarked, that in all cases we
found the ice to be first thawed and broken up in the shoalest
water, in consequence, I suppose, of the greater facility with
which the ground, at a small depth below the surface of the sea,
absorbed and radiated the heat of the sun's rays; and as it is in
such situations that water generally freezes the first, this
circumstance seems a remarkable instance of the provision of
nature for maintaining such a balance in the quantity of ice
annually formed and dissolved, as shall prevent any undue or
extraordinary accumulation of it in any part of the Polar regions
of the earth.

On unhanging the rudders, and hauling them up on the ice for
examination, we found them a good deal shaken and grazed by the
blows they had received during the time the ships were beset at
the entrance of Davis's Strait. We found, also, that the
rudder-cases in both ships had been fitted too small, occasioning
considerable difficulty in getting the rudders down when working,
a circumstance by no means disadvantageous (perhaps, indeed,
rather the contrary) on ordinary service at sea, but which should
be carefully avoided in ships intended for the navigation among
ice, as it is frequently necessary to unship the rudder at a short
notice, in order to preserve it from injury, as our future
experience was soon to teach us. This fault was, however, soon
remedied, and the rudders again hung in readiness for sea.

On the 14th a boat passed, for the first time, between the ships
and the shore, in consequence of the junction of a number of the
pools and holes in the ice; and on the following day the same kind
of communication was practicable between the ships. It now became
necessary, therefore, to provide against the possibility of the
ships being forced on shore by the total disruption of the ice
between them and the beach, and the pressure of that without, by
letting go a bower-anchor underfoot, which was accordingly done as
soon as there was a hole in the ice under the bows of each
sufficiently large to allow the anchors to pass through. We had
now been quite ready for sea for some days; and a regular and
anxious look-out was kept from the crow's-nest for any alteration
in the state of the ice which might favour our departure from
Winter Harbour, in which it now became more than probable that we
were destined to be detained thus inactively for a part of each
month in the whole year, as we had readied it in the latter part
of September, and were likely to be prevented leaving it till
after the commencement of August.

From six A.M. till six P.M. on the 17th, the thermometer stood
generally from 55° to 60°; the latter temperature being the
highest which appears in the Hecla's Meteorological Journal during
this summer. It will readily be conceived how pleasant such a
temperature must have been to our feelings after the severe winter
which immediately preceded it. The month of July is, indeed, the
only one which can be called at all comfortable in the climate of
Melville Island.

On the 20th, there being a strong breeze from the N.N.E., with fog
and rain, all favourable to the dispersion of the ice, that part
of it which was immediately around the Hecla, and from which she
had been artificially detached so long before, at length separated
into pieces and floated away, carrying with it the collection of
ashes and other rubbish which had been accumulating for the last
ten months: so that the ship was now once more fairly riding at
anchor, but with the ice still occupying the whole of the centre
of the harbour, and within a few yards of her bows: the Griper had
been set free in a similar manner a few days before. But it was
only in that part of the harbour where the ships were lying that
the ice had yet separated in this manner at so great a distance
from the shore; a circumstance probably occasioned by the greater
radiation of heat from the ships, and from the materials of
various kinds which we had occasion to deposite upon the ice
during the time of our equipment.

Lieutenant Liddon accompanied me in a boat down the west shore of
the harbour to the southern point of the entrance, in order to
sound along the edge of the ice, where we found from seven to
fifteen feet water; the ice about the entrance appeared still very
solid and compact, and not a single hole was at this time noticed
through any of the pools upon its surface except one, which was
made by a seal, and which discovered the thickness of the ice to
be there between two and three feet.

There was a fresh breeze from the northeastward, with fine clear
weather, on the 22d, which made the Hecla swing round into twenty
feet water astern; and the ice, being now moveable in the harbour,
came home towards the shore with this wind, but not so much as to
put any considerable strain on the cable of either ship; and the
holding-ground being excellent, there was nothing to apprehend for
their security.

A fresh gale, which blew from the northward on the morning of the
23d, caused a great alteration in the appearance of the ice near
the ships, but none whatever in that in the offing or at the mouth
of the harbour, except that the shores were there more encumbered
than before, owing to the quantity of pieces which were separated
and driven down from the northward, so that our small boat could
not succeed in getting along the shore.

On the 24th the sails were bent, in readiness for starting at a
moment's notice, though it must be confessed that the motive for
doing so was to make some show of moving rather than any
expectation which I dared to entertain of soon escaping from our
long and tedious confinement; for it was impossible to conceal
from the men the painful fact that, in eight or nine weeks from
this period, the navigable season must unavoidably come to a
conclusion.

I went away in a boat early on the morning of the 25th, in order
to sound the harbour in those parts where the ice would admit the
boat, with a view to take advantage of the first favourable change
which might present itself. The wind having come round to the
southward in the afternoon, caused the separation of a large
portion of ice on the northern side of that which now occupied the
harbour, and the detached pieces drifting down towards us,
rendered it necessary to be on our guard, lest the ships should be
forced from their anchorage. On this account, as well as from an
anxious and impatient desire to make a move, however trifling,
from a spot in which we had now unwillingly, but unavoidably,
passed nearly ten months, and of which we had long been heartily
tired, I directed lines to be run out for the purpose of warping
the ships along the ice in the centre of the harbour, and at half
past two P.M. the anchors were weighed. As soon as a strain was
put upon the lines, however, we found that the ice to which they
were attached came home upon us, instead of the ships being drawn
out to the southward; and we were therefore obliged to have
recourse to the kedge-anchors, which we could scarcely find room
to drop on account of the closeness of the ice. Having warped a
little way out from the shore, into five fathoms and a half, it
was found impossible to proceed any farther without a change of
wind, and the anchors were therefore dropped till such a change
should take place. In the course of the evening all the loose ice
drifted past us to the northward, loading that shore of the
harbour with innumerable fragments of it, and leaving a
considerable space of clear water along shore to the southward.

On the morning of the 26th it was nearly calm, with continued rain
and thick weather; and there being now a space of clear water for
nearly three quarters of a mile to the southward of us, we took
advantage of a breeze which sprung up from the northward to weigh,
at nine A.M., and run down as far as the ice would permit, and
then dropped our anchors in the best berths we could select, close
to the edge of it, with the intention of advancing step by step,
as it continued to separate by piecemeal. The ice across the
entrance of the harbour as far as this spot, and the whole of that
in the offing, of which we had here a commanding view from the
Hecla's crow's-nest, was still quite continuous and unbroken, with
the same appearance of solidity as it had during the middle of
winter, except that the pools of water were numerous upon its
surface.

The wind being from the S.S.W. during the night of the 30th,
served to close the lane of water which had appeared in the offing
the preceding day, which we considered a favourable circumstance,
as showing that the external mass of ice was in motion. In the
course of the day, the wind shifting to the W.N.W., we once more
discovered a small opening between the old and young floes, and at
eleven P.M., the whole body of the ice in the harbour was
perceived to be moving slowly out to the southeastward, breaking
away, for the first time, at the points which form the entrance of
the harbour. This sudden and unexpected change rendering it
probable that we should at length be released, I sent to Captain
Sabine, who had been desirous of continuing his observations on
the pendulum to the last moment, to request that he would have the
clocks ready for embarcation at an early hour in the morning.




CHAPTER X.

Leave Winter Harbour.--Flattering Appearance of the Sea to the
Westward.--Stopped by the Ice near Cape Hay.--Farther Progress to
the Longitude of 113° 48' 22.5", being the Westernmost Meridian
hitherto reached in the Polar Sea, to the North of
America.--Banks's Land discovered.--Increased Extent and
Dimensions of the Ice.--Return to the Eastward, to endeavour to
penetrate the Ice to the Southward.--Re-enter Barrow's Strait, and
Survey its South Coast.--Pass through Sir James Lancaster's Sound
on our Return to England.


The wind still blowing fresh from the northward and westward, the
ice continued to drift out slowly from the harbour, till, at eight
A.M., August 1st, it had left the whole space between the ships
and Cape Hearne completely clear, and at eleven o'clock there
appeared to be water round the hummocks of ice which lie aground
off that point. In the mean time, our boats were employed in
embarking the clocks, tents, and observatory, while I sounded the
entrance of the harbour in order to complete the survey, which no
opportunity had offered of doing before this time. At one P.M.,
having got everything on board, and the ice appearing to be still
leaving the shore, we weighed, and ran out of Winter Harbour, in
which we had actually, as had been predicted, passed ten whole
months, and a part of the two remaining ones, September and
August.

In running along shore towards Cape Hearne, generally at the
distance of half a mile from the land, we had from ten to sixteen
fathoms' water, and rounded the hummocks off the point in six and
a half fathoms by three P.M. As we opened the point, it was
pleasing to see that the coast to the westward of it was more
clear of ice (excepting the loose pieces which lay scattered about
in every direction, but which would not very materially have
impeded the navigation with a fair wind) than it had been when we
first arrived off it, a month later in the foregoing year; the
main ice having been blown off by the late westerly and
northwesterly winds to the distance of four or five miles from the
shore, which, from all we have seen on this part of the coast,
appears to be its utmost limit. The navigable channel, with a
beating wind between the ice and the land, was here from one to
two, or two miles and a half in width; and this seemed, from the
masthead, to continue as far as the eye could reach along shore to
the westward.

We found the wind much more westerly after we rounded the point,
which made our progress slow and tedious; the more so, as we had
every minute to luff for one piece of ice and to bear up for
another, by which much ground was unavoidably lost.

After a very few tacks, we had the mortification to perceive
that the Griper sailed and worked much worse than before,
notwithstanding every endeavour which Lieutenant Liddon had been
anxiously making, during her re-equipment, to improve those
qualities in which she had been found deficient. She missed stays
several times in the course of the evening, with smooth water
and a fine working breeze, and by midnight the Hecla had gained
eight miles to windward of her, which obliged me to heave to,
notwithstanding the increased width of the navigable channel, the
weather having become hazy, so as to endanger our parting company.

Soon after noon on the 2d, a breeze sprung up from the S.S.W.,
which, being rather upon the shore, made it likely that the ice
would soon begin to close it; we therefore began to look out for a
situation where the ships might be secured in-shore, behind some
of the heavy grounded ice which had so often before afforded us
shelter under similar circumstances. At one o'clock we perceived
that a heavy floe had already closed completely in with the land,
at a point a little to the westward of us, preventing all hope of
farther progress for the present in that direction. A boat was
therefore sent to examine the ice in-shore, and a favourable place
having been found for our purpose, the ships were hauled in and
secured there, the Griper's bow resting on the beach, in order to
allow the Hecla to lie in security without her. This place was so
completely sheltered from the access of the main body of the ice,
that I began to think seriously of taking advantage of this
situation to remove the Griper's crew on board the Hecla, in order
to prosecute the voyage in the latter vessel singly, and had
consulted the officers upon the subject. The circumstances,
however, which subsequently occurred rendering such a measure
inexpedient, because no longer necessary to the accomplishment of
the object in view, by which alone it could be justified, I was
induced to give it up, adopting the best means in our power to
remedy the evil in question.

Shortly after our anchoring the Griper's people heard the growling
of a bear among the ice near them, but the animal did not appear;
and this was the only instance of our meeting with a bear during
our stay at Melville Island, except that which followed one of our
men to the ships soon after our arrival in Winter Harbour. Both
crews were sent on shore to pick sorrel, which was here not less
abundant than at our old quarters, but it was now almost too old
to be palatable, having nearly lost its acidity and juice.

At one A.M. on the 4th, the loose ice was observed to be drifting
in upon us, the wind having veered to the eastward of north; and
soon after a floe, of not less than five miles in length and a
mile and a half across, was found to be approaching the shore at a
quick rate. The ships were immediately hauled as near the shore as
possible, and preparation made for unshipping the rudders, if
necessary. The floe was brought up, however, by the masses of ice
aground outside of us, with which it successively came in contact,
and the ships remained in perfect security; the floe, as usual
after the first violence is over, moved off again to a little
distance from the shore.

At noon the heavy floe at the point near us began to quit the
land, and at half past one P.M., there being a narrow passage
between them, the breadth of which the breeze was constantly
increasing, we cast off and stretched to the westward. The channel
which opened to us as we proceeded varied in its general breadth
from one to two miles; in some places it was not more than half a
mile. The wind was variable and squally, but we made great
progress, along the land to the S.W.b.W., and the Griper, by
keeping up tolerably with the Hecla, in some measure redeemed her
character with us. Having arrived off Cape Providence at eleven
P.M., the wind became light and baffling, so that we had just got
far enough to see that there was a free and open channel beyond
the westernmost point visible of Melville Island, when our
progress was almost entirely stopped for want of a breeze to
enable us to take advantage of it. The anxiety which such a
detention occasions in a sea where, without any apparent cause,
the ice frequently closes the shore in the most sudden manner, can
perhaps only be conceived by those who have experienced it. We
remarked, in sailing near the ice this evening, while the wind was
blowing a fresh breeze off the land, and therefore directly
towards the ice, that it remained constantly calm within three or
four hundred yards of the latter; this effect I do not remember to
have observed before upon the windward side of any collection of
ice, though it invariably happens, in a remarkable degree, to
leeward of it. I may here mention, as a striking proof of the
accuracy with which astronomical bearings of objects may be taken
for marine surveys, that the relative bearing of Capes Providence
and Hay, as obtained this evening when the two headlands were
opening, differed only one minute from that entered in the
surveying-book, and found in the same manner the preceding year.

At one P.M. on the 5th, the weather continuing quite calm, and
being desirous of examining the ice in-shore, that we might be
ready for the floes closing upon us, I left the ship, accompanied
by Captain Sabine and Mr. Edwards, and landed near one of the
numerous deep and broad ravines with which the whole of this part
of the island is indented. We were ascending the hill, which was
found by trigonometrical measurement to be eight hundred and
forty-seven feet above the level of the sea, and on which we found
no mineral production but sandstone and clay iron-stone, when a
breeze sprung up from the eastward, bringing up the Griper, which
had been left several miles astern. We only stopped, therefore, to
obtain observations for the longitude and the variation of the
magnetic needle; the former of which was 112° 53' 32", and the
latter 110° 56' 11" easterly, and then immediately returned on
board and made all sail to the westward. After running for two
hours without obstruction, we were once more mortified in
perceiving that the ice, in very extensive and unusually heavy
floes, closed in with the land a little to the westward of Cape
Hay, and our channel of clear water between the ice and the land
gradually diminished in breadth, till at length it became
necessary to take in the studding sails, and to haul to the wind
to look about us. I immediately left the ship, and went in a boat
to examine the grounded ice off a small point of land, such as
always occurs on this coast at the outlet of each ravine. I found
that this point offered the only possible shelter which could be
obtained in case of the ice coming in; and I therefore determined
to take the Hecla in-shore immediately, and to pick out the best
berth which circumstances would admit. As I was returning on board
with this intention, I found that the ice was already rapidly
approaching the shore; no time was to be lost, therefore, in
getting the Hecla to her intended station, which was effected by
half past eight P.M., being in nine to seven fathoms water, at the
distance of twenty yards from the beach, which was lined all round
the point with very heavy masses of ice that had been forced by
some tremendous pressure into the ground. Our situation was a
dangerous one, having no shelter from ice coming from the
westward, the whole of which, being distant from us less than half
a mile, was composed of floes infinitely more heavy than any we
had elsewhere met with during the voyage. The Griper was three or
four miles astern of us at the time when the ice began to close,
and I therefore directed Lieutenant Liddon, by signal, to secure
his ship in the best manner he could, without attempting to join
the Hecla; he accordingly made her fast at eleven P.M., near a
point like that at which we were lying, and two or three miles to
the eastward.

On the whole of this steep coast, wherever we approached the
shore, we found a thick stratum of blue and solid ice, firmly
imbedded in the beach, at the depth of from six to ten feet under
the surface of the water. This ice has probably been the lower
part of heavy masses forced aground by the pressure of the floes
from without, and still adhering to the viscous mud of which the
beach is composed, after the upper part has, in course of time,
dissolved. From the tops of the hills in this part of Melville
Island a continuous line of this submarine ice could be distinctly
traced for miles along the coast.

In running along the shore this evening we had noticed near the
sea what at a distance had every appearance of a high wall
artificially built, which was the resort of numerous birds.
Captain Sabine being desirous to examine it, as well as to procure
some specimens of the birds, set out, as soon as we anchored, for
that purpose. The wall proved to be composed of sandstone in
horizontal strata, from twenty to thirty feet in height, which had
been left standing, so as to exhibit its present artificial
appearance, by the decomposition of the rock and earth about it.
Large flocks of glaucous gulls had chosen this as a secure retreat
from the foxes, and every other enemy but man; and when our people
first went into the ravine in which it stands, they were so fierce
in defence of their young that it was scarcely safe to approach
them till a few shots had been fired.

On the morning of the 7th a black whale came up close to the
Hecla, being the first we had seen since the 22d of August the
preceding year, about the longitude of 91¾° W.; it therefore
acquired among us the distinctive appellation of _the_ whale.
Since leaving Winter Harbour we had also, on two or three
occasions, seen a solitary seal. The wind continued fresh from the
east and E.N.E. in the morning, and the loose ice came close in
upon us, but the main body remained stationary at the distance of
nearly half a mile.

In the afternoon a man from each mess was sent on shore to pick
sorrel, which was here remarkably fine and large, as well as more
acid than any we had lately met with. The shelter from the
northerly winds afforded by the high land on this part of the
coast, together with its southern aspect, renders the vegetation
here immediately next the sea much more luxuriant than in most
parts of Melville Island which we visited, and a considerable
addition was made to our collection of plants.

The easterly breeze died away in the course of the day, and at
three P.M. was succeeded by a light air from the opposite quarter;
and as this freshened up a little, the loose ice began to drift
into our bight, and that on the eastern side of the point to drive
off. It became expedient, therefore, immediately to shift the ship
round the point, where she was made fast in four fathoms abaft and
seventeen feet forward, close alongside the usual ledge of
submarine ice, which touched her about seven feet under water, and
which, having few of the heavy masses aground upon it, would
probably have allowed her to be pushed over it had a heavy
pressure occurred from without. It was the more necessary to moor
the ship in some such situation, as we found from six to seven
fathoms water by dropping the hand-lead down close to her bow and
quarter on the outer side.

Several heavy pieces of floes drove close past us, not less than
ten or fifteen feet in thickness, but they were fortunately
stopped by a point of land without coming in upon us. At eleven
o'clock, however, a mass of this kind, being about half an acre in
extent, drove in, and gave the ship a considerable "nip" between
it and the land ice, and then grazed past her to the westward. I
now directed the rudder to be unhung, and the ship to be swung
with her head to the eastward, so that the bow, being the
strongest part, might receive the first and heaviest pressure.

The ice did not disturb us again till five A.M. on the 8th, when
another floe-piece came in and gave the ship a heavy rub, and then
went past, after which it continued slack about us for several
hours. Everything was so quiet at nine o'clock as to induce me to
venture up the hill abreast of us, in order to have a view of the
newly-discovered land to the southwest, which, indeed, I had seen
indistinctly and much refracted from the Hecla's deck in the
morning. This land, which extends beyond the 117th degree of west
longitude, and is the most western yet discovered in the Polar Sea
to the northward of the American Continent, was honoured with the
name of BANKS'S LAND, out of respect to the late venerable and
worthy president of the Royal Society.

On the morning of the 9th a musk-ox came down to graze on the
beach near the ships. A party was despatched in pursuit, and,
having hemmed him in under the hill, which was too steep for him
to ascend, succeeded in killing him. When first brought on board,
the inside of this animal, which was a male, smelled very strong
of musk, of which the whole of the meat also tasted more or less,
and especially the heart. It furnished us with four hundred and
twenty-one pounds of beef, which was served to the crews as usual,
in lieu of their salt provisions, and was very much relished by
us, notwithstanding the peculiarity of its flavour.[*] The meat
was remarkably fat, and, as it hung up in quarters, looked as fine
as any beef in an English market. A small seal, killed by the
Griper's people, was also eaten by them; and it was generally
allowed to be very tender and palatable, though not very sightly
in its appearance, being of a disagreeable red colour.

[Footnote: Some pieces of this meat which we brought to England
were found to have acquired a much more disagreeable flavour than
when first killed, though they had not undergone putrefaction in
the slightest degree.]

At ten P.M. the whole body of ice, which was then a quarter of a
mile from us, was found to be drifting in upon the land, and the
ship was warped back a little way to the westward, towards that
part of the shore which was most favourable for allowing her to be
forced up on the beach. At eleven o'clock, the piece of a floe
which came near us in the afternoon, and which had since drifted
back a few hundred yards to the eastward, received the pressure of
the whole body of ice as it came in. It split across in various
directions with a considerable crash, and presently after we saw a
part, several hundred tons in weight, raised slowly and
majestically, as if by the application of a screw, and deposited
on another part of the floe from which it had broken, presenting
towards us the surface that had split, which was of a fine blue
colour, and very solid and transparent. The violence with which
the ice was coming in being thus broken, it remained quiet during
the night, which was calm, with a heavy fall of snow.

The mass of ice which had been lifted up the preceding day being
drifted close to us on the morning of the 10th, I sent Lieutenant
Beechey to measure its thickness, which proved to be forty-two
feet; and as it was a piece of a regular floe, this measurement
may serve to give some idea of the general thickness of the ice in
this neighbourhood.

I began to consider whether it would not be advisable, whenever
the ice would allow us to move, to sacrifice a few miles of the
westing we had already made, and to run along the margin of the
floes, in order to endeavour to find an opening leading to the
southward, by taking advantage of which we might be enabled to
prosecute the voyage to the westward in a lower latitude. I was
the more inclined to make this attempt, from its having long
become evident to us that the navigation of this part of the Polar
Sea is only to be performed by watching the occasional openings
between the ice and the shore; and that, therefore, a continuity
of land is essential, if not absolutely necessary, for this
purpose. Such a continuity of land, which was here about to fail
us, must necessarily be furnished by the northern coast of
America, in whatsoever latitude it may be found; and, as a large
portion of our short season had already been occupied in fruitless
attempts to penetrate farther to the westward in our present
parallel, under circumstances of more than ordinary risk to the
ships, I determined, whenever the ice should open sufficiently, to
put into execution the plan I had proposed.

At seven P.M. we shipped the rudder and crossed the top-gallant
yards in readiness for moving; and then I ascended the hill and
walked a mile to the westward, along the brow of it, that not a
moment might be lost after the ice to the westward should give us
the slightest hope of making any progress by getting under way.
Although the holes had certainly increased in size and extent,
there was still not sufficient room even for one of our boats to
work to windward; and the impossibility of the ships' doing so was
rendered more apparent, on account of the current which, as I have
before had occasion to remark, is always produced in these seas
soon after the springing up of a breeze, and which was now running
to the eastward at the rate of at least one mile per hour. It was
evident that any attempt to get the ships to the westward must,
under circumstances so unfavourable, be attended with the certain
consequence of their being drifted the contrary way; and nothing
could therefore be done but still to watch, which we did most
anxiously, every alteration in the state of the ice. The wind,
however, decreasing as the night came on, served to diminish the
hopes with which we had flattered ourselves of being speedily
extricated from our present confined and dangerous situation.

The weather was foggy for some hours in the morning of the 11th,
but cleared up in the afternoon as the sun acquired power. The
wind increased to a fresh gale from the eastward at nine P.M.,
being the second time that it had done so while we had been lying
at this station; a circumstance which we were the more inclined to
notice, as the easterly winds had hitherto been more faint and
less frequent than those from the westward. In this respect,
therefore, we considered ourselves unfortunate, as experience had
already shown us that none but a westerly wind ever produced upon
this coast, or, indeed, on the southern coast of any of the North
Georgian Islands, the desired effect of clearing the shores of
ice.

The gale continued strong during the night, and the ice quite
stationary. Not a pool of clear water could be seen in any
direction, except just under the lee of our point, where there was
a space large enough to contain half a dozen sail of ships, till
about noon, when the whole closed in upon us without any apparent
cause, except that the wind blew in irregular puffs about that
time, and at one P.M. it was alongside. The ship was placed in the
most advantageous manner for taking the beach, or, rather, the
shelf of submarine ice, and the rudder again unshipped and hung
across the stem. The ice which came in contact with the ship's
side consisted of very heavy loose pieces, drawing twelve or
fourteen feet water, which, however, we considered as good
"fenders," compared with the enormous fields which covered the sea
just without them. Everything remained quiet for the rest of the
day, without producing any pressure of consequence; the wind came
round to N.b.E. at night, but without moving the ice off the land.

Early in the morning of the 13th I received by Mr. Griffiths a
message from Lieutenant Liddon, acquainting me that, at eleven
o'clock on the preceding night, the ice had been setting slowly to
the westward, and had, at the same time, closed in upon the land
where the Griper was lying, by which means she was forced against
the submarine ice, and her stern lifted two feet out of the water.
This pressure, Lieutenant Liddon remarked, had given her a twist,
which made her crack a good deal, but apparently without suffering
any material injury in her hull, though the ice was still pressing
upon her when Mr. Griffiths came away. She had at first heeled
inward, but, on being lifted higher, fell over towards the deep
water. Under these circumstances Lieutenant Liddon had very
properly landed all the journals and other documents of
importance, and made every arrangement in his power for saving the
provisions and stores in case of shipwreck, which he had now every
reason to anticipate. Convinced as I was that no human art or
power could, in our present situation, prevent such a catastrophe
whenever the pressure of the ice became sufficient, I was more
than ever satisfied with the determination to which I had
previously come, of keeping the ships apart during the continuance
of these untoward circumstances, in order to increase the chance
of saving one of them from accidents of this nature. In the mean
time the ice remained so close about the Hecla, that the slightest
pressure producing in it a motion towards the shore must have
placed us in a situation similar to that of the Griper; and our
attention was therefore diverted to the more important object of
providing, by every means in our power, for the security of the
larger ship, as being the principal depôt of provisions and other
resources.

At five P.M. Lieutenant Liddon acquainted me by letter that the
Griper had at length righted, the ice having slackened a little
around her, and that all the damage she appeared to have sustained
was in her rudder, which was badly split, and would require some
hours' labour to repair it whenever the ice should allow him to
get it on shore.

Soon after midnight the ice pressed closer in upon the Hecla than
before, giving her a heel of eighteen inches towards the shore,
but without appearing to strain her in the slightest degree. By
four P.M. the pressure had gradually decreased, and the ship had
only three or four inches heel; in an hour after she had perfectly
righted, and the ice remained quiet for the rest of the day.

Every moment's additional detention now served to confirm me in
the opinion I had formed as to the expediency of trying, at all
risks, to penetrate to the southward whenever the ice would allow
us to move at all, rather than persevere any longer in the
attempts we had been lately making, with so little success, to
push on directly to the westward. I therefore gave Lieutenant
Liddon an order to run back a certain distance to the eastward
whenever he could do so, without waiting for the Hecla, should
that ship be still detained; and to look out for any opening in
the ice to the southward which might seem likely to favour the
object I had in view, waiting for me to join him should any such
opening occur.

The breeze died away in the course of the night, just as the ice
was beginning to separate and to drift away from the shore; and,
being succeeded by a wind off the land, which is here very
unusual, Lieutenant Liddon was enabled to sail upon the Griper at
two A.M. on the 15th, in execution of the orders I had given him.
As I soon perceived, however, that she made little or no way, the
wind drawing more to the eastward on that part of the coast, and
as the clear water was increasing along the shore to the westward
much farther than we had yet seen it, I made the signal of recall
to the Griper, with the intention of making another attempt, which
the present favourable appearances seemed to justify, to push
forward without delay in the desired direction. At five A.M.,
therefore, as soon as the snow had cleared away sufficiently to
allow the signal to be distinguished, we cast off and ran along
shore, the wind having by this time veered to the E.b.N., and
blowing in strong puffs out of the ravines as we passed them. We
sailed along, generally at the distance of a hundred or a hundred
and fifty yards from the beach, our soundings being from ten to
seventeen fathoms; and, after running a mile and a half in a
N.W.b.W. direction, once more found the ice offering an
impenetrable obstacle to our progress westward, at a small
projecting point of land just beyond us. We therefore hauled the
ship into a berth which we were at this moment fortunate in
finding abreast of us, and where we were enabled to place the
Hecla within a number of heavy masses of grounded ice, such as do
not often occur on this steep coast, which, compared with the
situation we had lately left, appeared a perfect harbour. In the
mean time, the wind had failed our consort when she was a mile and
a half short of this place; and Lieutenant Liddon, after
endeavouring in vain to warp up to us, was obliged, by the ice
suddenly closing upon him, to place her in-shore, in the first
situation he could find, which proved to be in very deep water, as
well as otherwise so insecure as not to admit a hope of saving the
ship should the ice continue to press upon her.

Mr. Fisher found very good sport in our new station, having
returned in the evening, after a few hours' excursion, with nine
hares; the birds had, of late, almost entirely deserted us, a
flock or two of ptarmigan and snow-buntings, a few glaucous gulls,
a raven, and an owl, being all that had been met with for several
days.

A fog, which had prevailed during the night, cleared away in the
morning of the 16th, and a very fine day succeeded, with a
moderate breeze from the westward. In order to have a clear and
distinct view of the state of the ice, after twenty-four hours'
wind from that quarter, Captain Sabine, Mr. Edwards, and myself,
walked about two miles to the westward, along the high part of the
land next the sea, from whence it appeared but too evident that no
passage in this direction was yet to be expected. The ice to the
west and southwest was as solid and compact, to all appearance, as
so much land; to which, indeed, the surface of so many fields,
from the kind of hill and dale I have before endeavoured to
describe, bore no imperfect resemblance. I have no doubt that, had
it been our object to circumnavigate Melville Island, or, on the
other hand, had the coast continued its westerly direction instead
of turning to the northward, we should still have contrived to
proceed a little occasionally, as opportunities offered,
notwithstanding the increased obstruction which here presented
itself; but, as neither of these was the case, there seemed little
or nothing to hope for from any farther attempts to prosecute the
main object of the voyage in this place. I determined, therefore,
no longer to delay the execution of my former intentions, and to
make trial, if possible, of a more southern latitude, in which I
might follow up the success that had hitherto attended our
exertions.

The station at which the ships were now lying, and which is the
westernmost point to which the navigation of the Polar Sea to the
northward of the American Continent has yet been carried, is in
latitude 74° 26' 25", and longitude, by chronometer, 113° 46'
43.5".

The place where the Hecla was now secured, being the only one of
the kind which could be found, was a little harbour, formed, as
usual, by the grounded ice, some of which was fixed to the bottom
in ten to twelve fathoms. One side of the entrance to this harbour
consisted of masses of floes, very regular in their shape, placed
quite horizontally, and broken off so exactly perpendicular as to
resemble a handsome, well-built wharf. On the opposite side,
however, the masses to which we looked for security were
themselves rather terrific objects, as they leaned over so much
towards the ship as to give the appearance of their being in the
act of falling upon her deck; and as a very trifling concussion
often produces the fall of much heavier masses of ice, when in
appearance very firmly fixed to the ground, I gave orders that no
guns should be fired near the ship during her continuance in this
situation. The Griper was of necessity made fast near the beach in
rather an exposed situation, and her rudder unshipped, in
readiness for the ice coming in; it remained quiet, however,
though quite close, during the day, the weather being calm and
fine.

It was again nearly calm on the 19th, and the weather was foggy for
some hours in the morning. In the evening, having walked to Cape
Providence to see if there was any possibility of moving the ships,
I found the ice so close that a boat could not have passed beyond
the Cape; but a light air drifting the ice slowly to the eastward
at this time, gave me some hopes of soon being enabled to make our
escape from this tedious as well as vexatious confinement. At a
quarter past eight it was high water by the shore; about this time
the ice ceased driving to the eastward, and shortly after returned
in the opposite direction.

At half past eleven P.M., some heavy pieces of the grounded ice,
to which our bow-hawser was secured, fell off into the water,
snapping the rope in two without injuring the ship. As, however,
every alteration of this kind must materially change the centre of
gravity of the whole mass, which already appeared in a tottering
state, I thought it prudent to move the Hecla out of her harbour
to the place where the Griper was lying, considering that a ship
might easily be forced on shore by the ice without suffering any
serious damage; but that one of those enormous masses falling upon
her deck must inevitably crush or sink her.

The "young ice" had increased to the thickness of an inch and a
half on the morning of the 23d, and some snow which had fallen in
the night served to cement the whole more firmly together. On a
breeze springing up from the westward, however, it soon began to
acquire a motion to leeward, and at half an hour before noon had
slackened about the ships sufficiently to allow us to warp them
out, which was accordingly done, and all sail made upon them. The
wind having freshened up from the W.N.W., the ships' heads were
got the right way, and, by great attention to the sails, kept so
till they had got abreast of Cape Providence, after which they
were no longer manageable, the ice being more close than before. I
have before remarked that the loose ice in this neighbourhood was
heavy in proportion to the floes from which it had been broken;
and the impossibility of sailing among such ice, most of which
drew more water than the Hecla, and could not, therefore, be
turned by her weight, was this day rendered very apparent, the
ships having received by far the heaviest shocks which they
experienced during the voyage. They continued, however, to drive
till they were about three miles to the eastward of Cape
Providence, where the low land commences; when, finding that there
was not any appearance of open water to the eastward or southward,
and that we were now incurring the risk of being beset at sea,
without a chance of making any farther progress, we hauled in for
the largest piece of grounded ice we could see upon the beach,
which we reached at six P.M., having performed six miles of the
most difficult navigation I have ever known among ice. The Hecla
was made fast in from eighteen to twenty feet water close to the
beach, and the Griper in four fathoms, about half a mile to the
westward of us.

The situation in which the ships were now placed, when viewed in
combination with the shortness of the remaining part of the
season, and the period to which our resources of every kind could
be extended, was such as to require a more than ordinary
consideration, in order to determine upon the measures most proper
to be pursued for the advancement of the public service, and the
security of the ships and people committed to my charge. Judging
from the close of the summer of 1819, it was reasonable to
consider the 7th of September as the limit beyond which the
navigation of this part of the Polar Sea could not be performed,
with tolerable safety to the ships or with any hope of farther
success. Impressed, however, with a strong sense of the efforts
which it became us to make in the prosecution of our enterprise, I
was induced to extend this limit to the 14th of September, before
which day, on the preceding year, the winter might fairly be said
to have set in. But even with this extension our prospect was not
very encouraging: the direct distance to Icy Cape was between
eight and nine hundred miles, while that which we had advanced
towards it this season fell short of sixty miles.

By Mr. Hooper's report of the remains of provisions, it appeared
that, at the present reduced allowance (namely, two thirds of the
established proportion of the navy), they would last until the
30th of November, 1821; and that an immediate reduction, to half
allowance, which must, however, tend materially to impair the
health and vigour of the officers and men, would only extend our
resources to the 30th of April, 1822; it therefore became a matter
of evident and imperious necessity, that the ships should be
cleared from the ice before the close of the season of 1821, so as
to reach some station where supplies might be obtained by the end
of that, or early in the following year.

By the same report, it appeared that the fuel with which we were
furnished could only be made to extend to a period of two years
and seven months, or to the end of November, 1821; and this only
by resorting to the unhealthy measure of both crews living on
board the Hecla during six of the ensuing winter months.

The ships might be considered almost as effective as when the
expedition left England; the wear and tear having been trifling,
and the quantity of stores remaining on board being amply
sufficient, in all probability, for a much longer period than the
provisions and fuel. The health of the officers and men continued
also as good, or nearly so, as at the commencement of the voyage.
Considering, however, the serious loss we had sustained in the
lemon-juice, the only effectual antiscorbutic on which we could
depend during at least nine months of the year in these regions,
as well as the effects likely to result from crowding nearly one
hundred persons into the accommodation intended only for
fifty-eight, whereby the difficulty of keeping the inhabited parts
of the ship in a dry and wholesome state would have been so much
increased, there certainly seemed some reason to apprehend that a
second winter would not leave us in possession of the same
excellent health which we now happily enjoyed, while it is
possible that the difficulty and danger of either proceeding or
returning might have been increased.

A herd of musk-oxen being seen at a little distance from the
ships, a party was despatched in pursuit; and Messrs. Fisher and
Bushnan were fortunate in killing a fine bull, which separated
from the rest of the herd, being too unwieldy to make such good
way as the others. He was, however, by no means caught by our
people in fair chase; for, though these animals run with a
hobbling sort of canter, that makes them appear as if every now
and then about to fall, yet the slowest of them can far outstrip a
man. In this herd were two calves, much whiter than the rest, the
older ones having only the white saddle. In the evening, Sergeant
Martin succeeded in killing another bull; these two animals
afforded a very welcome supply of fresh meat, the first giving us
three hundred and sixty-nine, and the other three hundred and
fifty-two pounds of beef, which was served in the same manner as
before.[*]

[Footnote: The total quantity of game obtained for the use of the
expedition during our stay upon the shores of Melville Island,
being a period of nearly twelve months, was as follows: 3 musk
oxen, 24 deer, 68 hares, 53 geese, 59 ducks, 144 ptarmigans:
affording 3766 pounds of meat.]

It was gratifying to me to find that the officers unanimously
agreed with me in opinion that any farther attempt to penetrate to
the westward in our present parallel would be altogether
fruitless, and attended with a considerable loss of time, which
might be more usefully employed. They also agreed with me in
thinking that the plan which I had adopted, of running back along
the edge of the ice to the eastward, in order to look out for an
opening that might lead us towards the American Continent, was in
every respect the most advisable; and that, in the event of
failing to find any such opening after a reasonable time spent in
search, it would be expedient to return to England rather than
risk the passing another winter in these seas, without the
prospect of attaining any adequate object; namely, that of being
able to start from an advanced station at the commencement of the
following season.

At three P.M. we were abreast of Cape Hearne; and, as we opened
the bay of the Hecla and Griper, the wind, as usual on this part
of the coast, came directly out from the northward; but, as soon
as we had stretched over to Bounty Cape, of which we were abreast
at eight P.M., it drew once more along the land from the westward.
The distance between the ice and the land increased as we
proceeded, and at midnight the channel appeared to be four or five
miles wide, as far as the darkness of the night would allow of our
judging; for we could at this period scarcely see to read in the
cabin at ten o'clock. The snow which fell during the day was
observed, for the first time, to remain upon the land without
dissolving; thus affording a proof of the temperature of the
earth's surface having again fallen below that of freezing, and
giving notice of the near approach of another long and dreary
winter.

At seven P.M., a fog coming on, we hauled up close to the edge of
the ice, both as a guide to us in sailing during the continuance
of the thick weather, and to avoid passing any opening that might
occur in it to the southward. We were, in the course of the
evening, within four or five miles of the same spot where we had
been on the same day and at the same hour the preceding year; and,
by a coincidence perhaps still more remarkable, we were here once
more reduced to the same necessity as before, of steering the
ships by one another for an hour or two; the Griper keeping the
Hecla ahead, and our quartermaster being directed to keep the
Griper right astern, for want of some better mode of knowing in
what direction we were running. The fog froze hard as it fell upon
the rigging, making it difficult to handle the ropes in working
the ship, and the night was rather dark for three or four hours.

At a quarter past three on the morning of the 30th, we bore up to
the eastward, the wind continuing fresh directly down Barrow's
Strait, except just after passing Prince Leopold's Islands, where
it drew into Prince Regent's Inlet, and, as soon as we had passed
this, again assumed its former westerly direction; affording a
remarkable instance of the manner in which the wind is acted upon
by the particular position of the land, even at a considerable
distance from it. The islands were encumbered with ice to the
distance of four or five miles all found them, but the Strait was
generally as clear and navigable as any part of the Atlantic.

Having now traced the ice the whole way from the longitude of 114°
to that of 90°, without discovering any opening to encourage a
hope of penetrating it to the southward, I could not entertain the
slightest doubt that there no longer remained a possibility of
effecting our object with the present resources of the expedition;
and that it was therefore my duty to return to England with the
account of our late proceedings, that no time might be lost in
following up the success with which we had been favoured, should
his majesty's government consider it expedient to do so. Having
informed the officers and men in both ships of my intentions, I
directed the full allowance of provisions to be in future issued,
with such a proportion of fuel as might contribute to their
comfort; a luxury which, on account of the necessity that existed
for the strictest economy in this article, it must be confessed,
we had not often enjoyed since we entered Sir James Lancaster's
Sound. We had been on two thirds allowance of bread between ten
and eleven months, and on the same reduced proportion of the other
species of provisions between three and four; and, although this
quantity is scarcely enough for working men for any length of
time, I believe the reduction of fuel was generally considered by
far the greater privation of the two.

As it appeared to me that considerable service might be rendered
by a general survey of the western coast of Baffin's Bay, which,
from Sir James Lancaster's Sound southward, might one day become
an important station for our whalers, I determined to keep as
close to that shore during our passage down as the ice and the
wind would permit; and as the experience of the former voyage had
led us to suppose that this coast would be almost clear of ice
during the whole of September, I thought that this month could not
be better employed than in the examination of its numerous bays
and inlets. Such an examination appeared to me more desirable,
from the hope of finding some new outlet into the Polar Sea in a
lower latitude than that of Sir James Lancaster's Sound; a
discovery which would be of infinite importance towards the
accomplishment of the Northwest Passage.




CHAPTER XI.

Progress down the Western Coast of Baffin's Bay.--Meet with the
Whalers.--Account of some Esquimaux in the Inlet called the River
Clyde.--Continue the Survey of the Coast till stopped by Ice in
the Latitude of 68¼°.--Obliged to run to the Eastward.--Fruitless
Attempts to regain the Land, and final Departure from the
Ice.--Remarks upon the probable Existence and Practicability of a
Northwest Passage, and upon the Whale Fishery.--Boisterous Weather
in Crossing the Atlantic.--Loss of the Hecla's Bowsprit and
Foremast.--Arrival in England.


The wind continuing fresh from the northward on the morning of the
1st of September, we bore up and ran along the land, taking our
departure from the flagstaff in Possession Bay, bearing W.S.W.
five miles, at half past four A.M.

The ice led us off very much to the eastward after leaving Pond's
Bay; and the weather became calm, with small snow towards
midnight. In this day's run, the compass-courses were occasionally
inserted in the logbook, being the first time that the magnetic
needle had been made use of on board the Hecla, for the purposes
of navigation, for more than twelve months.

On the morning of the 3d we passed some of the highest icebergs I
have ever seen, one of them being not less than one hundred and
fifty to two hundred feet above the sea, judging from the height
of the Griper's masts when near it.

The vegetation was tolerably luxuriant in some places upon the low
land which borders the sea, consisting principally of the
dwarf-willow, sorrel, saxifrage, and poppy, with a few roots of
scurvy-grass. There was still a great deal of snow remaining even
on the lower parts of the land, on which were numerous ponds of
water; on one of these, a pair of young red-throated divers, which
could not rise, were killed; and two flocks of geese, one of them
consisting of not less than sixty or seventy, were seen by Mr.
Hooper, who described them as being very tame, running along the
beach before our people, without rising, for a considerable
distance. Some glaucous gulls and plovers were killed, and we met
with several tracks of bears, deers, wolves, foxes, and mice. The
coxswain of the boat found upon the beach part of the bone of a
whale, which had been cut at one end by a sharp instrument like an
axe, with a quantity of chips lying about it, affording undoubted
proof of this part of the coast having been visited at no distant
period by Esquimaux; it is more than probable, indeed, that they
may inhabit the shores of this inlet, which time would not now
permit us to examine. More than sixty icebergs of very large
dimensions were in sight from the top of the hill, together with a
number of extensive floes to the northeast and southeast, at the
distance of four or five leagues from the land.

While occupied in attending to the soundings, soon after noon, our
astonishment may readily be conceived on seeing from the masthead
a ship, and soon after two others, in the offing, which were soon
ascertained to be whalers, standing in towards the land. They
afterward bore up to the northward along the edge of the ice which
intervened between us, and we lost sight of them at night. It was
now evident that this coast, which had hitherto been considered by
the whalers as wholly inaccessible in so high a latitude, had
become a fishing station, like that on the opposite or Greenland
shore; and the circumstance of our meeting so few whales in Sir
James Lancaster's Sound this season was at once accounted for by
supposing, what, indeed, we afterward found to be the case, that
the fishing-ships had been there before us, and had, for a time,
scared them from that ground.

It was so squally on the morning of the 5th that we could scarcely
carry our double-reefed topsails, while, as we afterward learned
from the fishing-ships, which were in sight at daylight, there was
scarcely a breath of wind at a few leagues' distance from the
land. We coasted this low shore, as we had done in the preceding
voyage, at the distance of two or three miles, having from
twenty-three to twenty-nine fathoms water. We here met with
another of our fishing-ships, which proved to be the Lee, of Hull,
Mr. Williamson, master; from whom we learned, among other events
of a public nature which were altogether new to us, the public
calamity which England had sustained in the death of our late
venerable and beloved sovereign, and also the death of his Royal
Highness the Duke of Kent. Mr. Williamson, among others, had
succeeded in getting across the ice to this coast as high as the
latitude of 73°, and had come down to this part in pursuit of the
fish. One or two of the ships had endeavoured to return home by
running down this coast, but had found the ice so close about the
latitude of 69½° as to induce most of the others to sail back to
the northward, in order to get back in the same way that they
came. Mr. Williamson also reported his having, a day or two
before, met with some Esquimaux in the inlet named the River Clyde
in 1818, which was just to the southward of us. Considering it a
matter of some interest to communicate with these people, who had,
probably, not been before visited by Europeans, and that it might,
at the same time, be useful to examine the inlet, I bore up, as
soon as I had sent our despatches and letters on board the Lee,
and stood in towards the rocky islet, called Agnes's Monument,
passing between it and the low point which forms the entrance to
the inlet on the northern side.

At six in the evening of the 6th, being near the outermost of the
islands with which we afterward found this inlet to be studded, we
observed four canoes paddling towards the ships; they approached
with great confidence, and came alongside without the least
appearance of fear or suspicion. While paddling towards us, and,
indeed, before we could plainly perceive their canoes, they
continued to vociferate loudly; but nothing like a song, nor even
any articulate sound, which can be expressed by words, could be
distinguished. Their canoes were taken on board by their own
desire, plainly intimated by signs, and with their assistance, and
they at once came up the side without hesitation. These people
consisted of an old man, apparently much above sixty, and three
younger, from nineteen to thirty years of age. As soon as they
came on deck, their vociferations seemed to increase with their
astonishment, and, I may add, their pleasure; for the reception
they met with seemed to create no less joy than surprise. Whenever
they received a present or were shown anything which excited fresh
admiration, they expressed their delight by loud and repeated
ejaculations, which they sometimes continued till they were quite
hoarse and out of breath with the exertion. This noisy mode of
expressing their satisfaction was accompanied by a jumping, which
continued for a minute or more, according to the degree of the
passion which excited it, and the bodily powers of the person who
exercised it; the old man being rather too infirm, but still doing
his utmost to go through the performance.

After some time passed on deck, during which a few skins and ivory
knives were bought from them, they were taken down into the cabin.
The younger ones received the proposal to descend somewhat
reluctantly, till they saw that their old companion was willing to
show them the example, and they then followed without fear.
Although we were much at a loss for an interpreter, we had no
great difficulty in making the old man understand, by showing him
an engraved portrait of an Esquimaux, that Lieutenant Beechey was
desirous of making a similar drawing of him. He was accordingly
placed on a stool near the fire, and sat for more than an hour
with very tolerable composure and steadiness, considering that a
barter for their clothes, spears, and whalebone was going on at
the same time near him. He was, indeed, kept quiet by the presents
which were given him from time to time; and when this failed, and
he became impatient to move, I endeavoured to remind him that we
wished him to keep his position, by placing my hands before me,
holding up my head and assuming a grave and demure look. We now
found that the old gentleman was a mimic, as well as a very
good-natured and obliging man; for, whenever I did this he always
imitated me in such a manner as to create considerable diversion
among his own people as well as ours, and then very quietly kept
his seat. While he was sitting for his picture, the other three
stood behind him, bartering their commodities with great honesty,
but in a manner which showed them to be no strangers to traffic.
If, for instance, a knife was offered for any article, they would
hesitate for a short time, till they saw we were determined to
give no higher price, and then at once consented to the exchange.
In this case, as well as when anything was presented to them, they
immediately licked it twice with their tongues, after which they
seemed to consider the bargain satisfactorily concluded. The
youngest of the party very modestly kept behind the others, and,
before he was observed to have done so, missed several presents,
which his less diffident, though not importunate companions had
received. As the night closed in they became desirous to depart,
and they left us before dark, highly delighted with their visit.
As I had purchased one of their canoes, a boat was sent to land
its late owner, as only one person can sit in each. Mr. Palmer
informed me, that, in going on shore, the canoes could beat our
boat very much in rowing whenever the Esquimaux chose to exert
themselves, but they kept close to her the whole way. During the
time that they were on board, we had observed in them a great
aptness for imitating certain of our words; and, while going on
shore, they took a particular liking to the expression of "Hurra,
give way!" which they heard Mr. Palmer use to the boat's crew, and
which they frequently imitated, to the great amusement of all
parties.

Soon after we had landed on the 7th, the old Esquimaux and one of
his younger companions paddled over from the main land, and joined
us upon the island. They brought with them, as before, some pieces
of whalebone and sealskin dresses, which were soon disposed of,
great care being taken by them not to produce more than one
article at a time; returning to their canoes, which were at a
little distance from our boat, after the purchase of each of their
commodities, till their little stock was exhausted. Considering it
desirable to keep up among them the ideas of fair and honest
exchange, which they already seemed to possess in no ordinary
degree, I did not permit them to receive anything as presents till
all their commodities had been regularly bought. While we were
waiting to obtain the sun's meridian altitude, they amused
themselves in the most good-natured and cheerful manner with the
boat's crew; and Lieutenant Hoppner, who, with Mr. Beverly, had
joined us in the Griper's boat, took this opportunity of making a
drawing of the young man. It required, however, some show of
authority, as well as some occasional rewards, to keep him quietly
seated on the rock for a time sufficient for this purpose; the
inclination they have to jump about, when much pleased, rendering
it a penalty of no trifling nature for them to sit still for half
an hour together. To show their disposition to do us what little
service was in their power, he afterward employed himself in
sharpening the seamen's knives, which he did with great expertness
on any flat smooth stone, returning each, as soon as finished, to
its proper owner, and then making signs for another, which he
sharpened and returned in the same way, without any attempt, and
apparently without the smallest desire, to detain it. The old man
was extremely inquisitive, and directed his attention to those
things which appeared useful rather than to those which were
merely amusing. An instance of this occurred on my ordering a tin
canister of preserved meat to be opened for the boats' crews'
dinner. The old man was sitting on the rock, attentively watching
the operation, which was performed with an axe struck by a mallet,
when one of the men came up to us with a looking-glass. I held it
up to each of the Esquimaux, who had also seen one on the
preceding evening, and then gave it into each of their hands
successively. The younger one was quite in raptures, and literally
jumped for joy for nearly a quarter of an hour: but the old man,
having had one smile at his own queer face, immediately resumed
his former gravity, and, returning me the glass, directed his
whole attention to the opening of the canister, and, when this was
effected, begged very hard for the mallet which had performed so
useful an office, without expressing the least wish to partake of
the meat, even when he saw us eating it with good appetites. Being
prevailed on, however, to taste a little of it, with some biscuit,
they did not seem at all to relish it, but ate a small quantity,
from an evident desire not to offend us, and then deposited the
rest safely in their canoes. They could not be persuaded to taste
any rum after once smelling it, even when much diluted with water.
I do not know whether it be a circumstance worthy of notice, that
when a kaleidoscope or a telescope was given them to look into,
they immediately shut one eye; and one of them used the right, and
the other the left eye.

In getting out of their canoes, as well as into them, great care
is required to preserve the balance of these frail and unsteady
coracles, and in this they generally assist each other. As we were
leaving the island, and they were about to follow us, we lay on
our oars to observe how they would manage this; and it was
gratifying to see that the young man launched the canoe of his
aged companion, and, having carefully steadied it alongside the
rock till he had safely embarked, carried his own down, and
contrived, though with some difficulty, to get into it without
assistance. They seem to take especial care, in launching their
canoes, not to rub them against the rocks, by placing one end
gently in the water, and holding the other up high, till it can be
deposited without risk of injury. As soon as we commenced rowing,
the Esquimaux began to vociferate their newly-acquired expression
of "Hurra, give way!" which they continued at intervals,
accompanied by the most good-humoured merriment, as we crossed
over to the main land. There being now a little sea, occasioned by
a weather tide, we found that our boats could easily beat their
canoes in rowing, notwithstanding their utmost endeavours to keep
up with us.

The two Esquimaux tents which we were now going to visit were
situated just within a low point of land, forming the eastern side
of the entrance to a considerable branch of the inlet, extending
some distance to the northward. The situation is warm and
pleasant, having a southwesterly aspect, and being in every
respect well adapted for the convenient residence of these poor
people. We landed outside the point, and walked over to the tents,
sending our boats, accompanied by the two canoes, round the point
to meet us. As soon as we came in sight of the tents, every living
animal there, men, women, children, and dogs, were in motion; the
latter to the top of the hill out of our way, and the rest to meet
as with loud and continued shouting; the word _pilletay_ (give me)
being the only articulate sound we could distinguish amid the
general uproar. Besides the four men whom we had already seen,
there were four women, one of whom, being about the same age as
the old man, was probably his wife; the others were about thirty,
twenty-two, and eighteen years of age. The first two of these,
whom we supposed to be married to the two oldest of the young men,
had infants slung in a kind of bag at their backs, much in the
same way as gipsies are accustomed to carry their children. There
were also seven children, from twelve to three years of age,
besides the two infants in arms, or, rather, behind their mothers'
backs; and the woman of thirty was with child.

We began, as before, by buying whatever they had to dispose of,
giving in exchange knives, axes, brass kettles, needles, and other
useful articles, and then added such presents as might be farther
serviceable to them. From the first moment of our arrival until we
left them, or, rather, till we had nothing left to give, the
females were particularly importunate with us, and "pilletay"
resounded from the whole troop, wherever we went; they were
extremely anxious to obtain our buttons, apparently more on
account of the ornament of the crown and anchor which they
observed upon them than from any value they set upon their use;
and several of these were cut off our jackets to please their
fancy. When I first endeavoured to bargain for a sledge, the
persons I addressed gave me distinctly to understand by signs that
it was not their property, and pointed towards the woman who owned
it; though my ignorance in this respect offered a good opportunity
of defrauding me, had they been so inclined, by receiving an
equivalent for that which did not belong to them: on the owner's
coming forward, the bargain was quickly concluded. The pikes which
I gave in exchange underwent the usual ceremony of licking, and
the sledge was carried to our boat with the most perfect
understanding on both sides. In another instance, an axe was
offered by some of the Griper's gentlemen as the price of a dog,
to which the woman who owned the animal consented. To show that we
placed full confidence in them, the axe was given to her before
the dog was caught, and she immediately went away with a kind of
halter or harness of thongs, which, they use for this purpose, and
honestly brought one of the finest among them, though nothing
would have been easier than to evade the performance of the
contract. The readiness, however, with which they generally parted
with their commodities, was by no means the effect of fear, nor
did it always depend on the value of the articles offered in
exchange; for having, as I thought, concluded a bargain for a
second canoe belonging to the old woman, I desired the men to hand
it down to the boat; but I soon perceived that I had misunderstood
her, for she clung fast to the canoe, and cried most piteously
till it was set down; I then offered a larger price than before,
but she could not be induced to part with it.

The stature of these people, like that of Esquimaux in general, is
much below the usual standard. The height of the old man, who was
rather bent by age, was four feet eleven inches; and that of the
other men, from five feet four and a half to five feet six inches.
Their faces are round and plump in the younger individuals; skin
smooth; complexion not very dark, except that of the old man;
teeth very white; eyes small; nose broad, but not very flat; hair
black, straight, and glossy; and their hands and feet extremely
diminutive. The old man had a gray beard, in which the black hairs
predominated, and wore the hair rather long upon his upper lip,
which was also the case with the eldest of the three others.

The grown-up females measured from four feet ten to four feet
eleven inches. The features of the two youngest were regular;
their complexions clear, and by no means dark; their eyes small,
black, and piercing; teeth beautifully white and perfect; and,
although the form of their faces is round and chubby, and their
noses rather flat than otherwise, their countenances might,
perhaps, be considered pleasing, even according to the ideas of
beauty which habit has taught us to entertain. Their hair, which
is jet-black, hangs down long and loose about their shoulders, a
part of it on each side being carelessly platted, and sometimes
rolled up into an awkward lump, instead of being neatly tied on
the top of the head, as the Esquimaux women in most other parts
are accustomed to wear it. The youngest female had much natural
bashfulness and timidity, and we considered her to be the only
unmarried one, as she differed from the other three in not being
tattooed upon the face. Two of them had their hands tattooed also,
and the old woman had a few marks of the same kind about each
wrist. None of the men or children were thus distinguished.

The children were generally good-looking, and the eldest boy,
about twelve years of age, was a remarkably fine and even handsome
lad. They were rather scared at us at first; but kind treatment
and a few trifling presents soon removed their fears, and made
them almost as importunate as the rest.

The dress of the men consists of a sealskin jacket, with a hood,
which is occasionally drawn over the head, of which it forms the
only covering. The breeches are also generally of sealskin, and
are made to reach below the knee; and their boots, which meet the
breeches, are made of the same material. In this dress we
perceived no difference from that of the other Esquimaux, except
that the jacket, instead of having a pointed flap before and
behind, as usual, was quite straight behind, and had a sort of
scallop before in the centre. In the dress of the women there was
not so much regard to decency as in that of the men. The jacket is
of sealskin, with a short, pointed flap before, and a long one
behind, reaching almost to the ground. They had on a kind of
drawers, similar to those described by Crantz as the summer dress
of the Greenland women, and no breeches. The drawers cover the
middle part of the body, from the hips to one third down the
thigh, the rest of which is entirely naked as far as the knee. The
boots are like those of the men; and, besides these, they have a
pair of very loose leggins, as they may be called, which hang down
carelessly upon the top of the boots, suffering their thighs to be
exposed in the manner before described, but which may be intended
occasionally to fasten up, so as to complete the covering of the
whole body. The children are all remarkably well clothed; their
dress, both in male and female, being in every respect the same as
that of the men, and composed entirely of sealskin very neatly
sewed.

The tents which compose their summer habitations are principally
supported by a long pole of whalebone, fourteen feet high,
standing perpendicularly, with four or five feet of it projecting
above the skins which form the roof and sides. The length of the
tent is seventeen, and its breadth from seven to nine feet, the
narrowest part being next the door, and widening towards the inner
part, where the bed, composed of a quantity of the small shrubby
plant, the _Andromeda Tetragona_, occupies about one third of the
whole apartment. The pole of the tent is fixed where the bed
commences, and the latter is kept separate by some pieces of bone
laid across the tent from side to side. The door, which faces the
southwest, is also formed of two pieces of bone, with the upper
ends fastened together, and the skins are made to overlap in that
part of the tent, which is much lower than the inner end. The
covering is fastened to the ground by curved pieces of bone, being
generally parts of the whale; the tents were ten or fifteen yards
apart, and about the same distance from the beach.

The canoe which I purchased, and which was one of the best of the
five that we saw, is sixteen feet eleven inches in length, and its
extreme breadth two feet one inch and a half; two feet of its fore
end are out of the water when floating. It differs from the canoe
of Greenland in being somewhat lower at each end, and also in
having a higher rim or gunwale, as it may be termed, round the
circular hole where the man sits, which may make them somewhat
safer at sea. Their construction is, in other respects, much the
same; the timbers or ribs, which are five or six inches apart, as
well as the fore and aft connecting pieces, being of whalebone or
drift-wood, and the skins with which they were covered, those of
the seal and walrus. When the canoes are taken on the shore, they
are carefully placed upon two upright piles or pillars of stones,
four feet high from the ground, in order to allow the air to pass
under to dry them, and prevent their rotting. The paddle is double
and made of fir, the edges of the blade being covered with hard
bone to secure them from wearing.

The spears or darts which they use in killing seals and other sea
animals, consist, like the harpoons of our fishermen, of two
parts, a staff, and the spear itself; the former is usually of
wood, when so scarce and valuable a commodity can be obtained,
from three and a half to five feet in length, and the latter of
bone, about eighteen inches long, sometimes tipped with iron, but
more commonly ground to a blunt point at one end, while the other
fits into a socket in the staff, to which it is firmly secured by
thongs. The lines which they attach to their spears are very
neatly cut out of sealskins, and, when in a state of preparation,
are left to stretch till dry between the tents, and then made up
into coils for use. They make use of a bladder fastened to the end
of the line, in the same manner as the other Esquimaux. Besides
the spears, we purchased an instrument having a rude hook of iron
let into a piece of bone, and secured by thongs to a staff, the
hook being sharply pointed, but not barbed. While we were on the
island (to which I had applied the name of Observation Island), it
happened that a small bird flew near us, when one of the Esquimaux
made a sign of shooting it with a bow and arrow in a manner which
could not be misunderstood. It is remarkable, therefore, that we
could not find about their tents any of these weapons, except a
little one of five or six inches long, the bow being made of
whalebone and the arrow of fir, with a feather at one end and a
blunt point of bone at the other, evidently appearing to be a
child's toy, and intended, perhaps, to teach the use of it at an
early age.

The runners of the only sledge we saw were composed of the right
and left jawbones of a young whale, being nine feet nine inches
long, and one foot seven inches apart, and seven inches high from
the ground. They are connected by a number of parallel pieces,
made out of the ribs of the whale, and secured transversely with
seizings of whalebone, so as to form the bottom of the sledge, and
the back is made of two deers' horns placed in an upright
position. The lower part of the runners is shod with a harder kind
of bone, to resist the friction against the ground. The whole
vehicle is rudely executed, and, being nearly twice the weight of
the sledges we saw among the northern Esquimaux, is probably
intended for carrying heavy burdens. The dogs were not less than
fifty or sixty in number, and had nothing about them different
from those on the eastern coast of Baffin's Bay, except they do
not stand near so high as those of the latitude of 76°. They are
very shy and wild, and the natives had great difficulty in
catching them while we were by, as well as holding them in when
caught. Some of them have much more of the wolf in their
appearance than others, having very long heads and sharp noses,
with a brushy tail, almost always carried between the legs; while
the bodies of others are less lank, as well as their noses less
sharp, and they carry their tails handsomely curled over their
backs: their colour varied from quite dark to brindled. The
ravenous manner in which they devour their food is almost
incredible. Both the old and young ones, when a bird is given
them, generally swallow feathers and all; and an old dog that I
purchased, though regularly fed while on board by a person
appointed for that purpose, ate up, with great avidity, a large
piece of canvass, a cotton handkerchief, which one of the men had
just washed and laid down by his side, and a part of a check
shirt. The young dogs will at any time kill themselves by
over-eating if permitted. The children appeared to have some right
of property in the smaller puppies, or else their parents are very
indulgent to them, for several bargains of this kind were made
with them, without any objection or interference on the part of
the parents, who were standing by at the time.

Within a few stones, irregularly placed in a corner of each tent,
was a lump of oil and moss, and over each of these was suspended a
small stone vessel of an oblong shape, and broader at the top than
at the bottom, containing a large mess of seahorse flesh, with a
great quantity of thick gravy. Some ribs of this meat were by no
means bad looking; and, but for the blood mixed with the gravy,
and the dirt which accompanied the cooking, might perhaps be
palatable enough. I bargained with a woman for one of the stone
vessels, giving her a brass kettle in exchange. Before she gave it
into my possession, she emptied the meat into another vessel, and
then, with the flap of her jacket, wiped out the remains of the
gravy; thus combining with what our notions of cleanliness incline
us to consider a filthy act, an intention of decency and a desire
to oblige us, which, however inconsistent, it was pleasing to
observe. Some of their vessels are made of whalebone, in a
circular form, one piece being bent into the proper shape for the
sides, and another flat piece, of the same material, sewn to it
for a bottom, so closely as to make it perfectly water tight.
Their knives are made of the tusks of the walrus, cut or ground
sufficiently thin for the purpose, and retaining the original
curve of the tusk, so as to resemble the little swords which
children have as toys in England. As they do not appear to have
any instrument like a saw, great time and labour must be required
in making one of these knives, which seem to answer most of the
purposes to which they have occasion to apply them.

From the description given to us by Mr. Williamson, we found that
these were the same persons who had been seen by the Lee's people;
but we had several proofs of their having had some previous
communication, directly or indirectly, with the civilized world;
such as some light-blue beads, strung by themselves on thin
leathern threads; and an instrument for chopping, very much
resembling a cooper's adze, which had evidently been secured to a
handle of bone for some time past, and of which the iron was part
of an old file.

The short time we were among them, as well as the want of an
interpreter, prevented our obtaining much of the information,
which would have been interesting, respecting the language,
manners, and number of this tribe of Esquimaux. They call the bear
_nennook_, the deer _tooktook_, and the hare _ookalik_, being
nearly the same words as those used on the eastern coast of
Baffin's Bay. As it was considered a matter of some interest to
ascertain whether they were acquainted with the musk-ox, a drawing
of that animal was put before the men who were on board. The small
size of it seemed, at first sight, to confound them; but, as soon
as the real head and horns were produced, they immediately
recognised them, and eagerly repeated the word _oomingmack_, which
at once satisfied us that they knew the musk-ox, and that this was
the animal spoken of by the Esquimaux of Greenland, under the same
name, somewhat differently pronounced.

To judge by their appearance, and what is, perhaps, a better
criterion, the number of their children, there could be little
doubt that the means of subsistence which they possess are very
abundant; but of this we had more direct proof by the quantity of
seahorses and seals which we found concealed under stones along
the shore of the north branch, as well as on Observation Island.
Mr. Fife reported that, in sounding the north branch, he met with
their winter huts above two miles above the tents on the same
shore, and that they were partly excavated from a bank facing the
sea, and the rest built round with stones.

We saw no appearance of disease among the seventeen persons who
inhabited the tents, except that the eyes of the old couple were
rather blear, and a very young infant looked pale and sickly. The
old man had a large scar on one side of his head, which he
explained to us very clearly to be a wound he had received from a
_nennook_ (bear). Upon the whole, these people may be considered
in possession of every necessary of life, as well as of most of
the comforts and conveniences which can be enjoyed in so rude a
state of society. In the situation and circumstances in which the
Esquimaux of North Greenland are placed, there is much to excite
compassion for the low state to which human nature appears to be
there reduced; a state in few respects superior to that of the
bear or the seal which they kill for their subsistence. But, with
these, it was impossible not to experience a feeling of a more
pleasing kind: there was a respectful decency in their general
behaviour, which at once struck us as very different from that of
the other untutored Esquimaux, and in their persons there was less
of that intolerable filth by which these people are so generally
distinguished. But the superiority for which they are the most
remarkable is, the perfect honesty which characterized all their
dealings with us. During the two hours that the men were on board,
and for four or five hours that we were subsequently among them on
shore (on both which occasions the temptation to steal from us was
perhaps stronger than we can well imagine, and the opportunity of
doing so by no means wanting), not a single instance occurred, to
my knowledge, of their pilfering the most trifling article. It is
pleasing to record a fact no less singular in itself than
honourable to these simple people.

Having made the necessary observations, we went to the tents to
take leave of our new acquaintance. The old man seemed quite
fatigued with the day's exertions; but his eyes sparkled with
delight, and we thought with gratitude too, on being presented
with another brass kettle to add to the stores with which we had
already enriched him. He seemed to understand us when we shook him
by the hand; the whole group watched us in silence as we went into
the boat, and, as soon as we had rowed a few hundred yards from
the beach, quietly returned to their tents.

The wind being contrary on the 8th, we made very little progress
to the southward. The soundings continuing as regular as before,
we stood in-shore to eleven fathoms, and put the trawl overboard
for an hour or two in the afternoon, bringing up a great quantity
of sea-eggs, a few very small oysters, and some marine insects,
but nothing that could furnish us with a fresh meal.

The wind having fallen, we made little progress to the southeast
till the morning of the 12th, when a light breeze springing up
from the southwest, all sail was made to examine the state of the
ice. On approaching the floes, however, we found such a quantity
of bay-ice, the formation of which upon the surface had been
favoured by the late calm weather, that the Hecla was soon stopped
altogether; a circumstance which gave us, as usual, much trouble
in extricating ourselves from it, but not very material as
regarded our farther progress to the southward, the floes being
found to stretch quite close in to the land, leaving no passage
whatever between them. The compasses now traversed very freely,
and were made use of for the purposes of navigation in the
ordinary way.

The fog continued so thick on the 16th as to oblige us to keep the
ships fast to the floe. In the afternoon the deep-sea clamms were
sent down to the bottom with two thousand and ten fathoms of line,
which were fifty-eight minutes in running out, during which time
no perceptible check could be observed, nor even any alteration in
the velocity with which the line ran out. In hauling it in again,
however, which occupied both ships' companies above an hour and a
half, we found such a quantity of the line covered with mud as to
prove that the whole depth of water was only eight hundred and
nine fathoms, the rest of the line having continued to run out by
its own weight, after the instrument had struck the ground. I have
before had occasion to remark that, on this account, it is not
easy to ascertain the actual depth of the sea in the usual manner
when it exceeds five or six hundred fathoms.

The ships were secured to a berg at six P.M. of the 18th, and the
wind having freshened up to a gale from the N.W.b.N., with some
swell, we were much annoyed during the night by the ice which
drifted under the lee of it, and on which the ships were
constantly striking with a heavy shock, such as no others could
have long withstood. This danger is avoided by ships lying very
close under the lee of a berg, but a much greater is thereby
incurred from the risk of the berg's upsetting; a circumstance
which is always to be apprehended in a swell, and which must be
attended with certain destruction to a ship moored very near to
it.

On the 24th and 25th we continued our progress to the southward,
but without any success in approaching, or even getting sight of,
the land; the ice being as close and compact as when we sailed
along the margin of it in July of the preceding year. Soon after
noon on the 24th we crossed the Arctic Circle, having been within
it fourteen months and three weeks.

On the morning of the 26th we again stood to the westward as much
as the ice would allow, but were soon obliged by it to keep away
to the southward, precluding every hope of making the land on that
part of the coast which it would have been most interesting to
explore. In the afternoon, after various attempts to get to the
westward, appearances became more unpromising than ever, the
packed ice extending from N.b.E. round to S.W. There were, indeed,
parts of the ice which, with constant daylight, a ship might have
entered with some probability of success; but, with twelve hours'
night, the attempt must have been attended with a degree of risk
which nothing but a very important object could justify. The wind
had now freshened up from the N.N.W., and the mercury in the
barometer fell with unusual rapidity, with every other appearance
of an approaching gale. I was therefore under the necessity of
admitting the conclusion that, under existing circumstances, the
season was now too far advanced, and the state of the ice too
unfavourable, to allow of any farther examination of the coast;
and I determined, therefore, to make the best of my way to
England. The boats were accordingly hoisted in, and the ships made
snug while in smooth water under the lee of the ice, and a course
was then shaped to the E.S.E., in order to obtain an offing before
we bore away to the southward.

On the second of October, in scudding before the wind under the
main-topsail, a heavy sea struck the Hecla on the larboard
quarter, rendering it necessary to press her forward under more
canvass, by which we lost sight of the Griper in the course of the
morning. As soon as the weather moderated, we hove-to for her;
but, as she did not make her appearance, having, as we afterward
learned, been obliged to lie-to during the height of the gale, we
continued our course out of the Straits, and did not again meet
with the Griper till our return to England.

On the afternoon of the 16th, the sea being very high and
irregular, and the ship pitching with considerable violence, the
bowsprit was carried away close to the gammoning, and the foremast
and main-topmast immediately followed it over the side. The wreck
was quickly cleared; and, by the greatest activity and energy on
the part of the officers and men, the mainyard and mainmast were
saved, the latter having been endangered by the foremast falling
across the stay, and the former by the wreck of the main-topmast
and top-sail-yard lying upon it. Notwithstanding the continuance
of the gale, and the uneasy motion of the ship for the next two
days, we succeeded in getting up our jury masts so as to make sail
on the evening of the 18th.

On the 29th we made Buchaness, and on the following day, the wind
having come to the southward, so as to make our progress very
slow, I landed at Peterhead, accompanied by Captain Sabine and Mr.
Hooper; having first, in compliance with their lordships'
directions, demanded from the officers, petty officers, and all
other persons on board the Hecla, the logs, journals, charts,
drawings, and other documents which the voyage had furnished, and
directed Lieutenant Beechey to proceed with all possible despatch
to Leith. Captain Sabine and myself proceeded without delay to
London, where we arrived on the morning of the 3d of November.




SECOND VOYAGE
FOR THE DISCOVERY OF A
NORTHWEST PASAGE




PRELIMINARY CHAPTER.


The discoveries made by the expedition to the northwest in the
years 1819-20 being such as to afford a strong presumption in
favour of the existence of a passage from the Atlantic to the
Pacific in that direction, his majesty commanded another attempt
to be made to effect that object; and the lords commissioners of
the admiralty were pleased once more to honour me with the command
of an expedition, to be equipped at Deptford for that purpose. The
Hecla having been found well adapted to this service, a second
ship of precisely the same class was now selected, and I received
my commission for his majesty's ship the Fury, of three hundred
and seventy-seven tons burden, on the 30th of December, 1820. The
Hecla was recommissioned by Captain George Francis Lyon on the 4th
of January following.

In our official instructions I was directed to proceed, as quickly
as might be consistent with every precaution, towards or into
Hudson's Strait until the ice was met with, when the Nautilus
transport, which was directed by the navy board to be placed at my
disposal, was to be cleared of its provisions and stores. We were
then to penetrate to the westward, through Hudson's Strait, until
we reached (either in Repulse Bay, or on other part of the shores
of Hudson's Strait to the north of Wager River) some part of the
coast, which I felt convinced was a portion of the _Continent_ of
America.

If we happily reached the Pacific, we were to proceed to
Kamschatka, from thence to the Sandwich Islands or Canton, and,
having refitted the ships and refreshed the crews, to return to
England by such route as might be deemed convenient.




CHAPTER I.

Passage across the Atlantic.--Removal of Stores from the Nautilus
Transport, at the Margin of the Ice.--Departure of the Nautilus
for England.--Enter the Ice in Hudson's Strait.--Perilous
Situation of the Hecla, and Loss of her Anchor.--Meet with the
Hudson's Bay Ships.--Passage up the Strait, and Communication with
the Natives inhabiting the Northern Shores.--Pass the Trinity
Islands of Fox.--Arrival off Southampton Island, where the
Researches of the Expedition commence.


The FURY, HECLA, and NAUTILUS transport were completed for sea
towards the latter part of the month of April, and on the 29th, at
ten A.M., the Fury was taken in tow by the Eclipse steamboat,
which vessel had before taken us down the river on a similar
occasion. The Hecla reached the moorings on the following day, and
the Nautilus on the first of May.

Nothing of consequence happened during our passage across the
Atlantic; but, after entering Davis's Straits, we had for several
days variable and unsettled weather, the wind blowing principally
from the southward, with a heavy swell from the same quarter. On
the 14th we met with the first iceberg, being in lat. 60° 48',
long. 53° 13'.

Having now reached the situation in which I was directed, by my
instructions, to clear the Nautilus of our stores, I gave
Lieutenant Scrymgour his instructions to return to England; and at
one A.M. on the 1st of July he parted company, while the Fury and
Hecla stood in towards the ice. A whaler, deeply laden, and
apparently homeward bound, was at this time in sight to the
eastward.

At seven P.M., Tuesday, 3d July, the ice opposed our farther
progress to the westward, covering the whole sea as far as the eye
could reach in that direction; the ships were therefore, of
necessity, hove to, in order to await some change in our favour.
The ice here consisted principally of large though loose masses of
broken floes, none covering more than a quarter of an acre, and
few so much, but having many high hummocks, and drawing a great
deal of water. We counted also above thirty bergs in sight at one
time, and observed that many of them were carried about by the
tides with great rapidity.

The wind shifted to the southeastward in the night of the 5th,
with a strong breeze and heavy rain; and, on the following
morning, when the ebb-tide opened the ice a little, a considerable
swell was admitted from the sea, causing the ships to strike
violently and almost constantly on the masses of ice alongside of
them. In this situation they continued for several hours so
completely beset as to render it impossible to extricate them, and
drifting about at random with the tides. The Hecla was, by a
different set of the stream, separated five or six miles from the
Fury, while both ships were equally hampered.

On the 13th, both ships' companies were exercised in firing at a
target on the ice, as well for the purpose of giving them
occupation as of finding out who were the best shots. On the same
afternoon we saw two ships beset to the northward, which we
supposed to be those bound to the Hudson's Bay factories. They
were joined the next day by a third ship, which afterward proved
to be, as we conjectured, the Lord Wellington, having on board
settlers for the Red River.

The ice being rather less close on the morning of the 16th, we
made sail to the westward at 7.45 A.M., and continued "boring" in
that situation the whole day, which enabled us to join the three
strange ships. They proved to be, as we had supposed, the Prince
of Wales, Eddystone, and Lord Wellington, bound to Hudson's Bay. I
sent a boat to the former to request Mr. Davidson, the master, to
come on board, which he immediately did. From him we learned that
the Lord Wellington having on board one hundred and sixty settlers
for the Red River, principally foreigners, of both sexes and every
age, had now been twenty days among the ice, and had been drifted
about in various directions at no small risk to the ship. By the
Prince of Wales we sent our last letters for our friends in
England.

Proceeding slowly to the westward, we had reached at noon on the
21st the lat. of 61° 50' 13", long., by chronometers, 67° 07' 35".
In this situation several islands were in sight to the northward
and westward, and, among the rest, a remarkable one called
Saddle-back on account of its shape. The wind backing to the
westward in the afternoon, we anchored the ships to the largest
floe-piece we could find, there not being room to beat to the
windward. While thus employed we heard voices in-shore, which we
soon knew to be those of some Esquimaux coming off to us. Shortly
after, several canoes made their appearance, and seventeen of
these people came alongside the Fury. Having hauled their _kayaks_
(canoes) upon the floe, they began to barter their commodities,
consisting of seal and whale blubber, whalebone, spears, lines,
and the skins of the seal, bear, fox, deer, and dog. Our first
endeavour was to procure as much oil as possible, of which, as we
had been informed by the Hudson's Bay ships, several tons are thus
almost annually obtained from these people. We soon found that
they had been well accustomed to bargain-making, for it was with
some difficulty that we could prevail on them to sell the oil for
anything of reasonable value. They frequently gave us to
understand that they wanted saws and harpoons in exchange for it,
and as these were articles which we could not spare, it was not
without trouble that we obtained, in the course of the evening,
two barrels of blubber in exchange for several knives, large
nails, and pieces of iron hoop, which was certainly a dear bargain
on our side. If they saw more than one of these at a time, they
would try hard to get the whole for the commodity they were
offering, though, when we had for some time persisted in refusing,
they would not only accept what was offered, but jump for joy at
having obtained it. They always licked the articles given them,
and in one instance only did we notice any inclination to break
the contract after this process had been gone through.

Shortly after these men had arrived, a large _oomiak_, or woman's
boat, made its appearance, containing six or seven females and
four men, the oldest of the latter, as is usual among them,
steering the boat with a rude oar of wood. The women could not be
induced to land upon the floe, but held up skins and small narrow
strips of well-tanned leather to exchange, loudly vociferating
_pilletay_ (give me) the whole time. There were in this boat
several skins of oil and blubber, which I tried hard to purchase,
but nothing could induce the old man to part with more than one
skin of it; for what reason I could not tell, except that he
hoped, by perseverance, to obtain a higher price. On my desiring
our men to hand out a second skin of oil, as an equivalent for
which I put into the old man's hand a second knife, he resisted
most vehemently, pushing our men aside in the boat with a violence
I have never seen the Esquimaux use on any other occasion. One of
the younger men then came forward, and was lifting up the stretcher
of their boat to strike our people, who were good-humouredly
laughing at the old man's violence, when I thought it high time to
interpose, and, raising a boat-hook over the head of the Esquimaux,
as if about to strike them, soon brought them into a cooler mood;
after which, to prevent farther altercation, I ordered our people
out of the boat. We had by this time succeeded in purchasing all
the oil brought by the first canoes; and as the old fellow, who was
commanding officer of the _oomiak_, obstinately persisted in his
refusal to sell his, I ordered him away, when he immediately rowed
to the Hecla, and, as I was afterward informed by Captain Lyon,
sold his oil for less than he might have obtained at first. Four
other _oomiaks_ afterward came from the shore, from which we were
distant five or six miles. Each of these contained from fourteen to
twenty-six persons, the majority being females and young children.
Upon the whole, not less than one hundred of the natives visited
the ships in the course of the evening.

These people possessed in an eminent degree the disposition to
steal all they could lay their hands on, which has almost
universally been imputed to every tribe of Esquimaux hitherto
visited by Europeans. They tried more than once the art of picking
our pockets, and were as bold and unembarrassed as ever
immediately after detection. It is impossible to describe the
horribly disgusting manner in which they sat down, as soon as they
felt hungry, to eat their raw blubber, and to suck the oil
remaining on the skins we had just emptied, the very smell of
which, as well as the appearance, was to us almost insufferable.
The disgust which our seaman could not help expressing at this
sight seemed to create in the Esquimaux the most malicious
amusement; and when our people turned away, literally unable to
bear the sight without being sick, they would, as a good joke
among themselves, run after them, holding out a piece of blubber
or raw seal's flesh dripping with oil and filth, as if inviting
them to partake of it. Both the men and women were guilty of still
more disgusting indecencies, which seemed to afford them amazing
diversion. A worse trait even than all these was displayed by two
women alongside the Hecla, who, in a manner too unequivocal to be
misunderstood, offered to barter their children for some article
of trifling value, beginning very deliberately to strip them of
their clothes, which they did not choose to consider as included
in the intended bargain.

Upon the whole, it was impossible for us not to receive a very
unfavourable impression of the general behaviour and moral
character of the natives of this part of Hudson's Strait, who seem
to have acquired, by an annual intercourse with our ships for
nearly a hundred years, many of the vices which unhappily attend a
first intercourse with the civilized world, without having imbibed
any of the virtues or refinements which adorn and render it happy.

Early on the morning of the 22d a number of canoes repeated their
visit to us, the Esquimaux having hauled them upon a piece of ice
to lodge for the night. In the forenoon an _oomiak_ also came from
the shore, and as no intercourse with them was permitted till
after divine service, they became very impatient to barter their
commodities, and walked on the ice alongside the ships, with a
number of trifling things in their hands, vociferating "pilletay"
to such a degree that we could hardly hear ourselves speak. Some
more oil was obtained in exchange for pieces of iron hoop, and, at
a quarter before noon, the wind coming more to the southward, and
the ice being somewhat less close than before, we cast off and
made sail up the strait.

The wind and ice combined to favour us more and more as we
proceeded, the former both in strength and direction, and the
latter by opening into loose streams, so that, for the first time
since we entered Hudson's Strait, we were now enabled to set all
the studding-sails, with some prospect of deriving advantage from
them. The Hudson's Bay ships remained at anchor some time after we
made sail, and in the course of the evening we finally lost sight
of them. From this circumstance, as well as from the unimpeded
progress we had just begun to make to the westward, it was now
only that we considered our voyage as having fairly commenced.

We continued, on the first of August, to beat to the westward,
between Nottingham Island and the North Shore, the distance
between which is about four leagues, and the latter fringed with
numerous islands. In the course of the morning, several canoes and
one _oomiak_ came off from the mainland, containing about twenty
persons, more than half of whom were women and children. They
brought a little oil, some skin dresses, and tusks of the walrus,
which they were willing to exchange for any trifle we chose to
give them. They had also a number of toys of various kinds, such
as canoes with their paddles, spears, and bows and arrows, all on
a very large scale. Many of the jackets of these people, and
particularly those of the females, were lined with the skins of
birds, having the feathers inside; and they had also in the boat
several other skins in a prepared state, taken from the throat of
the _colymbus glacialis_, which splendid bird, though we had twice
found its skin in possession of the Esquimaux, we had yet not met
with ourselves.

The expedition being now about to enter upon ground not hitherto
explored, it became necessary for me to decide upon the route it
would be most advantageous to pursue for the accomplishment of the
principal objects pointed out in my instructions.




CHAPTER II.

Review of the Geographical Information obtained by the Researches
of former Navigators on the Coast of the American Continent, in
the Neighbourhood of Wager River.--Discover and enter the Duke of
York's Bay, supposing it to be a Passage into the Sea called the
Welcome.--Leave the Duke of York's Bay, and proceed to the
Northwestward.--Passage of the Frozen Strait and Arrival in
Repulse Bay.--Continuity of Land there.--Observations on
Shore.--Remarks concerning the Geography, Tides, and Natural
History of this Part of the Continental Coast.


After the most anxious consideration, I came to the resolution of
attempting the direct passage of the Frozen Strait; though, I
confess, not without some apprehension of the risk I was
incurring, and of the serious loss of time which, in case of
failure either from the non-existence of the strait or from the
insuperable obstacles which its name implies, would thus be
inevitably occasioned to the expedition.

The accounts given by Captain Middleton of the latitude of the
western entrance of the Frozen Strait are so confused, and even
contradictory, that the present appearance of the land perplexed
me extremely in deciding whether or not we had arrived at the
opposite end of the opening to which he had given that name. That
immediately before us to the westward, though it agreed in
latitude within five or six miles with the southernmost parallel
he has assigned to it, appeared much too narrow to answer his
description of the passage we were in search of. Upon the whole,
however, I thought it most probable that this was the strait in
question; and as, at all events, the opening between Southampton
Island and the land to the northward of it, in whatever latitude
it might be found, and whether wide or narrow, was the passage
through which it was our present object to penetrate into Repulse
Bay, I decided on using our utmost exertions to push through the
narrow strait now before us.

On the morning of the 13th we observed something very like smoke
rising from about Cape Welsford, which, being confined to one
spot, was thought likely to be occasioned by the fires of natives.
Nothing could exceed the fineness of the weather about this time;
the climate was, indeed, altogether so different from that to
which we had before been accustomed in the icy seas, as to be a
matter of constant remark. The days were temperate and clear, and
the nights not cold, though a very thin plate of ice was usually
formed upon the surface of the sea in sheltered places, and in the
pools of water upon the floes. After sunset we descried land,
appearing very distant, through the middle of the strait, which we
considered to be that on the American side of the Welcome. At this
time, also, we observed some ice in the centre of the strait
heavier than that which covered the rest of the sea, and
apparently aground in shoal water, as afterward proved to be the
case.

On the 15th we were within a league of a remarkable headland on
Southampton Island, which I named CAPE BYLOT, as being probably
the westernmost land seen by that navigator in 1615. In the mean
time, the Hecla, still continuing very closely beset, had, in
spite of every exertion, drifted back with the ice several miles
to the northward and eastward, so that in the course of the
evening we lost sight of her altogether. This latter circumstance
was, however, owing in great measure to the extraordinary
refraction upon the horizon, making terrestrial objects at the
distance of six or seven miles appear flattened down or depressed,
as well as otherwise much deformed.

At six P.M., having beat up within five or six miles of the
entrance of the strait, and being anxious to sound the channel,
which appeared narrow, but without any ice in it to offer us
obstruction, I left the ship in the gig, accompanied by Mr. Ross,
for this purpose.

The part of Southampton Island on which we landed is about a
thousand feet high, and composed of gneiss. Every here and there
along the shore, between the projecting points of rocks, is a
small cove or bay, having a beach composed of small pieces of
limestone, which make the water almost as white as milk. Landing
in one of these coves, we carried the boat above high-water mark;
and making a tent of her sail, lay very comfortably during the
night. When the boat first touched the beach, we observed an
innumerable quantity of the little fish called sillocks swimming
about, several of which were killed by the boat-hooks or taken in
the hand. A great number of white whales, seals, and narwhals were
also playing about near the beach during the night. The white
whales were the most numerous; the noise these animals made
resembled a hoarse, low-toned barking more than any other to which
I can compare it; and we remarked that their colour was whiter
than any we had before seen.

As soon as it was daylight Mr. Ross and myself ascended the hill
above our sleeping-place, from whence we could perceive land
stretching round to the westward and northward, so as apparently
to leave no opening in that quarter. We were much surprised at the
low and yellowish appearance of this land, both of which
circumstances we were at a loss to reconcile with Captain
Middleton's description of the bold shore of the American
Continent, on the western side of the Welcome, about this
latitude. It was pleasing, however, to observe a large expanse of
sea, wholly unencumbered with ice, in the direction we were now
about to pursue; and we therefore hastened to the beach to
continue the survey of the strait, that no time might be lost in
taking advantage of this favourable circumstance.

After completing our observations and examination of the channel,
we reached the ship by eight A.M., the Fury having, with great
attention, been kept close off the entrance of the strait during
the night. The Hecla had at this time just hove in sight, under a
press of sail, to the eastward, having at length, with much
difficulty, succeeded in getting into clear water.

At half past nine on the 17th we got under way, and stood under
all sail to the N.N.E., where alone, as on the preceding evening,
there appeared the smallest chance of finding any outlet.

Having determined the continuity of land all round this
magnificent bay, possessing so many advantages that would render
it invaluable in a more temperate climate, the officers honoured
it with the name of the DUKE OF YORK'S BAY, in consequence of the
expedition having first entered it on the birthday of his royal
highness.

It being now evident that the inlet into which, in the course of
our endeavours to penetrate to the westward, we had unavoidably
been led, would afford us no passage in that direction, I gave
orders for weighing at the turn of tide, being determined at once
to run back through the narrow channel by which we had entered,
and to push to the northward without delay, in search of some more
favourable opening.

Our uncertainty respecting the true situation of the Frozen
Strait, together with the want of observations during the day,
left us, at this time, in doubt whether we had already penetrated
through that passage, or had still to encounter the difficulties
which the former accounts of it had led us to anticipate.

We stood up the bay towards daylight, and at seven A.M. I left the
Fury, accompanied by a large party of officers, having by signal
requested Captain Lyon to join us. We landed upon a point just to
the eastward of this bight, in which neighbourhood are several
little islands and coves, probably affording good anchorage, but
which the more immediate objects we had in view did not permit us
to examine. Upon the point we found the remains of no less than
sixty Esquimaux habitations, consisting of stones laid one over
the other in very regular circles, eight or nine feet in diameter,
besides nearly a hundred other rude, though certainly artificial
structures, some of which had been fireplaces, others storehouses,
and the rest tolerably-built walls four or five feet high, placed
two and two, and generally eight or nine feet apart, which these
people use for their canoes, as well as to keep the dogs from
gnawing them. A great many circles of stones were also seen more
inland. About three miles to the N.N.W. of our landing-place, our
people reported having seen fifteen others of the same kind, and
what they took to be a burying-ground, consisting of nine or ten
heaps of large stones, of three feet in diameter, and as many in
height. Under these were found a variety of little implements,
such as arrow or spear heads tipped with stone or iron, arrows,
small models of canoes and paddles, some rough pieces of bone and
wood, and one or two strips of asbestos, which, as Crantz informs
us, is used by the natives of Greenland for the wick of their
lamps, and for applying hot, in certain diseases, to the afflicted
part.[*] Under these articles were found smaller stones, placed as
a pavement, six or seven feet in length, which, in the part not
concealed by the larger stones, was covered with earth. Our men
had not the curiosity or inclination to dig any deeper, but a
human scull was found near the spot. Our people also reported
that, several miles inland of this, they observed stones set up as
marks, many of which we also met with in the neighbourhood of the
point. Of these marks, which occur so abundantly in every part of
the American coast that we visited, we could not then conjecture
the probable use, but we afterward learned that the Esquimaux set
them up to guide them in travelling from place to place, when a
covering of snow renders it difficult to distinguish one spot from
another. We found among the stones some seals' bones, with the
flesh still upon them, which seemed to indicate that the natives
had occupied this station during a part of the same season and
judging from the number of circles collected in this place, and
still more from our subsequent knowledge of these people, it is
probable that not less than one hundred and twenty persons had
taken up their residence here at the same time.

[Footnote: Crantz, i., 236. The Esquimaux on this part of the
coast use it only as sticks for trimming their lamps.]

The latitude observed on shore was 66° 30' 58", being the first
observation we had yet obtained so near the Arctic Circle, but far
to the southward of that given by Captain Middleton.[*] The
longitude, by chronometers, was 86° 30' 20"; the dip of the
magnetic needle, 88° 07' 28"; and the variation, 48° 32' 57"
westerly; being only a degree and a half less than that observed
by Middleton in 1742.

[Footnote: The difference amounts to about twenty miles. It is but
justice, however, to the memory of Captain Middleton to add, that
several miles of this error may have been occasioned by the
imperfection of nautical instruments in his day, combined with the
unavoidable inaccuracy of observations made by the horizon of the
sea when encumbered with much ice. On this latter account, as well
as from the extraordinary terrestrial refraction, no observation
can be here depended upon, unless made with an artificial
horizon.]




CHAPTER III.

Return to the Eastward through the Frozen Strait.--Discovery of
Hurd Channel.--Examined in a Boat.--Loss of the Fury's
Anchor.--Providential Escape of the Fury from Shipwreck.--Anchor
in Duckett Cove.--Farther Examination of the Coast by Boats and
Walking-parties.--Ships proceed through Hurd Channel.--Are drifted
by the Ice back to Southampton Island.--Unobstructed Run to the
Entrance of a large Inlet leading to the Northwestward.--Ships
made fast by Hawsers to the Rocks.--Farther Examination of the
Inlet commenced in the Boats.


Having now satisfactorily determined the non-existence of a
passage to the westward through Repulse Bay, to which point I was
particularly directed in my instructions, it now remained for me,
in compliance with my orders, to "keep along the line of this
coast to the northward, always examining every bend or inlet which
might appear likely to afford a practicable passage to the
westward." It was here, indeed, that our voyage, as regarded its
main object, may be said to have commenced, and we could not but
congratulate ourselves on having reached this point so early, and
especially at having passed, almost without impediment, the strait
to which, on nearly the same day[*] seventy-nine years before, so
forbidding a name had been applied.

[Footnote: Middleton discovered the Frozen Strait on the 20th
August 1742, according to the New Style.]

All sail was made at daylight on the 23d along the northern shore
of the Frozen Strait, which here continues about the same height
as that of Repulse Bay, and was at this time quite free from snow.
At nine A.M. the weather became squally with thick snow, which
rendered great caution necessary in running. There was something
in the appearance of this part of the coast which held out so
favourable a prospect of a direct passage to the northward, that I
determined more closely to examine it. Having beat up to the mouth
of an opening which, the nearer we approached, assumed a more and
more favourable appearance, we found that a body of ice occupied
the greater part of the channel, rendering it impracticable then
to enter it either with the ships or the boats. The only mode
left, therefore, of examining it without loss of time, was to
despatch a party equipped for travelling by land, to ascertain
enough of its extent and communications to enable me to decide as
to our farther progress. As, however, in their present situation,
I did not feel myself justified in leaving the ships, I requested
Captain Lyon to undertake this service. He was accompanied by Mr.
Bushnan and two seamen from each ship, and was furnished with a
tent, blankets, and four days' provisions.

Captain Lyon, on his return, at the end of two days, reported that
he had landed on an island, which he called BUSHNAN'S ISLAND, had
then crossed a strait, to which afterward the name of HURD'S
CHANNEL was given, and landed on a steep point called by him CAPE
MONTAGU. From hence his party proceeded to a high and remarkable
hill called BROOKS'S BLUFF: following the strait to the northward,
they passed the remains of many Esquimaux habitations; and, though
their short journey had been unsatisfactory on account of the
badness of the weather, there was still sufficient to cause the
most lively interest, and give strong hopes of the existence of
some passage to the northeast of the small inlet they had
examined.

At eight P.M., having shoaled the water from sixty to forty, and
then to thirty-two fathoms, and the weather still continuing
extremely thick, I suspected that the tide was taking us too close
to Passage Island, which was the nearest land when the fog came
on. A large space of open water was at this time not more than a
quarter of a mile distant from us in the opposite direction; but,
before the ships could be moved by warps or any other means within
our power, the tide was observed to be setting her directly
between the island and the little yellow-looking rock I have
before mentioned as lying on its eastern side. The anchors were
kept ready to drop in an instant should the ship drive into shoal
water; had we grounded, and the heavy masses of ice continued to
drive upon us, little less than the total destruction of the ship
was to be apprehended. The natural direction of the stream,
however, effected for us that which, hampered as we were, our own
exertions must have failed in accomplishing; the ship drove
through, at the distance of one hundred yards from the rock and
about one hundred and forty from Passage Island, having no less
than twelve fathoms; and soon after deepened the water to
thirty-five and forty, and then to no bottom with ninety.

After this providential escape we lay-to within the island, in
order to drift to the northward and westward of it with the flood
tide, which runs stronger here than in any other part of the
Frozen Strait. The night was fine, but extremely dark, so that
after ten o'clock we could not distinguish where the land lay, and
the compasses could not be depended on. After an ineffectual
attempt to push through the ice towards the middle of the Strait,
in order to avoid the danger of being entangled among the numerous
islands lying off this shore, we were literally obliged to let the
ship take her chance, keeping the lead going and the anchors in
readiness.

The Hecla having got clear of the ice the preceding evening, and
narrowly escaped an adventure similar to that which we had
experienced, rejoined us early in the morning, when Captain Lyon
returned to her to prepare a boat for his intended excursion. We
then stood in under all sail for the land, and at eleven A.M.
Captain Lyon left the Hecla, while the ships tacked off and on to
await his return. At nine P.M. Captain Lyon returned, acquainting
me that he had met with a small bay having no stream of tide, and
being at present clear of ice, he thought it might answer our
purpose, but he wished me to see it before the ships were taken
in.

A boat from each ship being prepared, Captain Lyon and myself left
the cove at three P.M. to proceed on the proposed examination. We
separated at Point Cheyne, Captain Lyon having pointed out to me
the broad eastern channel from which the tide appeared to come,
and which if was my intention to examine, while he directed his
attention to the smaller passage he had described as leading to
the northward. It was agreed that we should return to the ships
with as little delay as was consistent with the object we had in
view, namely, to ascertain through which of the two channels it
was expedient or practicable to bring the ships.

The breeze moderated soon after our landing, and a fine clear
night succeeded. At four in the morning Mr. Ross and myself
ascended the nearest hill, in the hope of being able to satisfy
ourselves respecting the existence of a passage for the ships in
at least one direction. I therefore directed the tents to be
struck, and everything to be in readiness for moving on our
return. On reaching the summit of the first hill, however, we
found, as is not unfrequently the case, that our view was but
little improved, and that no prospect could be obtained to the
northward without ascending the higher hill seen the preceding
evening, which we now found still several miles beyond us. While
preparing for this, I felt so much indisposed, that, being
apprehensive of laying myself up at a time when I could least
afford to do so, I determined to intrust the proposed service to
Mr. Ross, in whose zeal and ability to accomplish it I felt the
utmost confidence. Mr. Ross and his party accordingly set out for
the hill at six A.M. On his return in the evening Mr. Ross
reported that, having reached a commanding hill, he found himself
overlooking a sea of considerable extent to the eastward, and
washing the foot of the hill on which he stood. This sea appeared
to have some islands scattered about it, and was much encumbered
with ice. To the southeastward there seemed to be several openings
between islands, of which the land we stood then upon appeared to
form one, the sea sweeping round to the northward and westward, as
if to join the strait discovered by Captain Lyon. Mr. Ross
described the country over which he passed as much intersected by
lakes, some of them not less than two or three miles in length,
and having in their neighbourhood abundance of grass, moss, and
other fine feeding for the deer. The report of Mr. Ross,
accompanied by an eye-sketch made upon the spot, left no doubt of
the existence of an outlet to the eastward, and enabled me to
decide without hesitation upon attempting the passage of the
narrows with the ships, leaving our subsequent route to be
determined on according to the report of Captain Lyon.

Piles of stones and the remains of Esquimaux habitations were
everywhere to be seen, and Mr. Ross met with their marks even on
the highest hills; but none appeared of recent date. The reindeer
were here very numerous. Mr. Ross saw above fifty of them in the
course of his walk, and several others were met with near the
tents. A large one was shot by one of the men, who struck the
animal; as he lay on the ground, a blow on the head with the butt
end of his piece, and, leaving him for dead, ran towards the tents
for a knife to bleed and skin him; when the deer very composedly
got on his legs, swam across a lake, and finally escaped. A small
fawn was the only one killed. Three black whales and a few seals
were playing about near the beach.

Our people being somewhat fatigued with walking, were allowed to
rest till half past one in the morning of the 29th, when, it being
high water, the tents were struck and the boat loaded. I found
that Captain Lyon had returned on board the preceding evening,
having accomplished his object in a shorter time than was
expected.

That no time might be lost in running the ships through the
narrows, I directed three boats from each to be prepared, for the
purpose of sounding every part of this intricate, and, as yet,
unknown passage, which I named after Captain THOMAS HURD, of the
royal navy, hydrographer to the admiralty. Giving to the officer
commanding each boat a certain portion to accomplish, I reserved
for my own examination the narrowest part of the channel; and at
thirty minutes past one P.M., as soon as the flood tide began to
slacken, we left the ships and continued our work till late at
night, when, having received the reports of the officers, and made
out a plan of the channel for each ship, I directed everything to
be in readiness for weighing at the last quarter of the ebb on the
following morning. Much as I lamented this delay, at a period of
the season when every moment was precious, it will not appear to
have been unnecessary, when it is considered that the channel
through which the ships were to be carried did not in some places
exceed a mile in breadth, with half of that space encumbered with
heavy masses of ice, and with an _ebb_ tide of six knots running
through it.

At fifteen minutes past three P.M. on the 30th, a light air of
wind springing up from the eastward, we weighed, and, having
warped out by kedges till we had cleared the shoal-point of the
cove, made sail for the channel, and, with the assistance of the
boats, got the Fury into the fair set of the tide before it made
very strong to the eastward. At a quarter before seven, when in
the narrowest part, which is abreast of a bold headland on the
south shore, where the tide was now driving the ice along at the
rate of five or six knots, the wind came in a sudden gust from the
southwest, scarcely allowing us to reduce and trim our sails in
time to keep the ship off the north shore, which is not so safe as
the other. By carrying a heavy press of canvass, however, we
succeeded in forcing through the ice, but the Fury was twice
turned completely round by eddies, and her sails brought aback
against the helm; in consequence of which she gathered such fresh
sternway against several heavy floe-pieces, that I apprehended
some serious injury to the stern-post and rudder, if not to the
whole frame of the ship. The Hecla got through the narrows soon
after us; but Captain Lyon, wishing to bring away the flags and
staves set up as marks, had sent his little boat away for that
purpose during the continuance of the calm weather. When the
breeze suddenly came on she was still absent, and, being obliged
to wait for some time to pick her up, the Hecla was about dusk
separated several miles from us.

I was sorry to perceive, on the morning of the 1st of September,
that the appearance of the ice was by no means favourable to our
object of sailing to the northward, along the Sturges Bourne
Islands; but at ten A.M., the edge being rather more slack, we
made all sail, with a very light air of southerly wind, and the
weather clear, warm, and pleasant. We were at noon in lat. 66° 03'
35", and in long. 83° 33' 15", in which situation a great deal of
land was in sight to the northward, though apparently much broken
in some places. From N.E. round to S.S.E. there was still nothing
to be seen but one wide sea uninterruptedly covered with ice as
far as the eye could reach.

At forty-five minutes past one P.M. we had come to the end of the
clear water, and prepared to shorten sail, to await some
alteration in our favour. At this time the weather was so warm
that we had just exposed a thermometer to the sun to ascertain the
temperature of its rays, which could not have been less than 70°
or 80°, when a thick fog, which had for some hours been curling
over the hills of Vansittart Island, suddenly came on, creating so
immediate and extreme a change, that I do not remember to have
ever experienced a more chilling sensation. As we could no longer
see a hundred yards around us in any direction, nothing was to be
done but to make the ships fast to the largest piece of ice we
could find, which we accordingly did at two P.M., in one hundred
and fifty-eight fathoms. Just before dark the fog cleared away for
a few minutes, when, perceiving that the wind, which was now
increasing, was likely to drift us too near the islands, we took
advantage of the clear interval to run a mile farther from the
land for the night, where we again made fast to a large floe-piece
in two hundred fathoms.

The wind, drawing round to the northward and westward, on the
morning of the 2d, increased to a fresh gale, which continued to
blow during the night, notwithstanding which, I was in hopes that
the immense size of the floe to which the ships were attached
would enable us to retain our station tolerably. It was
mortifying, therefore, to find, on the morning of the 2d, that we
had drifted more than I remember ever to have done before in the
same time under any circumstances. It was remarkable, also, that
we had not been set exactly to leeward, but past Baffin Island
towards two remarkable hills on Southampton Island, from which we
were at noon not more than seven or eight leagues distant. Thus,
after a laborious investigation which occupied one month, we had,
by a concurrence of unavoidable circumstances, returned to nearly
the same spot on which we had been on the 6th of August. To
consider what might have been effected in this interval, which
included the very best part of the navigable season, had we been
previously aware of the position and extent of the American
Continent about this meridian, is in itself certainly unavailing;
but it may serve to show the value of even the smallest
geographical information in seas where not an hour must be thrown
away or unprofitably employed.

In the afternoon an attempt was made to move, for the mere sake,
it must be confessed, of moving and keeping the people on the
alert, rather than with the slightest prospect of gaining any
ground; but, by the time that we had laid out the hawsers, the
small hole of water that had appeared again closed, and we were
obliged to remain as before.

At four A.M. on the 5th, we cast off and made sail for the land,
with a fresh breeze from the southeast. The ice was closely
packed, against the land near the passage I had intended to try,
and as it appeared slack to the eastward, I determined to run
between the southeast point of Baffin Island and the smaller
islands lying off it. The wind drawing more to the eastward as we
approached the channel, we had several tacks to make in getting
through, but carried a good depth of water on each side, though
its breadth does not exceed three quarters of a mile. As we now
advanced to the northward, we found less and less obstruction, the
main body of the ice having been carried to the southward and
eastward by the late gale, which had in so extraordinary a manner
drifted us in the same direction. This was one of the opportunities
I have before described as the most favourable that ever occur for
making progress in these seas. We had, therefore, a fine run during
the day along the east side of Sturges Bourne Islands; for, having
found the passages between them still choked with ice, we were
obliged to run to the northward with the hope of attaining our
present object, till it was time to look out for an anchorage.
Having first sent the boats to sound, we hauled into a small
bay, where we anchored at dusk in seventeen fathoms, good
holding-ground, though the bottom was so irregular that we had
from five to thirteen close upon our quarter.

We had now once more approached a part of the coast, of which the
thorough and satisfactory examination could not possibly be
carried on in the ships, without incurring constant and, perhaps,
useless risk, and a certain and serious loss of time. I
determined, therefore, to proceed at once upon this service in two
boats, one from each ship. Having communicated my intentions to
Captain Lyon, and requested him to move the ships, when
practicable, into some more secure situation, I left the Fury,
accompanied by Mr. Ross and Mr. Sherer, taking with us our tents,
blankets, and stove, together with four days' provisions and fuel.




CHAPTER IV.

Hoppner's Inlet entered and surveyed by the Boats.--Continuity of
Land there determined.--Proceed to examine another Opening leading
to the Westward.--Favourable Appearance of a continued Passage in
that direction.--Meet with some Esquimaux.--Arrival in Ross Bay,
being the Termination of Lyon Inlet.--Discovery and Examination of
various Creeks.--Return to the Ships, after finding the Land
entirely continuous.--Some Account of the Natural History of this
Part of the Coast.


A thick fog unfortunately coming on just before we left the ships,
prevented us from making choice of any part of the land which
might be the most likely to afford a passage to the northward and
westward. We could only, therefore, direct our course northerly,
with tolerable certainty, by a compass bearing previously taken on
board, and by occasionally obtaining an indistinct glimpse of the
land through the fog. Having rowed four miles, we came to a high
point, round which we turned rather to the westward, and then
landed a little beyond it.

The tents were struck at thirty minutes past three A.M. on the 7th
and our course directed, up the inlet, the weather being calm and
tolerably clear. At three miles and a quarter we passed on our
starboard hand a point of land, which, from the bright colour of
the rocks, composed chiefly of feldspar, obtained the name of _Red
Point_.

Opposite to Red Point was a small opening, which we next proposed
to examine. We had not, however, advanced a mile within the
entrance when the boats grounded, the water becoming more and more
shoal within. As it was plain that no passage could here be found
for the ships, which alone it was my present object to discover, I
did not choose to wait for the flowing of the tide to enable us
farther to explore this place, but determined to prosecute our
examination of the other parts of the coast without delay. There
were here a great number of stones placed in an upright position
in every conspicuous spot, many of them looking like men at a
distance. These marks are generally placed without regard to
regularity, but there were here several lines of them about fifty
yards in length, the stones being four or five yards apart, and
each having a smaller one placed on its top. Having rowed out of
the inlet, we landed at six P.M. in a little bay just outside of
the last night's sleeping-place, pitching the tents on a fine
shingly beach, which was the kind of ground we usually looked out
for towards the conclusion of the day, as affording the softest
bed, consistently with dryness, that nature supplies in this
country. Of such a convenience the men were not sorry to avail
themselves, having rowed above thirty miles since the morning.

The boats were launched at daylight on the 8th, and we soon came
to a much more promising opening on the same shore, about a mile
wide at the entrance, and leading directly to the westward. After
rowing four miles in that direction, we arrived at the mouth of a
bay from three to five miles wide, out of which there did not
appear the least chance of discovering an outlet. As nothing,
however, but rowing round the bay would satisfactorily determine
this, we were proceeding to do so, when we observed in the
northern corner something like a low point overlapping the high
land at the back. Towards this spot we steered, as the readiest
way of completing the circuit of the bay, and half a mile short of
it landed to breakfast.

In the mean time I sent Mr. Ross to one hill, and ascended another
myself, expecting to save the time and trouble of rowing into the
nook. I was not a little astonished to find, from my own and Mr.
Ross's observations, that there was on the other side of the point
a broad and apparently navigable channel, through which the tide
was setting to the northward, at the rate of three or four miles
an hour. I am thus minute in the discovery of this channel, which
afterward promised to be of no small importance, to show how
nearly such a place may be approached without the slightest
suspicion being entertained of its existence, and the consequent
necessity of _close_ examination wherever a passage is to be
sought for.

We continued our examination, and I despatched Mr. Sherer to the
ships for a fresh supply of provisions. On his return on the 10th
we proceeded to the westward. In running along the coast with a
fresh and favourable breeze, we observed three persons standing on
a hill, and, as we continued our course, they followed us at full
speed along the rocks. Having sailed into a small sheltered bay, I
went up, accompanied by Mr. Bushnan, to meet them on the hills
above us. In sailing along the shore we had heard them call out
loudly to us, and observed them frequently lift something which
they held in their hands; but, on coming up to them, they remained
so perfectly mute and motionless, that, accustomed as we had been
to the noisy importunities of their more sophisticated brethren,
we could scarcely believe them to be Esquimaux. There was,
besides, a degree of lankness in the faces of the two men, the
very reverse of the plump, round, oily cheeks of those we had
before seen. Their countenances at the time impressed me with the
idea of Indian rather than of Esquimaux features; but this variety
of physiognomy we afterward found not to be uncommon among these
people. The men appeared about forty and twenty-two years of age,
and were accompanied by a good-looking and good-humoured boy of
nine or ten. They each held in their hand a sealskin case or
quiver, containing a bow and three or four arrows, with a set of
which they willingly parted, on being presented with a knife in
exchange. The first looks with which they received us betrayed a
mixture of stupidity and apprehension, but both wore off in a few
minutes on our making them understand that we wished to go to
their habitations. With this request they complied without
hesitation, tripping along before us for above two miles over very
rough ground, and crossing one or two considerable streams running
from a lake into the sea. This they performed with so much
quickness that we could with difficulty keep up with them, though
they good-naturedly stopped now and then till we overtook them. We
were met on our way by two women, from twenty to twenty-five years
of age, having each a child at her back; they too accompanied us
to their tent, which was situated on a high part of the coast
overlooking the sea. It consisted of a rude circular wall of loose
stones, from six to eight feet in diameter and three in height, in
the centre of which stood an upright pole, made of several pieces
of fir-wood lashed together by thongs, and serving as a support to
the deerskins that formed the top covering. Soon after our arrival
we were joined by a good-looking, modest girl of about eight, and
a boy five years old. Of these nine persons, which were all we now
saw, only the elder man and two of the children belonged to this
tent, the habitations of the others being a little more inland.
The faces of the women were round, plump, tattooed, and, in short,
completely Esquimaux. The _kayak_ or canoe belonging to this
establishment was carefully laid on the rocks close to the
seaside, with the paddle and the man's mittens in readiness beside
it. The timbers were entirely of wood, and covered, as usual, with
sealskin. Its length was nineteen feet seven inches, and its
extreme breadth two feet; it was raised a little at each end, and
the rim or gunwale of the circular hole in the middle was high,
and made of whalebone. A handsome sealskin was smoothly laid
within as a seat, and the whole was sewn and put together with
great neatness. The paddle was double, made of fir, and the ends
of the blades tipped with bone, to prevent splitting.

The fireplace in the tent consisted of three rough stones
carelessly placed on end against one side, and they had several
pots of _lapis ollaris_ for culinary purposes. These people seemed
to us altogether more cleanly than any Esquimaux we had before
seen, both in their persons and in the interior of their tent, in
neither of which could we discover much of that rancid and pungent
smell which is in general so offensive to Europeans. One instance
of their cleanliness which now occurred, deserves, perhaps, to be
noticed, both because this is justly considered rather a rare
quality among Esquimaux, as well as to show in what way they do
sometimes exercise it. When leaving the tent to return to our
boats, I desired one of the seamen to tie the articles we had
purchased into a single bundle, for the convenience of carrying
them; but the elder of the two male Esquimaux, who watched the man
thus employed, would not permit it to be done without excluding a
pot, which, as he explained by wiping the lampblack off with one
of his fingers, would soil a clean sealskin jacket that formed
part of the bundle.

Among the few domestic utensils we saw in the tent was the woman's
knife of the Greenlanders described by Crantz, and resembling, in
its semicircular shape, that used by shoemakers in England. The
most interesting article, however, was a kind of bowl, exactly
similar to that obtained by Captain Lyon from the natives of
Hudson's Strait, being hollowed out of the root of the musk-ox's
horn. As soon as I took the cup in my hand, the boy who was our
first companion, and had since been our constant attendant,
pronounced the word _oomingmuk_, thus affording an additional
confirmation to that obtained on the former voyage, of the musk-ox
being the animal described by the natives of the west coast of
Greenland as having occasionally, though rarely, been seen in that
country.

As soon as the Esquimaux became a little more familiar with us,
they repeatedly asked for _sowik_ (iron), in answer to which we
gave them to understand that they must accompany us to our boats if
they wished to obtain any of this precious article. Accordingly,
the whole group set off with us on our return, the males keeping up
with us, and the women a short distance behind. The whole of the
children carried bundles of the branches of ground willow, which
we had just before seen them bring in for their own use, and
which they seemed to consider an article of barter that might be
acceptable to us. As we returned I noticed a quantity of the _ledum
palustre_, and, having plucked some of it, gave it to the boy to
carry; after which, though he very much disliked its smell, he
gathered every root of it that we came to, and deposited it at our
tents. This lad was uncommonly quick and clever in comprehending
our meaning, and seemed to possess a degree of good-humour and
docility which, on our short acquaintance, made him a great
favourite among us.

We had hitherto been much pleased with our new acquaintance,
who were certainly a good-humoured, decent sort of people. We
therefore loaded them with presents, and endeavoured to amuse them
by showing them the manner of rowing our boats, which were hauled
up on the beach. While the men and children were occupied in
observing this, the women were no less busily employed, near the
tents, in pilfering and conveying into their boots some of our
cups, spoons, and other small articles, such as they could
conveniently secrete. This they accomplished with so much
dexterity, that no suspicion would have been excited of their
dishonesty had not Mr. Sherer fortunately missed a cup which was
required for supper. A general search being instituted in
consequence, and the cargo of the women's boots brought back to
our tents, I directed all our presents to be likewise taken from
the two offenders; and, dismissing the whole party with great
appearance of indignation, thus put an end, for the present, to
our communication with these people.

We spent the two next days in exploring a creek which we called
CULGRUFF, and another on the opposite or eastern shore, which
received the name of NORMAN'S CREEK, and returned to the Hecla on
the evening of the 14th.

I learned from Captain Lyon that the Hecla had just anchored at
her present station, the Fury still remaining at the former place,
into which the ice had lately come so thick as to require the
assistance of all hands from both ships to warp and tow the Hecla
out. Proceeding with a fresh boat's crew towards the Fury, which
we found close beset by thick and heavy ice, we succeeded, after
much difficulty, in hauling the boat through it, and arrived on
board at ten P.M.

As soon as the tide would serve in the offing on the morning of
the 15th, we weighed, and, by means of warping and towing, in
which we were assisted by Captain Lyon's boats, succeeded in
joining the Hecla at her anchorage at three P.M.




CHAPTER V.

Farther Examination in the Boats for the Purpose of Connecting the
Shores of Lyon Inlet with that of Gore Bay.--Continuity of the
Land determined.--Fresh Detention by the Ice.--Boats carried over
Land.--Return to the Ships.--Progress out of the Inlet prevented
by the Ice.--The Fury grounds upon a Rock.--Anchor in Safety
Cove.--Heavy Easterly Gales.--Proceed out of the Inlet.--Arrival
in a Bay on the south Side of Winter Island.--Ships secured in
Winter-quarters.


Again leaving the ships on the 15th, we rowed before sunset
between six and seven miles along the high southwestern land,
passing what appeared a small harbour, with an island near the
middle of the entrance, and landed on a shingly beach near a small
bay or creek, extending three quarters of a mile to the W.N.W.,
and then terminating in a deep, broad valley. We left the shore at
half past four A.M. on the 16th, and in an hour's sailing, with a
fresh northwest wind, came to some loose ice, through which we
continued to make our way till eleven o'clock, when it became so
close that a passage could no longer be found in any direction.
There was also so much young ice in every small interval between
the loose masses, that the boats were much cut about the
water-line in endeavouring to force through it. In order,
therefore, to avoid the risk of being altogether driven from the
shore, I determined to attempt a passage into the bay, which was
three quarters of a mile distant; and in this, after two hours'
labour, we at length succeeded. Finding that the ice was likely to
prove an obstacle of which we could not calculate the extent or
continuance, we began at once to reduce our daily expenditure of
provisions, in order to meet any contingency.

Ascending the hill at daylight on the 17th, we were much
disappointed in finding that, though the ice continued to drive a
little to the S.E., it was even more compact than before, the
loose masses through which we had sailed the preceding day being
now closely set together.

As soon as it was light enough on the 18th to make out the
situation of the ice, which had now drifted considerably to the
southward, we left the bay with a fresh and favourable breeze, and
at a quarter past eight A.M., after a quick run through "sailing
ice," landed to breakfast on the southeast point of this shore,
which afterward received the name CAPE MARTINEAU. Proceeding from
hence with a strong breeze and a considerable sea ahead, but the
flood tide still running slowly with us to the N.W., we rowed
several miles close along the shore, and entered at dusk a little
cove, where the tents were pitched and the boats moored for the
night.

The night being cold, clear, and nearly calm, a quantity of
"bay-ice," half an inch in thickness, had, on the morning of the
19th, formed in the cove, and for some distance outside of it,
which again cut the boats' planks very much, besides occasioning
great loss of time in getting through it. This symptom of
approaching winter, which had now for the first time occurred to
us, rendered it expedient in future to select the most open
beaches for our resting-places at night. After tracing every bend
of the shore which here occurred, we landed at the point called by
Captain Lyon POINT FARHILL, and, ascending the hill to take
angles, obtained a view of Gore Bay, easily recognising every
other feature of the lands discovered by Captain Lyon. A mile or
two of coast was now all that remained to be examined, in order to
determine the connexion of Gore Bay with the rest of the land
recently explored. Proceeding, therefore, as soon as our
observations were finished, we soon after entered the bay, and in
the course of an hour had satisfied ourselves on this point.

The ice remained closely packed on the 21st, as far as we could
see along shore, so that we were still detained in the same place.
Some snow which fell in the course of the preceding night, lightly
powdering the land, had entirely disappeared before evening,
except in places having a northern aspect, where it now
permanently remained for the winter.

On the morning of the 22d the ice was not only as close as ever,
but had forced its way much higher up towards Gore Bay. A party
was therefore sent out to endeavour to procure game farther
inland; and another employed in gathering ground-willow, which was
here abundant and in good condition for fuel. Two bears, a female
and her cub, being probably attracted by the smell of our cooking,
came towards the tents upon the ice, but, upon hearing our voices,
set off in the opposite direction. A good deal of snow fell in
partial showers in the course of the day; it was nearly of that
fine kind which usually falls during the winter of these regions,
but we had flake snow and even light rain some days after this.
The snow, however, now remained undissolved upon the land in all
situations. Our hunting party returned late in the evening without
success, having merely seen a number of reindeer, which the want
of cover prevented their approaching. Seven days out of the nine
for which we were victualled having now elapsed, a party was
selected for walking over to the ships on the following day,
should the ice still continue in its present state.

The ice continuing in the same state, we commenced our work at
break of day on the 24th, and in three journeys had carried all
the lighter part of our baggage over land by eleven o'clock. All
hands then returned for the two boats, across the gunwales of
which the masts and oars were lashed for lifting them, the ground
not allowing us to drag them except for a short space here and
there. By half past one the first boat had been carried over, and,
by the unwearied exertions of the officers and men, we had the
satisfaction of launching the second before four o'clock, the
distance being a mile and a half, and chiefly over rocky and
uneven ground. As soon as we had dined, the boats were reloaded;
and at five o'clock we left the shore. A quantity of ice was still
aground upon the shoals and islets off Cape Martineau, through
which, however, we fortunately found a passage before dark, when,
having cleared every obstacle, we sailed in an open sea and with a
fresh breeze to the northward. Keeping close along the shore to
avoid missing the ships in the dark, our first musket was
immediately answered by a blue-light; and, being guided by the
lights now shown by the ships, we arrived at nine P.M., where we
found that our late detention had excited some alarm for our
safety.

On the 1st of October some small rain fell, which, immediately
freezing, made the decks and ropes as smooth and slippery as if
coated with glass; the thermometer had for several days past
permanently fallen below the freezing point, and sometimes as low
as 20° at night; which change, together with the altered
appearance of the land, and the rapid formation of young ice near
the shores, gave pretty evident notice of the approach of winter.
The commencement of this dreary season in these regions may,
indeed, be fairly dated from the time when the earth no longer
receives and radiates heat enough to melt the snow which falls
upon it. When the land is once covered with this substance, so
little calculated to favour the absorption of heat, the frigorific
process seems to be carried on with increased vigour, defining
very clearly the change from summer to winter, with little or no
immediate interval to which the name of autumn can be distinctly
assigned.

We passed Cape Edwards on the 6th; but on the 8th the formation of
young ice upon the surface of the water began most decidedly to
put a stop to the navigation of these seas, and warned us that the
season of active operations was nearly at an end.

When to the ordinary difficulties which the navigation of the
Polar Seas presents were superadded the disadvantages of a
temperature at or near _zero_, its necessary concomitant the young
ice, and twelve hours of darkness daily, it was impossible any
longer to entertain a doubt of the expediency of immediately
placing the ships in the best security that could be found for
them during the winter, rather than run the risk of being
permanently detached from the land by an endeavour to regain the
continent. We were in hopes of receiving effectual shelter from
the numerous grounded masses, but could only find berths within
one of them in five to six fathoms water. We now, for the first
time, _walked_ on board the ships; and, before night, had them
moved into their places, by sawing a canal for two or three
hundred yards through the ice. The average thickness of the new
floe was already three inches and a quarter; but being in some
places much less, several officers and men fell in, and, from the
difficulty of getting a firm place to rest on, narrowly escaped a
more serious inconvenience than a thorough wetting. The whole
sheet of ice, even in those parts which easily bore a man's
weight, had a waving motion under the feet, like that of leather
or any other tough flexible substance set afloat, a property which
is, I believe, peculiar to salt-water ice.

In reviewing the events of this our first season of navigation, and
considering what progress we had made towards the accomplishment of
our main object, it was impossible, however trifling that progress
might appear upon the chart, not to experience considerable
satisfaction. Small as our actual advance had been towards
Behring's Strait, the extent of coast newly discovered and minutely
explored in pursuit of our object, in the course of the last eight
weeks, amounted to more than two hundred leagues, nearly half of
which belonged to the Continent of North America. This service,
notwithstanding our constant exposure to the risks which intricate,
shoal, and unknown channels, a sea loaded with ice, and a rapid
tide concurred in presenting, had providentially been effected
without injury to the ships, or suffering to the officers and men;
and we had now once more met with tolerable security for the
season. Above all, however, I derived the most sincere satisfaction
from a conviction of having left no part of the coast from Repulse
Bay eastward in a state of doubt as to its connexion with the
continent. And as the mainland now in sight from the hills extended
no farther to the eastward than about a N.N.E. bearing, we ventured
to indulge a sanguine hope of our being very near the northeastern
boundary of America, and that the early part of the next season
would find us employing our best efforts in pushing along its
northern shores.




CHAPTER VI.

Precautions for the Security of the Ships and their Stores--And
for the Health and Comfort of the Crews.--Establishment of
Theatrical Entertainments and Schools.--Erection of an Observatory
and House on Shore.--State of Health at this Period.--Partial
Disruption of the Ice in the Bay.--Anchors and Cables taken to the
Shore.--Gradual Increase of Cold, Appearance of the Aurora
Borealis on several Occasions, and various other Meteorological
Phenomena to the Close of the Year 1821.


Our operations at sea being now at an end for the season, my chief
attention was directed to the security of the ships, and to the
various internal arrangements which experience suggested as
necessary for the preservation of cleanliness, health, and comfort
during the winter, as well as for the economical expenditure of
provisions, fuel, and other stores.

The situation which circumstances obliged us to put up with for
our winter-quarters was by no means as secure as could have been
wished. The bay, though as fine a roadstead as could have been
desired if situated in a more temperate climate, was still only a
roadstead; and, being entirely open to the south, was exposed to a
pressure from the ice in that direction, unless the solid floe now
about to be formed round the ships should shortly become
sufficient to guard them from external injury. There was some
reason, however, to doubt the efficacy of this protection; for, as
the spring-tides approached, the numerous grounded masses around
the shores of the bay began to evince symptoms of instability, one
or two having fallen over, and others turned round; so that these
masses might be looked upon rather as dangerous neighbours, likely
to create a premature disruption of the ice, than as the means of
security, which, in seas not subject to any considerable rise of
tide, they had so often proved to us on former occasions. To
these circumstances was added our uncertainty whether very high
tides during the winter might not crack the ice, thereby exposing
the ships to the double danger of being "nipped" about their
water-line, and of being drifted out of the bay by northerly gales.
That which was, however, perhaps the most to be apprehended, was
the possibility of the ships being forced into shoal water, without
detaching themselves from the mass of ice cemented to their bends,
the weight of which, hanging upon the sides of a ship left aground
by the tide, could not but produce very serious injury.

About the time of our arrival in the bay, when the thermometer had
fallen nearly to _zero_, the condensation of vapour upon the beams
of the lower deck, and in the cabins near the hatchways, commenced
just as it had done at a similar temperature before. To remedy
this evil, no time was lost in lighting a fire in the warming-stove
upon the orlop-deck, everything being previously moved from its
neighbourhood that was likely to create danger. The iron tanks in
the main hatchway were laid bare on the top, and the interstices
between them filled with sand, to form a secure platform in front
of the fire; and the sailroom, bulkheads, and stancheons covered
with sheet copper. Four steady men, of whom one was a petty
officer, were appointed to attend the fire in regular watches,
being made responsible for the due expenditure of the fuel, and
for the safety of everything about the stove. They had likewise
particular charge of the fire-engine, buckets, and two tanks of
water, all of which were kept in the hatchway in constant readiness
in case of accidents. In addition to these precautions, some
general regulations were established for stationing the officers
and men in the event of fire; and a hole was directed to be kept
open in the ice alongside each ship, to ensure at all times a
sufficient supply of water. In twelve hours after lighting the
stove not a drop of moisture remained.

The regulations for the maintenance of due cleanliness among the
ships' companies were principally the same as those established on
the preceding voyage. As a source of rational amusement to the
men, soon after our arrival I proposed to Captain Lyon and the
officers of both ships once more to set on foot a series of
theatrical entertainments, from which so much benefit in this way
had, on a former occasion, been derived. This proposal was
immediately and unanimously acquiesced in; Captain Lyon obligingly
undertook to be our, manager, and, some preparation having been
made for this purpose previous to leaving England, everything was
soon arranged for performing a play on board the Fury once a
fortnight.

To furnish rational and useful occupation to the men on the other
evenings, a school was also established for the instruction of
such of the men as were willing to take advantage of this
opportunity of learning to read and write, or of improving in
those acquirements.

While these internal arrangements were making, the interests of
science were not neglected. A day or two after our arrival, Mr.
Fisher and myself selected a spot for the portable observatory,
which was immediately erected for the purpose of making magnetic
observations; and, as soon as the carpenters could be spared from
the necessary duties of the ships, a house was built for the
reception of the instruments requisite in conducting the other
observations and experiments.

Soon after our arrival here, Captain Lyon expressed a wish that
his officers and men, with himself, should attend divine service
on board the Fury during the continuance of the ships in
winter-quarters. This arrangement was accordingly made, and we
formed one congregation for the rest of the winter. Our lower deck
afforded abundance of accommodation in this respect; some psalm
tunes, which had been purposely set upon an organ, were played at
the proper intervals of the service, and our little church formed
a pleasing and interesting scene to such as are disposed to be
interested by scenes of this nature.

I have before mentioned the myriads of small shrimps (_cancer
nugax_) which for some weeks past had been observed near the
surface of the sea. These insects were found to be still as
numerous as ever in any hole we made in the ice; and such was the
extreme avidity with which they immediately seized upon any meat
put overboard, to thaw or soak for the sake of freshness, that
Captain Lyon to-day sent me a goose to look at, belonging to the
officers of the Hecla, that had been thus deposited within their
reach only eight and forty hours, and from which they had eaten
every ounce of meat, leaving only a skeleton most delicately
cleaned. Our men had before remarked that their meat suffered
unusual loss of substance by soaking, but did not know to what
cause to attribute the deficiency. We took advantage, however, of
the hunger of these depredators to procure complete skeletons of
small animals, for preservation as anatomical specimens, enclosing
them in a net or bag with holes, to which the shrimps could have
access, but which prevented the loss of any of the limbs, should
the cartilage of the joints be eaten. For want of this latter
precaution some specimens were at first rendered imperfect.

A pair of snow-boots were now issued _gratis_ to each individual
in the expedition, being part of a stock of extra warm clothing
liberally furnished by government, to be supplied to the officers
and men at my discretion, as occasion should require. These boots
were made of strong drab cloth, with thick soles of cork, the
slowly conducting property of which substance, together with their
large size, allowing a free circulation to the blood, afforded the
utmost comfort that could be desired. Boots or shoes of _leather_
never retain the warmth long, under circumstances of very severe
exposure.

The wind veering to the S.E. on the 24th and 25th, the thermometer
gradually rose to +23°. I may possibly incur the charge of
affectation in stating that this temperature was much too high to
be agreeable to us; but it is nevertheless the fact, that
everybody felt and complained of the change. We had often before
remarked, that considerable alterations in the temperature of the
atmosphere are as sensibly felt by the human frame at a very low
part of the scale, as in the higher. The difference consists only
in this, that a change from -40° upward to about _zero_ is usually
a very welcome one, while from _zero_ to the freezing point, as in
the instance just alluded to, it becomes, to persons in our
situation, rather an inconvenience than otherwise. This may be
more readily imagined by considering that our clothing, bedding,
fires, and other precautions against the severity of the climate
having been once adapted to a low degree of cold, an increase of
temperature renders them oppressive and inconvenient; while any
reduction (of the first two, at least) is impracticable with
safety. To this must be added, that at this temperature the snow
becomes too soft for convenient walking, and the accumulation of
ice in the crevices and linings of the officers' cabins is
converted into a source of extreme annoyance, which, while it
continues solid, is never experienced. It is true that these
inconveniences occur in a much greater degree in the spring; but
being then hailed as the harbingers of the return of permanent
warmth, it is easy to obviate some, and would be hard to complain
of any of them.

_Nov. 6._--For several days about this period the weather
continued remarkably mild, the thermometer generally rising as
high as from +20° to +28° in the course of the day, from the 6th
to the 16th. Most of our necessary arrangements for the security
of the ships and stores during the winter being now completed, the
people were employed in what they called "rigging the theatre,"
and on the evening of the 9th the officers performed the play of
the "Rivals," to the infinite amusement of both ships' companies.

On the 1st of December there was a space of many miles in which
none of the "old ice" was visible. The sea was here for the most
part covered with a very thin sheet of "young" ice, probably the
formation of a single day, since the westerly wind had driven the
'floes' off the land. The whole of this was in motion with the
tide, which, breaking the thin floes, left several spaces of clear
water. It was observable that, though a considerable frost-smoke
arose from the young ice, it was not so dense as that from the
clear water, immediately over every pool of which a little thick
cloud floated, corresponding as well in size as in situation with
the pond from whence it issued. A number of dovekies were swimming
about the point; and it being desirable, if possible, to obtain
some of them for the sake of ascertaining their plumage at this
season, we hauled the small boat over and launched her. Mr. Ross
succeeded in killing one of the birds, which was preserved as a
specimen, but it was with great difficulty that the boat avoided
being carried away from the shore by the young ice. I was, on this
account, afraid of repeating the attempt during the rest of the
winter. One grouse was seen on shore; it appeared entirely white,
except having its tail black near the tip.

I was this day under the necessity of closing in my stern
dead-lights, and fixing cork shutters between the double
window-frames of my cabin, the temperature having lately fallen
rather low at night; in consequence of which, one of the
chronometers had stopped on the 26th of November. We had before
this time banked the snow up against the sides; but it was now
thrown higher, and its thickness at the bottom increased to about
four feet. Besides this, a bed of snow, three feet deep, was
subsequently laid on the deck over my cabin, and also on the
forecastle over the sick-bay, to assist in retaining the warmth in
those parts of the ship; an office which it seemed to perform very
effectually. It was impossible, however, as the cold increased, to
keep up a tolerably comfortable temperature in the cabin if the
fire was suffered to go out for several hours: for instance, the
night after the above arrangements had been made, the fire was out
for only six hours; and the consequence was, that the thermometer
fell to 27°, and could be got no higher on the following day, in
the after part of the cabin, though only nine feet from the stove,
than 33°. This was, indeed, a most inclement day, the temperature
of the atmosphere having for the first time fallen to -27°,
accompanied by a fresh wind from the northward and westward.

A great squeezing of the young floes took place at the S.E. point
of the island on the 12th. The noise it makes when heard at a
distance very much resembles that of a heavy wagon labouring over
a deep gravelly road; but, when a nearer approach is made, it is
more like the growling of wild animals, for which it was in one or
two instances mistaken. It was, however, rather useful than
otherwise, to encourage the belief that bears were abroad, as,
without some such idea, people are apt to become careless about
going armed.

The thermometer rising to -5° in the course of the 17th, the
weather appeared warm to our feelings. It proved favourable also
for another play, which had been fixed for this night, and the
"Poor Gentleman" was performed by the officers in so admirable and
feeling a manner as to excite uncommon interest among the men, and
to convince me more than ever of the utility of our theatrical
amusements. The 18th was a remarkably clear day, without any of
that cloudiness which usually hung about the southern horizon. The
sun was therefore clearly visible at noon, when such was its oval
shape that its horizontal diameter exceeded the vertical by 4'
07". We had light in the cabin for reading and writing for three
hours and a quarter without candles, and about five hours for
convenient walking.

On the evening of the 24th, being Christmas eve, the ships'
companies were amused by the officers performing the two farces of
"A Roland for an Oliver," and the "Mayor of Garratt." On Christmas
day, divine service on board the Fury was attended by the officers
and crews of both ships. A certain increase was also made in the
allowance of provisions, to enable the people to partake of
Christmas festivities to the utmost extent which our situation and
means would allow; and the day was marked by the most cheerful
hilarity, accompanied by the utmost regularity and good order.
Among the luxuries which our Christmas dinner afforded was that of
a joint of English roast beef, of which a few quarters had been
preserved for such occasions by rubbing the outside with salt, and
hanging it on deck covered with canvass. The low latitude in which
our last summer's navigation was performed would have rendered its
preservation doubtful without the salt.

On the arrival of the last day of the year, it was impossible not
to experience very high gratification in observing the excellent
health and spirits enjoyed by almost every officer and man in both
ships. The only invalid in the expedition was Reid, our
carpenter's mate, and even he was at this period so much improved,
that very sanguine hopes were entertained of his continued
amendment. In consequence of the effectual manner in which the men
were clothed, particularly about the feet, not a single frostbite
had occurred that required medical assistance even for a day; and,
what was more important to us, not a scorbutic symptom had
appeared.

To increase our ordinary issue of anti-scorbutics, liberal as it
already was, we had from the commencement of the winter adopted a
regular system of growing mustard and cress, which the superior
warmth of the ships now enabled us to do on a larger scale than
before. Each mess, both of the officers and ships' company, was
for this purpose furnished with a shallow box filled with mould,
in which a crop could generally be raised in from eight to ten
days. The quantity thus procured on board the Fury now amounted to
about fifty pounds' weight, and before the arrival of spring to
nearly one hundred pounds; and, trifling as such a supply may
appear to those who are in the habit of being more abundantly
furnished, it will not be considered to have been without its use,
when it is remembered how complete a specific for the scurvy
_fresh_ vegetable substance has invariably proved.

With respect to the occupations which engaged our time, during
this season of unavoidable inactivity, I can add little or nothing
to my former account of the manner in which we passed the winter
at Melville Island; for the two situations were so nearly similar,
and our resources necessarily so limited in this way, that it was
not easy to produce much variety in the employment of them. It may
be imagined, and was, indeed, anticipated by ourselves, that want
of novelty was on the present occasion a disadvantage likely to
render our confinement more tedious than before; but this by no
means appeared to be the case: for the men, sufficient employment
may always be found to prevent the possibility of their being
idle; and I have already noticed the auxiliaries to which we had
recourse to assist in promoting this end; while most officers have
resources within themselves, of which scarcely any situation or
circumstances can divest them. What with reading, writing, making
and calculating observations, observing the various natural
phenomena, and taking the exercise necessary to preserve our
health, nobody, I believe, ever felt any symptoms of _ennui_
during our continuance in winter-quarters.

Among the recreations which afforded the highest gratification to
several among us, I may mention the musical parties we were
enabled to muster, and which assembled on stated evenings
throughout the winter, alternately in Captain Lyon's cabin and my
own. More skilful amateurs in music might well have smiled at
these our humble concerts; but it will not incline them to think
less of the science they admire, to be assured that, in these
remote and desolate regions of the globe, it has often furnished
us with the most pleasurable sensations which our situation was
capable of affording: for, independently of the mere gratification
afforded to the ear by music, there is, perhaps, scarcely a person
in the world really fond of it, in whose mind its sound is not
more or less connected with "his far distant home."

With our time thus occupied, our comforts so abundant, and the
prospect to seaward so enlivening, it would, indeed, have been our
own faults had we felt anything but enjoyment in our present
state, and the most lively hopes and expectations for the future.




CHAPTER VII.

Many Foxes caught.--Continued Open Water in the Offing.--Partial
Disruption of the Ice in the Bay.--Meteorological Phenomena, and
Temperature of Animals.--Arrival of a Tribe of Esquimaux.--First
Meeting and subsequent Intercourse with them.--Esquimaux in Want
of Provisions.--Supplied with Bread-dust.--Some Account of a
Sealing Excursion with them.--Fresh Disruption of the Ice in the
Bay.--Closing of the Winter Theatre.--Meteorological Phenomena
till the End of February, 1822.


The first day of the new year was a very severe one in the open
air, the thermometer being down to -22°, and the wind blowing
strong from the northwest. The effect of a breeze upon the
feelings is well known to every person, even in comparatively
temperate climates, but at low temperatures it becomes painful and
almost insupportable. Thus, with the thermometer at -55°, and no
wind stirring, the hands may remain uncovered for ten minutes or a
quarter of an hour without inconvenience; while, with a fresh
breeze, and the thermometer nearly as high as _zero_, few people
can keep them exposed so long without considerable pain.

About noon on the 2d, Captain Lyon observed a considerable body of
snow taken up by the wind and whirled round in a spiral form like
that of a water-spout, though with us the breeze was quite light
at the time. It increased gradually in size till lost behind the
southeast point. As a proof of the difficulty which the hares must
find in obtaining subsistence during the winter, these animals
were at this time in the habit of coming alongside the ships upon
the ice to pick up what they could from our rubbish-heaps. A fox
or two still entered the traps occasionally, and our gentlemen
informed me that they had always been most successful in catching
them after a southerly wind, which they attributed, with great
probability, to the smell of the ships being thus more extensively
communicated over the island. One or two of these poor creatures
had been found in the traps with their tongues almost bitten in
two. The traps made use of for catching these beautiful little
animals were formed of a small cask, having a sliding door like
that of a common mouse-trap, and were baited with oiled meat or
blubber. The whole number caught during the winter was between
eighty and ninety, of which more than seventy were taken before
the end of December. In a single trap of Captain Lyon's, no less
than fifteen were caught in the course of four hours, on the night
of the 25th of November; and the people engaged in watching the
trap remarked, that no sooner had one of these animals been taken
out, and they themselves retired a few yards, than another entered
it. So stupid, indeed, are they in this respect, that, in several
instances, those which had escaped from the ships entered, and
were recaught in the same traps as before.

_Jan. 14._--An ermine, of which the tracks had been traced the
preceding day up the Hecla's stern, and even on board her, Captain
Lyon to-day succeeded in catching in a trap. This beautiful
creature was entirely white, except a black brush to its tail, and
a slight tinge of the usual sulphur or straw colour on the root of
the tail, and also on the fore part of the fore legs. The little
animal being put into a convenient cage, seemed soon to feel
himself perfectly at home, eating, drinking, and sleeping
without any apparent apprehension, but evincing a very decided
determination to resent a too near approach to the wires of his new
habitation.

_Jan. 18._--At a late hour this evening the stovepipe of my cabin
caught fire, which gave us a momentary alarm, but, buckets and
water being at hand, it was soon extinguished. This accident was
occasioned by a quantity of soot collected in the stovepipe, and
yet was not altogether to be attributed to neglect in the persons
appointed to sweep the whole of them twice a week. As the cause of
it is such as is not likely to be anticipated by persons living in
temperate climates, and as the knowledge of it may be serviceable
to somebody destined for a cold one, I shall here explain it. The
smoke of coals contains a certain quantity of water in the state
of vapour. This, in temperate climates, and, indeed, till the
thermometer falls to about 10° below _zero_, is carried up the
chimney and principally diffused in the atmosphere. When the cold
becomes more intense, however, this is no longer the case; for the
vapour is then condensed into water before it can escape from the
stovepipes, within which a mass of ice is, in consequence, very
speedily formed.[*] The vapour thus arrested must necessarily also
detain a quantity of soot, which, being subsequently enclosed in
the ice as the latter accumulates, the brush generally used to
clean the pipes cannot bring it away. By any occasional increase
of temperature, either in the external air or in the fire below,
the ice sometimes thaws, pouring down a stream of water into the
fire, and bringing with it a most pungent and oppressive smell of
soot. For these reasons, as well as to avoid accidents of the
nature above alluded to, it is necessary to sweep the pipes much
more frequently than in warmer climates, and even occasionally to
thaw the ice out of them by a fire made expressly for the purpose.

[Footnote: When the weather was not very severely cold, and a part
of the vapour escaped from the pipe of the galley-fire, the
fore-rigging was always coated with ice, from the smoke passing by
it.]

On the morning of the 1st of February it was reported to me that a
number of strange people were seen to the westward, coming towards
the ships over the ice. On directing a glass towards them we found
them to be Esquimaux, and also discovered some appearance of huts
on shore, at the distance of two miles from the ships, in the same
direction. I immediately set out, accompanied by Captain Lyon, an
officer from each ship, and two of the men, to meet the natives,
who, to the number of five-and-twenty, were drawn up in a line
abreast, and still advanced slowly towards us. As we approached
nearer they stood still, remaining, as before, in a compact line,
from which they did not move for some time after we reached them.
Nothing could exceed their quiet and orderly behaviour on this
occasion, which presented a very striking contrast with the noisy
demeanour of the natives of Hudson's Strait. They appeared at a
distance to have arms in their hands; but what we had taken for
bows or spears proved to be only a few blades of whalebone, which
they had brought either as a peace-offering or for barter, and
which we immediately purchased for a few small nails and beads.
Some of the women, of whom there were three or four, as well as
two children, in this party, having handsome clothes on which
attracted our attention, they began, to our utter astonishment and
consternation, to strip, though the thermometer stood at 23° below
zero. We soon found, however, that there was nothing so dreadful
in this as we at first imagined, every individual among them
having on a complete double suit. The whole were of deerskin, and
looked both clean and comfortable.

However quietly the Esquimaux had awaited our approach, and still
continued to conduct themselves, there was as little apprehension
or distrust visible in their countenances or manner as it was
possible for one strange set of persons to evince on meeting
another. As soon, therefore, as we had bought all that they had to
sell, and made them a number of valuable presents, we expressed by
signs our wish to accompany them to their huts, with which they
willingly complied, and we immediately set out together. On our
way the Esquimaux were much amused by our dogs, especially by a
large one of the Newfoundland breed, that had been taught to fetch
and carry; a qualification which seemed to excite unbounded
astonishment; and the children could scarce contain themselves for
joy when Captain Lyon gave them a stick to throw for the dog to
bring back to them. A child of five or six years old, thus amusing
itself, on such a day and in such a climate, formed by no means
the least characteristic figure of our motley group. An old and
infirm man, supported by a stick, which, indeed, he much needed,
was soon left behind us, his companions seeming to take no notice
of his infirmities, and leaving him without reluctance or apology
to find his way home at his own pace. When we had approached the
huts within a few hundred yards, three of the Esquimaux went on
before us, having previously explained that they were going to
confine their dogs, lest, being frightened at our coming, they
should run away.

When it is remembered that these habitations were fully within
sight of the ships, and how many eyes were continually on the
look-out among us for anything that could afford variety or
interest in our present situation, our surprise may in some degree
be imagined at finding an establishment of five huts, with canoes,
sledges, dogs, and above sixty men, women, and children, as
regularly and, to all appearance, as permanently fixed as if they
had occupied the same spot for the whole winter. If the first view
of the exterior of this little village was such as to create
astonishment, that feeling was in no small degree heightened, on
accepting the invitation soon given us to enter these extraordinary
houses, in the construction of which we observed that not a single
material was used but snow and ice. After creeping through two
low passages, having each its arched doorway, we came to a small
circular apartment, of which the roof was a perfect arched dome.
From this three doorways, also arched, and of larger dimensions
than the outer ones, led into as many inhabited apartments, one on
each side, and the other facing us as we entered. The interior of
these presented a scene no less novel than interesting. The women
were seated on the beds at the sides of the huts, each having her
little fireplace or lamp with all her domestic utensils about her;
the children crept behind their mothers, and the dogs, except the
female ones, which were indulged with a part of the beds, slunk out
past us in dismay. The construction of this inhabited part of the
huts was similar to that of the outer apartment, being a dome
formed by separate blocks of snow, laid with great regularity and
no small art, each being cut into the shape requisite to form a
substantial arch, from seven to eight feet high in the centre, and
having no support whatever but what this principle of building
supplied. I shall not here farther describe the peculiarities
of these curious edifices, remarking only that a cheerful and
sufficient light was admitted to them by a circular window of ice
neatly fitted into the roof of each apartment.

We found our new acquaintance as desirous of pleasing us as we
were ready to be pleased; so that we were soon on good terms with
them all. While we were engaged in examining every part of their
huts, their whole behaviour was in the highest degree orderly,
respectful, and good-humoured. They eagerly received the various
articles that were given them, either in exchange for their own
commodities or as presents, but on no occasion importuned us for
anything, nor did the well-known sound of "pilletay" once escape
from them. We had also great reason to believe that these people
possessed, in no ordinary degree, the quality of honesty; a
quality the more desirable to us, as we had on shore, besides the
house and observatory, all our boats and other articles, which,
had they been disposed to pilfer, it would have required all our
vigilance to guard. If we dropped a glove or a handkerchief
without knowing it, they would immediately direct our attention to
it by pointing; and if the owner had left the hut before they
discovered it, would run out after him to return it. Numberless
instances of a similar kind occurred in the course of our
subsequent communication with them, some of which I shall
hereafter have an opportunity of relating.

After remaining with them a couple of hours, and proposing to
spend the following day among them, we set out on our return to
the ships. Being desirous of trying their disposition to part with
their children, I proposed to buy a fine lad, named _Toolooak_,
for the very valuable consideration of a handsome butcher's knife.
His father, apparently understanding our meaning, joyfully
accepted the knife, and the boy ran into the hut to fetch his
mittens, which seemed to be all that he cared for in leaving his
home. He then set off with us in high spirits, and at first
assisted in drawing a sledge we had purchased to carry our things;
but as he began, by our additional signs, more clearly to
comprehend our true meaning, he gradually relaxed in his zeal to
accompany our party, and, being afterward overtaken by a number of
his companions, he took an opportunity to slink off among some
hummocks of ice, so that, when we arrived on board, Toolooak was
missing.

On our reaching the ships, these people expressed much less
surprise and curiosity than might naturally have been expected on
their first visit, which may, perhaps, in some measure, be
attributed to their being in reality a less noisy kind of people
than most of the Esquimaux to whom we had before been accustomed.
Quiet and orderly, however, as they were disposed to be, this
first visit showed them to be as fond of merriment as their
countrymen are usually considered; for, on Captain Lyon's ordering
his fiddler up on the Hecla's deck, they danced with the men for
an hour, and then returned in high glee and good-humour to their
huts.

On our return on board we were informed that, during our absence
in the morning, a flock of thirteen wolves, the first yet seen,
crossed the ice in the bay from the direction of the huts, and
passed near the ships. These animals, as we afterward learned, had
accompanied or closely followed the Esquimaux on their journey to
the island the preceding day, and they proved to us the most
troublesome part of their _suite_. They so much resemble the
Esquimaux dogs, that, had it not been for some doubt among the
officers who had seen them whether they were so or not, and the
consequent fear of doing these poor people an irreparable injury,
we might have killed most of them the same evening, for they came
boldly to look for food within a few yards of the Fury, and
remained there for some time.

In order to prevent our people from occasioning the Esquimaux any
disturbance or apprehension, I directed that only six from each
ship should be allowed to visit the huts at one time, and that
they should then be always accompanied by an officer. A strict
prohibition was, at the same time, issued against the smallest
article of the ships' stores being given to the people without
permission, on pain of severe punishment.

At an early hour on the 2d we set out, with a large party, on our
proposed excursion to the huts. The natives received us with great
cordiality, though with somewhat more noisy expressions of
pleasure than before; and we soon began a more minute examination
of their habitations and furniture, in which they readily assisted
us, except that they always sat very closely on the deerskins
which composed their beds, under which were stowed such articles
as they were least willing or able to dispose of. They sold,
however, a great number of their things without reluctance; and it
was, indeed, astonishing to see with what eagerness they would,
for the mere sake of change and variety, barter some of their most
indispensable articles for the veriest trifles in our possession.
For instance, a single sewing-needle, of which they possessed
abundance not much inferior to our own, procured from them a
large, well-sharpened _p=anna_, or man's knife, made of stout
iron, for which, in point of absolute utility, a hundred needles
would not have been a fair equivalent. Various other instances of
the same kind occurred, by which, indeed, they were not ultimately
losers, though they certainly would have been so had our
intercourse ended here.

We dined in the huts, and the Esquimaux gladly partook of our
biscuit and meat, and even of a little wine, which, however, they
did not relish. We returned on board about sunset, much gratified
with the interesting day we had passed; having laid the foundation
of that perfect confidence and good understanding which, with
little or no interruption, afterward subsisted between us and our
new acquaintance.

On the morning of the 3d, a number of these people were observed
to set off over the ice to the southwest, to bring, as we
conjectured, either some more of their people or of their property
from their last place of abode. On walking out to the huts after
divine service, however, we found they had been seal-catching, and
had succeeded in taking four. The very small quantity of food
which they had in their huts at first coming, consisting of a
little venison, and the flesh and blubber of the whale and seal,
induced us to suppose they had left some of their provision
behind, and that they would return for it as occasion demanded.
But we now found that even at this rigorous season they were
entirely dependant in this way on their daily exertions, and they
had only removed into their present quarters on account of the
failure of their summer's store, and of the greater facility of
obtaining seals at Winter Island than where the sea was more
closely and continually frozen.

On the 4th a number of Esquimaux came to the ships, and we took
the opportunity of getting them to go through the process of
building a snow hut for our amusement and information. From the
quickness with which they completed this, our surprise at the
sudden appearance of their village ceased; as we now saw that two
or three hours would be more than sufficient to complete the whole
establishment just as we at first found it. They were then taken
on board, and derived great amusement from our organ, and from
anything in the shape of music, singing, or dancing, of all which
they are remarkably fond. Nor can I here omit a striking instance
of the honesty of these people which occurred to-day. Some of the
gentlemen of the Hecla had purchased two of their dogs, which had
the preceding evening made their escape and returned to the huts.
After the departure of the Esquimaux to-day, we were surprised to
find that they had left two dogs carefully tied up on board the
Fury, which, on inquiry, proved to be the animals in question, and
which had been thus faithfully restored to their rightful owners.

On the 5th a number of the natives came on board, according to
promise, to rebuild the hut in a more substantial manner, and to
put a plate of ice into the roof, as a window, which they did with
great quickness as well as care, several of the women cheerfully
assisting in the labour. The men seemed to take no small pride in
showing in how expeditious and workmanlike a manner they could
perform this; and the hut, with its outer passage, was soon
completed. From this time they were in the constant habit of
coming freely to the ships; and such as it was not always
convenient to admit usually found very profitable employment in
examining the heaps of ashes, sand, and other rubbish on the
outside, where their trouble was well repaid by picking up small
scraps of tin or iron. All that they found in this manner we
allowed them to consider as their lawful property; but were very
particular in preventing their handling anything on board without
permission.

The wolves had now begun to do us some damage; for not even the
sails that were fastened round the house and observatory could
escape their ravenous fangs, and they had thus, in the course of a
single night, much injured two of our studding-sails. We set traps
for them on the ice, and also large shark-hooks, secured with
chains and baited with meat; but the former they entered and
destroyed, and the latter was always found broken or bent, without
securing the depredators. These animals were indeed so hungry and
fearless as to take away some of the Esquimaux dogs in a
snow-house near the Hecla's stern, though the men were at the time
within a few yards of them.

From the circumstance of Captain Lyon and myself having
accidentally gone into different huts on our first visits to the
village (for by this name I believe we must venture to dignify the
united abodes of more than sixty human beings), particular
individuals among the Esquimaux had already, in a manner, attached
themselves to each of us. Captain Lyon now informed me that one of
his acquaintance, a remarkably fine and intelligent young man,
named _=Ay~ok~et_, had given him to understand that he had
somewhere or other seen _Kabloona_[*] people like ourselves only a
few months ago. This being the case, there seemed no reason why,
if it were made worth his while, he should not be able to see them
again in the course of next summer. Anxious to profit by this
unexpected mode of communication, I requested Captain Lyon to
endeavour to direct Ayoket's attention to the scheme of conveying
a letter from us to the persons of whom he spoke.

[Footnote: European.]

On the 7th I paid another visit to the huts, where I found
scarcely anybody but women and children, the whole of the men,
with the exception of the two oldest, having gone on a sealing
excursion to the northeastern side of the island. One of the
women, named _Il=igliuk_, a sister of the lad Toolooak, who
favoured us with a song, struck us as having a remarkably soft
voice, an excellent ear, and a great fondness for singing, for
there was scarcely any stopping her when she had once begun. We
had, on their first visit to the ships, remarked this trait in
Iligliuk's disposition, when she was listening for the first time
to the sound of the organ, of which she seemed never to have
enough; and almost every day she now began to display some of that
superiority of understanding for which she was so remarkably
distinguished. A few of the women learned several of our names
to-day, and I believe all thought us Angekoks[*] of a very
superior class, when we repeated to them all round, by the
assistance of our books, the names of all their husbands, obtained
on board the preceding day. On our way back to the ships we saw a
party of them, with their dogs, returning over the hill from the
northeastward; and we afterward met another of eight or ten, who
had walked round by the southeast point on the ice, all alike
unsuccessful, after being out in the wind for six hours, with the
thermometer from 18 to 22 degrees below _zero_. Thus hardly did
these people obtain their daily subsistence at this severe season
of the year.

[Footnote: Sorcerers or wizards, pronounced as written above in
Greenland; but at Winter Island _Ang-~et-k~ook_; and by the people
at Igloolik, _An-n~at-k~o_.]

A wolf being caught in one of the traps this evening, which was so
close as to be easily watched from the ship, a party of the
officers ran out to secure the depredator, and fired two balls
into the trap at once to despatch him. Finding, after this, that
he continued to bite a sword that was thrust in, a third shot was
fired at him. The trap was then sufficiently opened to get his
hind legs firmly tied together, after which, being considered
tolerably secure, he was pulled out of the trap, which, however,
his head had scarcely cleared, when he furiously flew at Mr.
Richards's throat, and would certainly have done him some serious
mischief had not that gentleman, with great presence of mind,
seized the animal in his turn by the throat, squeezing him with
all his force between both hands. This made the wolf relinquish
his first attempt, and Mr. Richards only suffered by a bite in his
arm and another in his knee, which, on account of the thickness of
his clothes, were happily not severe ones. As for the wolf, he
prudently took to his heels, though two of them were still tied
together; and, being favoured by the momentary confusion,
occasioned by his late rencounter with Mr. Richards, succeeded in
escaping his pursuers. He was found dead the following day at the
distance of three quarters of a mile from the ships.

On the 8th we were visited by a musical party of females,
consisting only of a few individuals expressly invited for this
purpose. A number of the officers assembled in the cabin to hear
this vocal concert, while Mr. Henderson and myself took down the
notes of their songs, for which, indeed, they gave us every
opportunity, for I thought they would never leave off. We
afterward amused them with our little band of flutes and violins,
and also by some songs, with the whole of which they were
extremely well pleased. I feared several of them, and especially
Iligliuk, would go into fits with delight when we introduced into
our song some of their names mingled with our own. While most of
us were thus employed, Captain Lyon took the opportunity of making
drawings of some of the women, especially of _Togolat_, the
prettiest of the party, and, perhaps, of the whole village. She
was about six-and-twenty years of age, with a face more oval than
that of Esquimaux in general, very pretty eyes and mouth, teeth
remarkably white and regular, and possessing in her carriage and
manners a degree of natural gracefulness, which could not be hid
even under the disguise of an Esquimaux woman's dress, and, as was
usual with Togolat, the dirtiest face of her whole tribe. Her
husband, _Ewerat_, a little ugly man of about five-and-forty, was
the only individual among them laying claim to the title of
Angetkook, and was, in reality, a sensible, obliging man, and a
first-rate seal-catcher. They had two children, one of which, a
little girl, Togolat still occasionally suckled, and, according to
custom, carried in the hood behind her back; the other, a boy
about eight years of age, quite an idiot, deaf and dumb from his
birth, and squinting most horribly with both eyes.

Finding that these poor creatures were now really in want of food,
for the men had again returned from an unsuccessful excursion, I
was happy to avail myself of a hint given to me by Captain Lyon,
to furnish them occasionally with a small supply of bread-dust, of
which we had two or three casks in each ship. Our present party
was therefore, in addition to other articles, supplied with
several pounds, which they immediately expressed their intention
to take home to their children. Several of them visited the ships
as usual on the 9th, and among the rest Ka-oong-ut and his son
Toolooak. The old gentleman was not a favourite with us, being the
only one who had yet begun to tease us by constant begging. We had
often expressed displeasure at this habit, which, after a day or
two's acquaintance, began to be extremely troublesome; but I had
to-day to take cognizance of his stealing a nail, of which I
determined to take a rather serious notice, as it might otherwise
lead to more extensive theft. I therefore collected all the other
Esquimaux who were on board, and having in their presence
expressed great indignation at this conduct, turned the offender
away in disgrace. Some of those best acquainted with us were
afterward taken into the cabin, where our sentiments were more
fully explained to them. Among these I was not sorry to have
Toolooak and Iligliuk, who would not fail to report at the huts
all our proceedings, but who did not appear to consider themselves
in the slightest degree implicated in their father's offence, or
concerned in his disgrace. The people of the huts being much in
want of food, we again distributed some bread-dust among them;
taking care to send a portion to the infirm old man, _Hik-k~ei-~er=
a_, by _Ok~otook_, the husband of Iligliuk, a fine, active, manly
fellow of about two-and-thirty, who, as we were pleased to find the
next day, had punctually executed his commission.

The Esquimaux went out on the 10th to endeavour to catch seals as
usual, but returned unsuccessful after several hours' labour. As
it was now evident that their own exertions were not at all times
sufficient to procure them food at this season, and that neither
indolence nor any idea of dependance on our charity induced them
to relax in those exertions, it became incumbent on us carefully
to attend to their wants, and, by a timely and judicious
application of the slender resources we had set aside for their
use, prevent any absolute suffering among them. We therefore sent
out a good meal of bread-dust for each individual, to be divided
in due proportion among all the huts. The necessity of this supply
appeared very strongly from the report of our people, who found
some of these poor creatures actually gnawing a piece of hard
sealskin with the hair on it, while few of the huts had any lamp
alight. It must be remembered that the failure of their
seal-fishery always involves a double calamity, for it not only
deprives them of food, but of fuel for their lamps. When this is
the case, not to mention the want of warmth and light in the huts,
they are also destitute of the means of melting snow for water,
and can therefore only quench their thirst by eating the snow,
which is not only a comfortless, but an ineffectual resource. In
consequence of this, it was surprising to see the quantity of
water these people drank whenever they came on board; and it was
often with difficulty that our coppers could answer this
additional demand. I am certain that Toolooak one day drank nearly
a gallon in less than two hours. Besides the bread-dust, we also
supplied them to-day with a wolf's carcass, which, raw and frozen
as it was, they ate with a good appetite; and, indeed, they had
not the means of cooking, or even thawing it. I cannot here omit a
pleasing trait in their character, observed by our people who
carried out their supplies; not a morsel of which would the
grown-up people touch till they had first supplied the wants of
their hungry little ones.

On the morning of the 12th, Okotook and his uncle _Arnaneelia_, a
sensible and worthy man of about five-and-forty years of age,
coming on board from their fishing, we showed them the stage and
scenery that were just put up, and invited them and their wives to
the play about to be performed this evening. They accordingly went
back and brought the women, who understood they were to be present
at some diversion, though they did not well know what. It was
enough, however, with Iligliuk, just to make the motion of turning
the handle of the organ, which, conveying to her mind the idea of
music and merriment, was always sure to put her immediately into
high spirits. As they came three or four hours before the
performance of "John Bull" was to commence, they began to grow
tired and impatient, especially when it became dusk, and candles
were brought into the cabin. The men then explained that it would
soon be dark, and that, in returning late to their huts, they
should disturb the people who would then be fast asleep there.
Finding that they grew uneasy, I made no objection to their
returning, and sent them off loaded with bread-dust and some oil
for each of their lamps. They remained long enough, however, to
have a peep at _Mrs. Brulgruddery_, whose dress, when they were
informed it was that of a _kabl=o=ona nooll=e=e-~o_ (European
wife), they were very anxious in examining, and seemed to grieve
at going away without sharing the diversion which this and other
preparations seemed to promise.

On the 13th, our friends at the huts were fortunate in procuring
three seals, an event that created great joy at the village. Mr.
Allison, who happened to be there when one of these prizes was
announced, informed me that there was a general outcry of joy; all
the Women hurried to the doors of the huts, and the children
rushed to the beach to meet the men dragging along the prize. One
of these little urchins, to complete the triumphant exultation
with which this event was hailed, instantly threw himself on the
animal, and clinging fast to it, was thus dragged to the huts.
Each woman was observed to bring her _=o=otk~oos~eek_, or
cooking-pot, to the hut where the seal was dissected, for the
purpose of receiving a share of the meat and blubber.

On the 15th it blew a strong gale from S.W. to W.N.W., and the
thermometer, either on account of the strength of the wind or its
having occasionally some southing in it, rose to -4°, being the
highest temperature registered in our journals since the 27th of
December preceding. I had agreed with Okotook to accompany him on
a sealing excursion, but the day proved too inclement, the
Esquimaux not going out themselves, though it was not very often
that the weather could prevent them. Considering it desirable to
increase, by all the means in our power, the chances of these
people giving information of us, we distributed among several of
the men large round medallions of sheet copper, having these words
punched through them: "H.B.M.S. Fury and Hecla, all well, A.D.
1822." These we suspended by a piece of white line round their
necks, giving them to understand that they were to show them to
any Kabloona people they might ever meet with in future. Similar
ornaments, but of a smaller size, were subsequently presented to
many of the women, having on them the words "Fury and Hecla,
1822."

Early on the morning of the 16th, observing a party of the
Esquimaux, equipped with spears, passing near the ships, I joined
them, accompanied by Mr. Bushnan and one or two others. Having
crossed the point of the island, they walked over the ice to the
eastward, where we did not overtake them till they had got above a
mile and a quarter from the shore. This party consisted of eight
persons, among whom we were glad to find Arnaneelia, Okotook,
Toolooak, _Pootooalook_ his elder brother, and one or two others
whom we knew. They had by this time, however, separated into two
or three different parties, stationed at the distance of half a
mile from each other, along the edge of the floe, beyond which, to
the eastward, there was clear water as far as we could see for
frost-smoke.

The party we at first joined were seated on a high hummock of ice,
with their spears in their hands, looking out for seals. After we
had talked to them for a few minutes, Okotook suddenly started up
and set off along the edge of the ice, without giving us at his
companions the least warning. The latter seemed so much accustomed
to this, that they took no farther notice than by immediately
following him, and we did the same; the whole party walking at a
very quick rate, and the natives keeping their heads constantly
turned towards the sea to look out for seals. After being thus
engaged for an hour and a half, we judged, from the motions of a
party at some distance beyond us, that they had game in view. As
we approached them, Okotook evidently began to be apprehensive
that we, who did not understand the matter, would spoil their
sport. To prevent this, he did the most civil thing that could
well have been devised, which was, to send his companions one by
one to the spot, and to remain with us himself, keeping us at such
a distance as to allow us to see their proceedings, without
alarming the animal they were in pursuit of. The other seven
Esquimaux, now forming one party, disposed themselves into a
single line, so as to make as small an appearance as possible in
the direction in which they were going, and in this manner crept
very cautiously towards the margin of the floe. On a sudden they
all stooped down quite low to hide themselves, and continued thus
a quarter of an hour, during which time they prepared their lines
and spears; and then, when the animal appeared to be intercepted
from their view, again took the opportunity of gaining a few paces
upon him, in the same cautious manner as before. When they had
been thus occupied for a full hour, alternately creeping and
stooping down, the seal, which had been lying on the ice, took the
water, and they then gave up their chase. During this time,
Okotook could scarcely restrain his impatience to be nearer the
scene of action; and when we produced a spyglass, which appeared
to bring his companions close to us, he had not words to express
his surprise and satisfaction. In a short time he held it as
steadily as we did, and explained by signs every motion he
observed.

As soon as they had given up the seal they had been watching, the
whole party seemed with one accord to turn their steps homeward,
in which direction, being that of the ships also, we were by this
time not sorry to accompany them. We were now between three and
four miles northeast of the ships, and full a mile and a half from
any part of the shore. In the open water beyond the floe, the tide
was running two knots to the northward, and as the ice on which we
stood had been formed only within the last fortnight, and a sheet
as substantial as this had before been carried away by the stream
it was impossible not to feel some apprehension lest we might thus
be detached from the shore, an accident that has been known to
happen to Esquimaux ere now,[*] and has probably more frequently
befallen them, when none have survived to tell the tale.

[Footnote: Crantz, London edition, 1820, Appendix, p. 310.]

As we returned towards the land, we came to a small rising on the
level surface of the floe not larger than a common molehill, and
of much the same shape, at which one of the Esquimaux immediately
stopped. His companions, still walking on, called us away,
explaining that what we saw was the work of a seal, and that it
was probable the animal was about to complete his hole and to come
up on the ice, in which case the man would endeavour to kill him.
We watched the man at the hole, however, with a glass, for more
than half an hour, observing him constantly putting his head down
towards the ice, as if in the act of listening for the seal, but
without otherwise changing his position; after which he followed
us on board without success.

If, however, a man has any reason to suppose that a seal is at
work beneath, he immediately attaches himself to the place, and
seldom leaves it till he has succeeded in killing the animal. For
this purpose, he first builds a snow-wall about four feet in
height, to shelter him from the wind, and, seating himself under
the lee of it, deposites his spear, lines, and other implements
upon several little forked sticks inserted into the snow, in order
to prevent the smallest noise being made in moving them when
wanted. But the most curious precaution to the same effect
consists in tying his own knees together with a thong, so securely
as to prevent any rustling of his clothes, which might otherwise
alarm the animal. In this situation a man will sit quietly
sometimes for hours together, attentively listening to any noise
made by the seal, and sometimes using the _keip-kuttuk_, an
instrument hereafter described, in order to ascertain whether the
animal is still at work below. When he supposes the hole to be
nearly completed, he cautiously lifts his spear, to which the line
has been previously attached, and, as soon as the blowing of the
seal is distinctly heard, and the ice consequently very thin, he
drives it into him with the force of both arms, and then cuts away
with his _panna_ the remaining crust of ice, to enable him to
repeat the wounds and get him out. The _neitiek_ is the only seal
killed in this manner, and, being the smallest, is held while
struggling either simply by hand, or by putting the line round a
spear with the point stuck into the ice. For the _oguke_, the line
is passed round the man's leg or arm; and for a walrus, round his
body, his feet being at the same time firmly set against a hummock
of ice, in which position these people can, from habit, hold
against a very heavy strain. Boys of fourteen or fifteen years of
age consider themselves equal to the killing of a _neitiek_, but
it requires a full-grown person to master either of the larger
animals.

On the 17th, a number of the Esquimaux coming before the church
service, we gave them to understand, by the sun, that none could
be admitted before noon, when they quietly remained outside the
ships till divine service had been performed. We then endeavoured
to explain to Iligliuk that every seventh day they must not come
to the ships, for, without any intention of offending, they had
become rather an annoyance in this way. They now brought with them
a great many little canoes and paddles, sledges, figures of men
and women; and other toys, most of them already bespoke by the
officers and men, and the rest for sale.

Toolooak, who now considered himself as quite privileged to find
his way into the cabin without a conductor, and was not backward
in thus practising his newly-acquired art of opening and shutting
the door, sat with me for a couple of hours on the 18th, quietly
drawing faces and animals, an occupation to which he took a great
fancy; and we often were reminded, by this circumstance, of a
similar propensity displayed by his amiable countryman, our
lamented friend John Sackhouse. We soon found that Toolooak
possessed a capacity equal to anything he chose to take an
interest in learning; and could he, at his present age, have been
voluntarily removed from his companions, and his attention
directed to the acquirement of higher branches of knowledge than
that of catching seals, he would have amply repaid any pains
bestowed upon his education. I had always entertained great
objection to taking any such individual from his home, on the
doubtful chance of benefiting himself, or of his doing any service
to the public as an interpreter. My scruples on this head had
hitherto been confined to the consideration due to the individual
himself, and to the relatives he leaves behind. In our present
case, however, not the smallest public advantage could be derived
from it; for it had long ago become evident that we should soon
know more of the Esquimaux language than any of them were likely
to learn of English in any reasonable period of time. I was
therefore far from desiring to receive from Toolooak an answer in
the affirmative, when I to-day plainly put the question to him,
whether he would go with me to _Kabloona noona_ (European
country). Never was a more decisive negative given than Toolooak
gave to this proposal. He eagerly repeated the word _na-o_ (no)
half a dozen times, and then told me that if he went away his
father would cry. This simple but irresistible appeal to paternal
affection, his decisive manner of making it, and the feelings by
which his reply was evidently dictated, were just what could have
been wished. No more could be necessary to convince those who saw
it, that these people may justly lay equal claim with ourselves to
these common feelings of our nature; and, having once satisfied
myself of this, I determined never again to excite in Toolooak's
mind another disagreeable sensation, by talking to him on this
subject.

Besides the toys and models I have mentioned above, as articles of
barter with these people, we also employed them more usefully in
making wooden shades for the eyes, after their own method, as the
time was fast approaching when some such precaution would become
necessary to guard the eyes from the excessive glare of reflected
light. There was also a considerable _trade_ established in
mittens, which being made of prepared sealskin, and nearly
water-tight, were particularly serviceable to our men when
constantly handling the leadlines in the summer. In this manner we
contrived to turn our new acquaintance to some little account.

Among the natives who visited the Fury to-day was Ewerat; of whom
I have already spoken as _Ang-et-kook_, or chief sorcerer of the
tribe, a distinction with which he had made some of our gentlemen
acquainted at one, of their earliest visits to the huts. Being
desirous of seeing him perform some of the tricks which had
acquired for him this pre-eminence, I requested him to indulge me
with a sight of them. After some little demur, he began to make
his lips quiver, then moved his nose up and down, gradually closed
his eyes, and increased the violence of his grimaces till every
feature was hideously distorted; at the same time, he moved his
head rapidly from side to side, uttering sometimes a snuffling
sound, and at others a raving sort of cry. Having worked himself
into this ridiculous kind of phrensy, which lasted, perhaps, from
twenty to thirty seconds, he suddenly discontinued it, and
suffered his features to relax into their natural form; but the
motion of his head seemed to have so stupified him, as indeed it
well might, that there remained an unusual vacancy and a drowsy
stare upon his countenance for some time afterward. Being pressed
to repeat this piece of buffoonery, he did so two or three times;
and on one occasion Togolat asked him, in a serious tone, some
questions respecting me, which he as seriously answered. In
general, however, the women paid little attention to his grimaces,
and the whole ended with a hearty laugh from all parties.

I had to-day some conversation with a woman named Appokiuk, whom
Iligliuk had mentioned as having seen Kabloona people before us.
This woman was gifted, however, with such a volubility of tongue,
that speaking, as she did, in a language very imperfectly known to
us, she gave no time for questions, and therefore afforded little
information. All we could make out for certain was, that she had,
within a year past, seen two _Kabloona oomiak_ (whether ships or
boats was still doubtful[*]), and that her husband was now far
away. From all this we concluded that she had been far enough to
the southward to see the Hudson's Bay ships in the course of their
annual voyage; and this account gave us very sanguine hopes of
being thus able to communicate with them by means of some of the
Esquimaux.

[Footnote: These people apply the word _oomiak_ to any vessel
larger than a canoe.]

On the 20th, a number of our new friends having been allowed upon
the upper deck, an old woman named _Ay=ug-g~a-lo~ok_ stole our
cooper's punch, which she was showing to her companions alongside
the Hecla just afterward, when Lieutenant Hoppner observed it, and
sent her back with an escort. It was impossible not to admit that
the fault was chiefly on our side, in permitting these poor people
to roam about too freely amid temptations which scarcely anything
human could have withstood; but as it was necessary to take some
notice of it, I went through nearly the same process as with
Kaoongut, and dismissed her with great appearance of indignation
to the huts. We were glad to find that their wants had there been
well supplied to-day, three seals having been caught. They had
lately, indeed, been tolerably successful in general, and required
but little of our assistance. Mr. Elder observing one of their
dogs attacked by several wolves, and hastening to the spot with
his gun, found that these animals had made such quick work in the
partition of their prey, that, though he reached the scene of
action in a few minutes, and the dog had at first made considerable
resistance, only one of its hind legs remained, each wolf having
run off with its share. It is remarkable that these creatures
had never entered our traps since the moon had declined to the
southward, whereas not a night elapsed before that without their
going to them. The Esquimaux had in theirs caught only a fox.

During the eclipse of the sun which took place to-day, the
diminution, of light was very considerable, but the weather was
unfavourable for observing it for any useful purpose. Captain Lyon
remarked, that some of the Esquimaux, who were on alarmed at this
phenomenon, which, indeed, made a general bustle among them. Two
of them were found on the ice lying on their faces, but it was not
ascertained whether their superstitions on this subject were the
same as those of their brethren in Greenland.

Mr. Henderson being desirous of seeing something of the customs of
these people during the hours of darkness, obtained my permission
to pass the night at the huts, accompanied by Mr. Griffiths. Soon
after they left the ships in the evening it came on to blow strong
from the northwest, with much snowdrift, so that, losing the
tracks, they with difficulty found the village. Returning on board
in the course of the next forenoon, we were pleased to hear that
they had met with every attention, and especially from Okotook,
with whom they lodged. As they had slept in Kaoongut's hut, one
side of which was occupied by Okotook and his family, the old
fellow thought it a good opportunity to make up the quarrel
occasioned by his dishonesty; and he accordingly made his
appearance on board to-day for the first time since that event.
Toolooak was deputed to bring his father down into the cabin, where
a formal reconciliation took place, to the great satisfaction of
the latter, who had found out that to be out of favour with us was
attended with the serious consequence of being also out of pocket.
It was laughable to observe the pains he now took to impress on the
minds of every person he saw that he was no longer a _tigliktoke_,
by which name he had lately been distinguished; for he seemed to
think that my receiving him again into favour was a perfect
absolution from his offense.

On the 23d I paid another visit to the huts, and found the greater
part of the men absent on their sealing excursions. We thought,
however, that, except on pressing occasions, one man was left in
each hut to keep an eye on the conduct of the women, and this was
the case to-day. The huts had in the interior assumed a somewhat
different appearance since I had last seen them; the roofs were
much blackened by the smoke of the lamps, and the warmth had in
most parts given them a glazed and honey-combed surface; indeed,
the whole of the walls had become much thinner by thawing, so that
the light was more plainly visible through them. The snow also, on
which the lamps stood, was considerably worn away, so as to
destroy, in great measure, the regularity of the original plan of
construction. To these changes might be added that of a vast
quantity of blood and oil that now defaced the purity of the snowy
floor, and emitted effluvia not very agreeable to European noses;
so that, upon the whole, it may be imagined that our first
impressions of the comfort and cleanliness of these habitations
were more favourable than their present state was calculated to
excite.

To the original apartments they had now also added various small
places for stores, communicating with the huts from within, and
looking something like our ovens, though without any door to them.
In some of these they deposited their upper jackets, which they
usually take off in coming into their huts, as we do a greatcoat;
while in smaller ones, like little shelves in a recess, they kept
various articles of their Kabloona riches. These and similar
alterations and additions they were constantly making throughout
the winter; for their inexhaustible materials being always at
hand, it required but little time and labour to adopt any
arrangement that might suit their convenience.

After distributing a number of presents in the first four huts, I
found, on entering the last, that Pootooalook had been successful
in bringing in a seal, over which two elderly women were standing,
armed with large knives, their hands and faces besmeared with
blood, and delight and exultation depicted on their countenances.
They had just performed the first operation of dividing the animal
into two parts, and thus laying open the intestines. These being
taken out, and all the blood carefully baled up and put into the
_ootkooseek_, or cooking-pot, over the fire, they separated the
head and flippers from the carcass, and then divided the ribs. All
the loose scraps were put into the pot for immediate use, except
such as the two butchers now and then crammed into their mouths,
or distributed to the numerous and eager by-standers for still
more immediate consumption. Of these morsels the children came in
for no small share, every little urchin that could find its way to
the slaughterhouse running eagerly in, and, between the legs of
the men and women, presenting its mouth for a large lump of raw
flesh, just as an English child of the same age might do for a
piece of sugar-candy. Every now and then, also, a dog would make
his way towards the reeking carcass, and, when in the act of
seizing upon some delicate part, was sent off yelping by a heavy
blow with the handles of the knives. When all the flesh is
disposed of, for a portion of which each of the women from the
other huts usually brings her ootkooseek, the blubber still
remains attached to the skin, from which it is separated the last;
and the business being now completed, the two parts of the hide
are rolled up and laid by, together with the store of flesh and
blubber. During the dissection of their seals, they have a curious
custom of sticking a thin filament of skin, or of some part of the
intestines, upon the foreheads of the boys, who are themselves
extremely fond of it, it being intended, as Iligliuk afterward
informed me, to make them fortunate seal-catchers.

The seals which they take during the winter are of two kinds--the
_Neitiek_, or small seal (_phoca hispida_), and the _Oguke_, or
large seal (_phoca barbata_). These and the _E=i-~u-~ek_, or
walrus, constitute their means of subsistence at this season; but,
on this particular part of the coast, the latter are not very
abundant, and they chiefly catch the neitiek. The animal we had
now seen dissected was of that kind, and with young at the time. A
small one taken out of it had a beautiful skin, which, both in
softness and colour, very much resembled raw silk; but no
inducement could make Pootooalook part with it, he having destined
it for that night's supper.

After quitting this scene of filth, I found, on returning to
Kaoongut's hut, that Toolooak had been no less successful than his
brother, and that the same operation was also performing here.
Having, therefore, explained to Iligliuk that none of them were to
come to the ships the following day, I had no inclination to see
the process repeated, and was glad to take my leave.

On the 28th, Okotook and Iligliuk coming on board, an occurrence
took place, which, as it shows the disposition of the Esquimaux,
and especially of one of the most intelligent and interesting
among them, I may here relate. Some time before, Iligliuk, who,
from the superior neatness and cleanliness with which she
performed her work, was by this time in great request as a
seamstress, had promised to cover for me a little model of a
canoe, and had, in fact, sent it to me by the sergeant of marines,
though I had not rightly understood from the latter from which of
the women it came. Believing that she had failed in her promise, I
now taxed her with it, when she immediately defended herself with
considerable warmth and seriousness, but without making me
comprehend her meaning. Finding that she was wasting her words
upon me, she said no more till an hour afterward, when the
sergeant accidentally coming into the cabin, she, with the utmost
composure, but with a decision of manner peculiar to herself, took
hold of his arm to engage his attention, and then looking him
steadfastly in the face, accused him of not having faithfully
executed her commission to me. The mistake was thus instantly
explained, and I thanked Iligliuk for her canoe; but it is
impossible for me to describe the quiet, yet proud satisfaction
displayed in her countenance at having thus cleared herself from
the imputation of a breach of promise.

There being among the presents with which we were supplied a
number of pikes, we presented two or three of these from each ship
to the most deserving of the Esquimaux, to serve as staves for
their spears; and valuable ones they proved to them. Upon each
pike were marked, by small nails driven into the wood, the words
"Fury and Hecla, 1822."

Almost the whole of these people were now affected with violent
colds and coughs, occasioned by a considerable thawing that had
lately taken place in their huts, so as to wet their clothes and
bedding; though we had, as yet, experienced no great increase of
temperature. From the nature of their habitations, however, their
comfort was greater, and their chance of health better, when the
cold was more severe. On this account, they began to make fresh
alterations in these curious dwelling-places, either by building
the former apartments two or three feet higher, or adding others,
that they might be less crowded. In building a higher hut, they
constructed it over, and, as it were, concentric with the old one,
which is then removed from within. It is curious to consider that,
in all these alterations, the object kept in view was _coolness_,
and this in houses formed of snow!

Some of them had caught a wolf in their trap; but we found that
nothing less than extreme want could have induced them to eat the
flesh of that which we had given them, as, now that they had other
food, they would not touch it. Only four wolves at this time
remained alive of the original pack, and these were constantly
prowling about near the ships or the village.

The month of February closed with the thermometer at -32°, and,
though the sun had now attained a meridian altitude of nearly
sixteen degrees, and enlivened us with his presence above the
horizon for ten hours in the day, no sensible effect had yet been
produced on the average temperature of the atmosphere. The
uniformly white surface of the snow, on which, at this season, the
sun's rays have to act, or, rather, leaving them nothing to act
upon, is much against the first efforts to produce a thaw; but our
former experience of the astonishing rapidity with which this
operation is carried on, when once the ground begins to be laid
bare, served in some measure to reconcile us to what appeared a
protraction of the cold of winter not to have been expected in our
present latitude.




CHAPTER VIII.

A Journey performed across Winter Island.--Sufferings of the Party
by Frost.--Departure of Some of the Esquimaux, and a separate
Village established on the Ice.--Various Meteorological
Phenomena.--Okotook and his Wife brought on board.--Anecdotes
relating to them.--Ships released from the Ice by sawing.


Our intercourse with the Esquimaux continued, and many occasions
occurred in which they displayed great good humour, and a degree
of archness for which we could have scarcely given them credit.

On the 12th Okotook came, according to an appointment previously
made, with a sledge and six dogs, to give me a ride to the huts,
bringing with him his son Sioutkuk, who, with ourselves, made up a
weight of near four hundred pounds upon the sledge. After being
upset twice, and stopping at least ten times, notwithstanding the
incessant bullying of Okotook, and, as it seemed to me, more
bodily labour on his part to steer us clear of accidents than if
he had walked the whole way, we at length arrived at the huts; a
distance of two miles, in five-and-twenty minutes. Of this
equipment and their usual modes of travelling, I shall have
occasion to speak more fully in another place.

I found that several fresh alterations had been made in the huts
since my last visit, all, however, of the same, kind, and having
in view the same object as those last described. In these
alterations they seem to consult the convenience of the moment,
and to do it all by such unanimous consent, that no consultation
or difference of opinion ever appears to exist about it. So much
snowdrift had now collected about the huts, that their external
appearance was as much altered as that of the interior, and it was
difficult to trace any resemblance to the original village, or
even to perceive its present limits. The snow was now as high as
the roofs on every side, so that one might walk completely over
them, and, but for the round plates of ice composing the windows,
without suspecting the little hive of human beings that was
comfortably established below. This, however, was not always done
with impunity, when the thawing within had too much weakened the
roofs, in which case a leg sometimes made its way through, and
discovered in what parts repairs were become necessary. The
natives were at this time extremely well furnished with seals'
flesh for food and oil for their lamps, and all they would accept
from us (except meat, which we could not afford to give) was
water, and this they swallowed in such quantities whenever they
came to the ships, that it was impossible to furnish them with
half as much as they desired.

We had before this time communicated to Ayoket and his countrymen
our intention of sending a party of our people to the northward in
the spring; and Captain Lyon had displayed to him all the charms
of a brightly-polished brass kettle, of greater magnitude than
had, perhaps, ever entered into an Esquimaux imagination, as an
inducement, among various others, for him to accompany the
Kabloonas in their excursion. The prospect of such riches was a
temptation almost irresistible; but enterprise is not the genius
of an Esquimaux; and Ayoket, we soon began to perceive, had no
fancy for the proposed trip, which all his friends persisted in
saying could never be accomplished. This was evidently to be
attributed, in no small degree, to jealousy of any one individual
among them being thus selected; and the brass kettle was speedily
the means of increasing the distance to "Iligliuk's country" from
sixteen to twenty-four days' journey. We had long, indeed,
observed that this feeling of jealousy was easily excited among
these people; but, what is extraordinary, it never displayed
itself (as is most usual) among themselves, but was entirely
vented upon us, who were, though innocently, the authors of it. As
an instance of this, a man of the name of _Karr~etok_ refused to
take from me a strong and useful pair of scissors as a present,
because, as he did not hesitate to assure me, I had given Okotook
a pike, which was _more_ valuable. To show him that this temper
was not likely to produce anything to his advantage, I took back
the scissors, and, having sent him away, went to my dinner. Going
accidentally on deck an hour afterward, I found Karretok still on
board, who, having had time to reflect on his folly, now came up
to me with a smiling face, and begged hard for the scissors,
which, of course, he did not get. Many similar instances occurred,
both to Captain Lyon and myself.

To this discouragement on the part of his friends, was added, on
that of Ayoket, the same wavering and inconstant disposition which
most other savages possess, rendering it impossible to place any
dependance on his promises and intentions for two hours together.
Indeed, the more our scheme was pressed upon his attention, and
the more he saw of the actual preparations for the journey, the
less doubtful his intentions became; and arrangements were
therefore made for completing the party without him. For the
reasons now given, it was equally impossible even to direct the
attention of the Esquimaux, with any hope of success, to our
scheme of their conveying letters to the Hudson's Bay settlements.

Notwithstanding the inclemency of the weather, some of the
Esquimaux had, by the foot and sledge marks, found their way to
the ships on the morning of the 16th, assuring us, as we found to
be too true, that, in consequence of the gale, which prevented
their going out for seals, they had not any food, nor a single
lamp alight in the village. In the course of the following day, we
had farther proofs of the wretchedness which these poor people
were enduring at the huts; for, though the weather was little
better than before, above forty men and women, besides some
children, came down to the ships, and begged with more than their
usual earnestness for something to eat. It now once more became an
act of humanity, and consequently of duty, to supply them as well
as we were able; and all were admitted to partake of as much
bread-dust as they could eat, besides a quantity which they took
away with them. It had been long since Okotook and Iligliuk cared
to accept this kind of food from us, partly because our respect
for the latter generally ensured them something better, and partly
because, of late, they had procured plenty of seals; to-day,
however, they devoured it eagerly, and seemed very well satisfied
to take their share with the others. When the usual time of
departure came, they all discovered a wish to remain on board;
but, as we could not find lodgings for the whole tribe, they were
obliged very reluctantly to return. _Nannow_, a fine, quiet young,
man, whose native country is near Chesterfield Inlet, and who,
having only a sister here, used to live with Okotook, begged very
hard to remain on board; but, as I did not like to give the
preference to one in particular, he also took his leave.

On the 18th, almost every man from the huts was out seal-hunting,
and three or four, as the women informed us, had gone to a
considerable distance "for walruses" and with the intention of
remaining out for the night in a snow hut. While the men were thus
employed, their wives did not fail to use their endeavours also to
procure food; and I believe that every female belonging to the
village, without a single exception, made her appearance at the
ships to-day, and was supplied with a proportion of bread-dust for
her family. It was pleasing to observe that they were always
punctual in returning the buckets and bags which we lent them for
carrying out their provisions.

The endeavours we had lately been making to gain from the
Esquimaux some knowledge of the geographical features of the land
to the northward, had at length been crowned with greater success
than we had anticipated, and some information of a very gratifying
and interesting nature thus obtained. I shall here, therefore,
give some account of that information, and of the progressive
steps by which it was communicated, which may, at the same time,
serve to show the kind and degree of dependence that is to be
placed on geographical notices thus obtained.

The first attempt made in this way was by placing several sheets
of paper before Iligliuk, and roughly drawing on a large scale an
outline of the land about Repulse Bay and Lyon Inlet, and,
terminating at our present winter-quarters. Iligliuk was not long
in comprehending what we desired, and with the pencil continued
the outline, making the land trend, as we supposed, to the
northeastward, and giving the names of the principal places as we
proceeded. The scale being large, it was necessary, when she came
to the end of one piece of paper to tack on another, till at
length she had filled ten or twelve sheets, and had completely
lost the sight of Winter Island (called _Ne-y=uning-E=it-d~u~a_)
at the other end of the table. The idea entertained from this
first attempt was, that we should find the coast indented by
several inlets, and in some parts much loaded with ice, especially
at one strait to the northward of her native island Amitioke,
which seemed to lead in a direction very much to the westward.

Within a week after this, several other charts were drawn by the
natives in a similar way, principally by the desire of Captain
Lyon and Mr. Griffiths, who took great pains to acquire
information of this nature, and sent me copies of these
productions. The coast was here delineated as before, on a very
large scale, but much more in, detail, many more islands, bays,
and names being, inserted. It was observable, however, that no two
charts much resembled each other, and that the greater number of
them still less resembled the truth in those parts of the coast
with which we were well acquainted.

Early in the morning the Esquimaux had been observed in motion at
the huts; and several sledges, drawn by dogs and heavily laden,
went off to the westward. On going out to the village, we found
one half of the people had quitted their late habitations, taking
with them every article of their property, and had gone over the
ice, we knew not where, in quest of more abundant food. The
wretched appearance which the interior of the huts now presented
baffles all description. In each of the larger ones some of the
apartments were either wholly or in part deserted, the very snow
which composed the beds and fireplaces having been turned up, that
no article might be left behind. Even the bare walls, whose
original colour was scarcely perceptible for lampblack, blood, and
other filth, were not left perfect, large holes having been made
in the sides and roofs for the convenience of handing out the
goods and chattels. The sight of a deserted habitation is at all
times calculated to excite in the mind a sensation of dreariness
and desolation, especially when we have lately seen it filled with
cheerful inhabitants; but the feeling is heightened rather than
diminished when a small portion of these inhabitants remain behind
to endure the wretchedness which such a scene exhibits. This was
now the case at the village, where, though the remaining tenants
of each hut had combined to occupy one of the apartments, a great
part of the bed-places were still bare, and the wind and drift
blowing in through the holes which they had not yet taken the
trouble to stop up. The old man Hikkeiera and his wife occupied a
hut by themselves, without any lamp, or a single ounce of meat
belonging to them; while three small skins, on which the former
was lying, were all that they possessed in the way of blankets.
Upon the whole, I never beheld a more miserable spectacle, and it
seemed a charity to hope that a violent and constant cough, with
which the old man was afflicted, would speedily combine with his
age and infirmities to release him from his present sufferings.
Yet, in the midst of all this, he was cheerful, nor was there a
gloomy countenance to be seen at the village. Almost all the men
were out; and some of them had been led so far to sea upon the
floating and detached masses of ice in pursuit of walruses, that
Captain Lyon, who observed their situation from the ships, had it
in contemplation, in the course of the evening, to launch one of
the small boats to go to their assistance. They seemed, however,
to entertain no apprehensions themselves, from a confidence,
perhaps, that the southeast wind might be depended upon for
keeping the ice close home upon the shore. It is certain,
notwithstanding, that no degree of precaution, nor any knowledge
of the winds and tides, can render this otherwise than a most
perilous mode of obtaining subsistence; and it was impossible,
therefore, not to admire the fearlessness as well as dexterity
with which the Esquimaux invariably pursued it.

Having distributed some bread-dust among the women, we told old
Illumea and her daughter Togolat that we proposed taking up our
lodging in their hut for the night. It is a remarkable trait in
the character of these people, that they always thank you heartily
for this, as well as for eating any of their meat; but board and
lodging may be given to _them_ without receiving the slightest
acknowledgment either in word or deed. As it was late before the
men returned, I asked Togolat to get the rest of the women to
perform some of their games, with the hope of seeing something
that was new. I had scarcely time to make the proposal when she
darted out of the hut, and quickly brought every female that was
left at the village, not excepting even the oldest of them, who
joined in the performance with the same alacrity as the rest. I
could, however, only persuade them to go through a tedious song we
often before heard, which was now, indeed, somewhat modified by
their insisting on our taking our turns in the performance, all
which did not fail to create among them never-ceasing merriment
and laughter. Neither their want of food and fuel, nor the
uncertain prospect of obtaining any that night, was sufficient to
deprive these poor creatures of that cheerfulness and good-humour
which it seems at all times their peculiar happiness to enjoy.

The night proved very thick, with small snow, and as disagreeable
and dangerous for people adrift upon floating ice as can well be
imagined. If the women, however, gave their husbands a thought, or
spoke of them to us, it was only to express a very sincere hope
that some good news might shortly arrive of their success. Our
singing party had not long been broken up, when it was suddenly
announced by one of the children, the usual heralds on such
occasions, that the men had killed something on the ice. The only
two men who were at home instantly scrambled on their outer
jackets, harnessed their dogs, and set off to assist their
companions in bringing home the game, while the women remained for
an hour in anxious suspense as to the extent of their husbands'
success. At length one of the men arrived with the positive
intelligence of two walruses having been taken, and brought with
him a portion of these animals as large as he could drag over the
snow. If the women were only cheerful before, they were now
absolutely frantic. A general shout of joy instantly re-echoed
through the village; they ran into each other's huts to
communicate the welcome intelligence, and actually hugged one
another in an ecstasy of delight by way of congratulation. One of
them, _Arnal=o=o~a_, a pretty young woman of nineteen or twenty,
knowing that a dog belonging to her husband was still at the huts,
and that there was no man to take him down on the ice, ran out
instantly to perform that office; and, with a hardihood not to be
surpassed by any of the men, returned, after two hours' absence,
with her load of walrus flesh, and without even the hood thrown
over her head to shelter her from the inclemency of the weather.

When the first burst of joy had at length subsided, the women
crept, one by one, into the apartment where the first portion of
the seahorses had been conveyed, which is always that of one of
the men immediately concerned in the killing of them. Here they
obtained blubber enough to set all their lamps alight, besides a
few scraps of meat for their children and themselves. From this
time, which was nine o'clock, till past midnight, fresh cargoes
were continually arriving; the principal part being brought in by
the dogs, and the rest by the men, who, tying the thong which held
it round their waist, dragged in each his separate portion. Before
the whole was brought in, however, some of them went out three
times to the scene of action, though the distance was a mile and a
half.

Every lamp now swimming with oil, the huts exhibited a blaze of
light, and never was there a scene of more joyous festivity than
while the operation of cutting up the walruses continued. I took
the opportunity, which their present good-humour afforded, to
obtain a perfect head and tusks of one of these animals, which we
had not been able to do before; and, indeed, so much were their
hearts opened by the scene of abundance before them, that I
believe they would have given us anything we asked for. This
disposition was considerably increased also by their taking into
their heads that their success was in some way or other connected
with, or even owing to, our having taken up our night's lodging at
the huts.

After viewing all this festivity for some time, I felt disposed to
rest; and, wrapping myself up in my fur coat, lay down on one of
the beds which Illumea had given up for our accommodation, as well
as her _k=eipik_, or large deerskin blanket, which she rolled up
for my pillow. The poor old woman herself sat up by her lamp, and
in that posture seemed perfectly well satisfied to doze away the
night. The singularity of my night's lodging made me awake several
times, when I always found some of the Esquimaux eating, though,
after we lay down, they kept quite quiet for fear of disturbing
us. Mr. Halse, who was still more wakeful, told me that some of
them were incessantly employed in this manner for more than three
hours. Indeed, the quantity of meat that thus they contrive to get
rid of is almost beyond belief.

Having at length enjoyed a sound nap, I found on waking, about
five o'clock, that the men were already up, and had gone out to
renew their labours on the ice, so that several of them could not
have rested more than two or three hours. This circumstance served
to correct a notion we had entertained, that, when once abundantly
supplied with food, they took no pains to obtain more till want
began again to stare them in the face. It was now more pleasing to
be assured that, even in the midst of plenty, they did not
indolently give themselves up to repose, but were willing to take
advantage of every favourable opportunity to increase their store.
It is certain, indeed, that, were these people more provident (or,
in other words, less gluttonous, for they do not waste much), they
might never know what it is to want provisions, even during the
most inclement part of the year. The state of the ice was to-day
very unfavourable for their purpose, being broken into pieces so
small that they could scarcely venture to walk upon it.

The morning of the 5th proved favourable for a journey I had in
contemplation to the distant huts, to which Iligliuk, who had come
to Winter Island the day before, promised to be my guide. At six
o'clock I set out, accompanied by Mr. Bushnan and two of the men,
carrying with us a supply of bread-dust, besides our own
provisions and blankets. As the distance was too great for her son
Sioutkuk to walk, we were uncertain, till the moment of setting
out, how this was to be managed, there being no sledge at hand for
the purpose. We found, however, that a man, whom we had observed
for some time at work among the hummocks of ice upon the beach,
had been employed in cutting out of that abundant material a neat
and serviceable little sledge, hollowed like a bowl or tray, out
of a solid block, and smoothly rounded at the bottom. The thong to
which the dogs were attached was secured to a groove cut round its
upper edge; and the young seal-catcher, seated in this simple
vehicle, was dragged along with great convenience and comfort.

The ice over which we travelled was a level floe that had never
suffered disturbance since its first formation in the autumn, and
with not more than an inch and a half of snow upon it. The path
being distinctly marked out by the people, sledges, and dogs that
had before travelled upon it, one might, without any great stretch
of the imagination, have almost fancied it a road leading over a
level and extensive heath towards a more civilized and substantial
village than that which we were now approaching, Iligliuk walked
as nimbly as the best of us: and, after two hours' and a half
brisk travelling, we arrived at the huts, and were received by the
women (for all the men were absent) with every expression of
kindness and welcome. Each was desirous of affording us lodging,
and we had speedily arranged matters so as to put them to the
least possible inconvenience.

These huts, four in number, were, in the mode of their
construction, exact counterparts of those at Winter Island on our
first visit, but, being new and clean, presented a striking
contrast with the latter, in their present disordered and filthy
state. What gave a peculiarity, as well as beauty also, to the
interior appearance of these habitations, was their being situated
on the ice, which, being cleared of the snow, presented a flooring
of that splendid blue which is, perhaps, one of the richest
colours that nature affords. A seal or two having been lately
procured, every lamp was now blazing, and every _=o=otk~ose~ek_
smoking with a hot mess, which, together with the friendly
reception we experienced, and a little warmth and fatigue from
travelling, combined in conveying to our minds an idea of comfort
which we could scarcely believe an Esquimaux hut capable of
exciting.

On the arrival of the men, who came in towards evening with two
seals as the reward of their labour, we were once more greeted and
welcomed. _Arnaneelia_, in particular, who was a quiet, obliging,
and even amiable man, was delighted to find my quarters were to be
in his apartment, where _An=e=etka_, his wife, a young woman of
about twenty-three, had already arranged everything for my
accommodation; and both these poor people now vied with each other
in their attention to my comfort. The other two apartments of the
same hut were occupied by Kaoongut and Okotook, with their
respective wives and families; it being the constant custom of
these people thus to unite in family groups whenever the nature of
their habitations will allow it. Mr. Bushnan being established
with Okotook, and the two men with Kaoongut, we were thus all
comfortably lodged under the same roof.

Toolooak having been concerned in killing one of the seals just
brought in, it fell to his mother's lot to dissect it, the
_neitiek_ being the only animal which the women are permitted to
cut up. We had therefore an opportunity of seeing this filthy
operation once more performed, and entirely by the old lady
herself, who was soon up to her elbows in blood and oil. Before a
knife is put into the animal, as it lies on its back, they pour a
little water into its mouth, and touch each flipper and the middle
of the belly with a little lamp-black and oil taken from the under
part of the lamp. What benefit was expected from this preparatory
ceremony we could not learn, but it was done with a degree of
superstitious care and seriousness, that bespoke its indispensable
importance. The boys came eagerly into the hut as usual, and held
out their foreheads for the old woman to stick the charms upon
them; and it was not till now that we learned from Iligliuk the
efficacy of this very useful custom. As soon as this dirty
operation was at an end, during which the numerous by-standers
amused themselves in chewing the intestines of the seal, the
strangers retired to their own huts, each bearing a small portion
of the flesh and blubber, while our hosts enjoyed a hearty meal of
boiled meat and hot gravy soup. Young Sioutkuk ate at least three
pounds of solid meat in the first three hours after our arrival at
the huts, besides a tolerable proportion of soup, all which his
mother gave him whenever he asked it, without the smallest remark
of any kind. We now found that they depended on catching seals
alone for their subsistence, there being no walruses in this
neighbourhood. As they were several miles from any open water,
their mode of killing them was entirely confined to watching for
the animals coming up in the holes they make through the ice.

In the course of the evening our conversation happened to turn on
the Indians, a people whom none of these Esquimaux had ever seen;
but with whose ferocity and decided hostility to their own nation
they seemed to be well acquainted. They described, also, their
peculiar manner of paddling their canoes, and were aware that they
made use of the kind of show-shoes which we showed them. When I
related to them, as well as I was able, the massacre of the
Esquimaux recorded by Hearne, and gave them to understand that the
Indians spared neither age nor sex, it seemed to chill them with
horror, and I was almost sorry that I had told them the story.

_April 11._--We were now glad to begin making some show of
re-equipping the ships for sea; for though this was a business
that might, if necessary, have been very well accomplished in two
or three weeks, it was better to employ the men in occupations
having an evident and determinate object, than in those less
obviously useful ones to which it was necessary to resort during
the winter. We therefore brought down some of the boats to the
ships to repair, put up the forge on the ice, and built a snow
house over it, and set about various other jobs, which made the
neighbourhood of the ships assume a busy and bustling appearance.

I had to-day a visit from Okotook and Iligliuk, who, with their
son, came in upon their sledge from the distant huts. Being
desirous of entertaining them well, in return for their late
hospitality, we provided abundance to eat, and showed them
everything about the ship that we thought likely to amuse them. Of
all the wonders they had ever seen on board, there was nothing
which seemed to impress them so strongly with a sense of our
superiority as the forge, and the work which the armourer
performed with it. The welding of two pieces of iron especially
excited their admiration, and I never saw Iligliuk express so much
astonishment at anything before. Even in this her superior good
sense was observable, for it was evident that the utility of what
she saw going on was what forced itself upon her mind; and she
watched every stroke of the hammer and each blast of the bellows
with extreme eagerness, while numbers of the other Esquimaux
looked stupidly on, without expressing the smallest curiosity or
interest in the operation, except by desiring to have some
spear-heads fashioned out by this means. Iligliuk was always very
much entertained also by pictures having any relation to the
Esquimaux in other parts, and derived great entertainment from a
description of any difference in their clothes, utensils, or
weapons. Of these the sail in an Esquimaux boat seemed particularly
to attract her notice; but, in general, she had no inclination
to admit the inferiority of her, own tribe to any other. She
was always extremely inquisitive about her own sex, whether
_Innuees_[*] or _Kabloonas_, listening with eager attention to any
account of their dress or occupations, and in common, I believe,
with all the rest of the Esquimaux, wondered how we came to travel
to their country without our wives. The assurance that many among
us were not married, they received with evident incredulity.

[Footnote: Esquimaux.]

On the 13th, a number of the natives from the Winter Island huts
formed a second detachment, and set off for the other village.
They carried their goods on sledges as before, even to the
exclusion of poor old Hikkeiera, whom some of our gentlemen
overtook crawling after his companions with a stick, and who, but
for their remonstrances, might that day have finished his
pilgrimage on earth. They insisted, however, on his being placed
on one of the sledges, which was accordingly complied with; but,
on their arrival at the village, his companions left him lying
there till their huts were built. All the Esquimaux pressed our
gentlemen very strongly to sleep at the village; but one of the
women gave Mr. Bird an indifferent specimen of her hospitality, by
picking his pocket of a handkerchief, though not so dexterously as
to escape detection. The few who visited the ships to-day told us
that they were all about to leave Winter Island on the morrow; and
Okotook and Iligliuk, who had not yet returned, came on board
among the rest to pay a last visit. I gave the former a large
piece of oak wood for a bow and two arrows, a second iron
spear-head, and various other articles, to add to the stock of
wealth he had from time to time received from us. As these good
folks found themselves perfectly at home in my cabin, I was
usually in the habit of continuing my occupations when they were
there, without being disturbed by them. Being now engaged in
writing, my attention was unexpectedly directed towards them by
Iligliuk's suddenly starting from her seat, moving quickly towards
the door, and, without saying a word either to me or any of the
officers present, hastening directly on deck. Okotook, indeed, as
he followed her out of the cabin, turned round and said "Good-by,"
of which expression he had learned the meaning, and then, without
giving us time to return the compliment, they both hurried out of
the ship, leaving us in some astonishment at this singular
leave-taking, which we then supposed to be the last.

We could now begin to perceive, from day to day, that the snow on
shore was diminishing. How slow this process was, may, however, be
understood by the fact, that it was necessary to make a mark on
some stone to be assured it was thus receding. Our snow-wall had
indeed settled down nearly a foot by the gradual diminution of the
blocks of which it was composed; but the thawing had been
artificially assisted by the black cloth hung against it. Five
ravens were seen to-day, all quite black; four of them were flying
in pairs.

On the 22d a number of the Esquimaux came to the ships with a
sledge, and among the rest my late host Arnaneelia and his wife,
the latter having the front of her jacket adorned with numberless
strings of beads that we had given her, arranged with exact
uniformity, to which, in the fashion of their dresses and the
disposition of their ornaments, these people always rigidly
adhere. Aneekta had scarcely reached the cabin when she produced a
little ivory comb and a pair of handsome mittens, which she
presented to Mr. Edwards, at the same time thanking him for the
attention he had shown her on an occasion when she had been taken
in a fit alongside the Fury, from which she was recovered by
bleeding. This expression of gratitude, in which she was heartily
joined by her husband, was extremely gratifying to us; as it
served, in some degree, to redeem these people in our estimation
from the imputation of ingratitude, which is, indeed, one of their
greatest failings. They stated having seen two reindeer the
preceding day going over the ice to the main land. They spoke of
this with great pleasure: and we were ourselves not displeased
with the prospect of changing our diet for a little venison. They
now became extremely urgent with us for wood to make bows and
arrows, most of their own having, with the childishness that
accompanied their first barterings, been parted with to our
officers and men. Having several broken oars which could be turned
to little or no account on board, we were enabled, at a small
expense of useful stores, to furnish them very abundantly with
wood for this purpose. Arnaneelia also informed us that Okotook,
who had been unwell for some days, was now much worse, and seemed,
as he described it, to be labouring under a violent pulmonary
complaint. On the circumstance being mentioned to Mr. Skeoch, he
kindly volunteered to go to the village, and accordingly took his
seat on the sledge, accompanied also by Mr. Sherer. They carried
with them a quantity of bread-dust to be distributed among the
Esquimaux at the huts, their success in seal-catching having
lately been indifferent.

A number of Esquimaux came to the ships on the 25th,
notwithstanding a strong breeze from the S.W.b.W., with a
considerable snowdrift. From these people we learned that
Okotook's complaint had increased since Mr. Skeoch's visit, and
that he was now extremely ill. Mr. Bushnan immediately offered to
go to the huts for the purpose of bringing him on board, where, by
Mr. Edwards's kind attentions, and the enjoyment of warmth and
dryness, we hoped soon to recover him. Mr. Bushnan, therefore,
without waiting for the return of the sledges, set out for the
village at an early hour in the forenoon, accompanied by the
sergeant of marines. At eleven at night our party returned on
board, bringing on a sledge Okotook, Iligliuk, and their son. That
Iligliuk would accompany her husband, I, of course, took for
granted and wished; but as the boy could do us no good, and was,
moreover, a desperate eater, I had desired Mr. Bushnan to try
whether a slight objection to his being of the party would induce
Okotook to leave him with his other relations. This he had
cautiously done; but, the instant the proposal was made, Okotook,
without any remark, began to take off the clothes he had himself
just dressed in to set out. No farther objection being made,
however, he again prepared for the journey, Iligliuk assisting him
with the most attentive solicitude. Before the invalid was
suffered to leave his apartment, some of the by-standers sent for
Ewerat, now better known to our people by the undignified
appellation of the "conjuror." Ewerat, on this occasion,
maintained a degree of gravity and reserve calculated to inspire
somewhat more respect than we had hitherto been disposed to
entertain for him in that capacity. Placing himself at the door of
the apartment opposite Okotook, who was still seated on the bed,
he held both his thumbs in his mouth, keeping up a silent but
solemn converse with his _toorngow_,[*] the object of which was,
as Mr. Bushnan presently afterward found, to inquire into the
efficacy and propriety of the sick man's removal. Presently he
began to utter a variety of confused and inarticulate sounds; and
it being at length understood that a favourable answer had been
given, Okotook was carried out and placed on the sledge, Ewerat
still mumbling his thumbs and muttering his incantations as
before. When the party took their leave, there were a great many
doleful faces among those that remained behind; and Mr. Bushnan
said that the whole scene more resembled the preparations for a
funeral than the mere removal of a sick man. When the sledge moved
on, Ewerat was the only one who had not a "Good-by!" ready, he
being as seriously engaged as at first, and continuing so as long
as our people could observe him.

[Footnote: Familiar spirit.]

Okotook was extremely ill on his arrival, having been three hours
on the sledge, and Iligliuk, who, as Mr. Bushnan told me, had
scarcely taken her eyes off her husband's face the whole time,
seemed almost worn out with fatigue and anxiety. A bed of wolf
skins being prepared for him, Okotook was soon placed upon it, and
such remedies applied as Mr. Edwards judged necessary for his
complaint, which was inflammation of the lungs to a degree that,
if left to itself, or even to Ewerat, would soon have proved
fatal, or, at best, have terminated in consumption.

On the 26th, a southeast wind brought a heavy fall of snow in
flakes much larger than before. The thermometers on the ice at
noon stood at 23° in both aspects. We heard from Illumea, who came
to see her son Okotook, that a part of the natives had gone still
farther to the westward upon the ice, one spot not affording
sufficient subsistence for the whole of them. Our patient felt
much the better for a comfortable night's lodging, and now
submitted with great patience to the application of a blister,
though I believe his confidence in our mode of cure was afterward
shaken for a time by the pain which it occasioned. Both he and
Iligliuk, however, seemed very sensibly to feel the comforts and
advantages of their present quarters; and a "coyenna" (thanks) now
and then fell from their lips. Nothing could exceed the attention
which the latter paid to her husband; she kept her eyes almost
constantly fixed upon him, and seemed anxious to anticipate every
want.

One of Okotook's brothers had arrived from the huts, bringing with
him some walrus-flesh to tempt the appetite of the invalid, whose
stomach, however, very fortunately for his complaint, was not
disposed to this kind of delicacy. When his brother was about to
return, Okotook took it into his head to send his son away with
him, probably because he heard they had the day before killed two
seals, which afforded better feeding than we had to give him; be
this as it may, we were not sorry that he went, and the boy
himself seemed no less pleased; for, without playfellows or
amusement of any kind, his time hung very heavily on his hands
while he remained on board. It was amusing to see Okotook take a
dose of physic for the first time in his life to-day. He knew its
taste was not pleasant, but this was certainly not all that he
dreaded; for, before he put the cup to his lips with one hand, he
held on by his wife with the other, and she by him with both hers,
as though they expected an explosion, or some such catastrophe, as
the immediate effect of the potion; nor did he venture to relinquish
his hold till the taste began to leave his mouth. The quantity of
water which he drank in the course of the four-and-twenty hours
is beyond conception; and the cabin fire could scarcely, by the
melting of snow, furnish enough for their consumption. These people
are extremely particular as to the purity of the water they drink.
Some that had been melted in our steamer, and which I thought very
good, neither of them would touch, or, at least, always spat out
again. If the water was much above the temperature of 32°, they
also disliked it, and immediately put snow into it to cool it
down. Iligliuk, who came on board with one side of her hair loose,
loosened the other also to-day, in consequence of her fancying
Okotook worse, though it was only the annoyance of the blister that
made him uneasy; for even in this sequestered corner of the globe
dishevelled locks bespeak mourning. It was not, however, with her
the mere semblance of grief, for she was really much distressed
throughout the day, all our endeavours not availing to make her
understand how one pain was to be removed by inflicting another.

Captain Lyon being desirous of having some little clothes made as
models of the Esquimaux costume, and thinking Iligliuk's present
leisure afforded her a good opportunity of making them, had
yesterday obtained her promise that she would do so. Okotook being
now very much better, and she having herself resumed her usual
gayety in consequence, I pressed her to commence her work, and
placed the skins before her, when she said that she could not do
them here, as she had no needles. These being supplied her, she
now complained of, having no _t=o=okt~oo-e-w=all~oo_ (reindeer
sinew), their usual thread. This difficulty, unfortunately for
Iligliuk's credit, was as easily overcome as the other; and when
scissors, pattern clothes, and all the other requisites were laid
before her, she was at length driven to the excuse that Okotook's
illness would not permit her to do it. Seeing us half laughing at
the absurdity of these excuses, and half angry at the selfish
indolence which prompted them, she at last flatly asserted that
Okotook desired her not to work, which, though we knew it to be a
falsehood, the latter did not deny. We then supposed that some
superstition might be at the bottom of this; but having, a little
while after, by way of experiment, thrown Iligliuk some loose
beads upon the table, she eagerly employed herself for half an
hour in stringing them that not one might be lost; which proved
that, where her own gratification or interest were concerned,
Okotook's illness was not suffered to interfere. This anecdote
shows, in a strong light, that deep-rooted selfishness, which, in
numberless instances, notwithstanding the superiority of
Iligliuk's understanding, detracted from the amiability of her
disposition. The fact was, that she did not feel inclined so far
to exert herself as to comply with Captain Lyon's request; and the
slight degree of gratitude and proper feeling which was requisite
to overcome that disinclination was altogether wanting.

I have related this anecdote just as it occurred, with the hope of
showing the true disposition of these people, and not with a view
of unduly depreciating the character of our friend Iligliuk. I am,
however, compelled to acknowledge, that, in proportion as the
superior understanding of this extraordinary woman became more and
more developed, her head (for what female head is indifferent to
praise?) began to be turned with the general attention and
numberless presents she received. The superior decency and even
modesty of her behaviour had combined, with her intellectual
qualities, to raise her, in our estimation, far above her
companions; and I often heard others express what I could not but
agree in, that for Iligliuk alone, of all the Esquimaux women,
that kind of respect could be entertained which modesty in a
female never fails to command in our sex. Thus regarded, she had
always been freely admitted into the ships, the quartermasters at
the gangway never thinking of refusing entrance to the "wise
woman," as they called her. Whenever any explanation was necessary
between the Esquimaux and us, Iligliuk was sent for as an
interpreter; information was chiefly obtained through her, and she
thus found herself rising into a degree of consequence to which,
but for us, she could never have attained. Notwithstanding a more
than ordinary share of good sense on her part, it will not,
therefore, be wondered at if she became giddy with her exaltation,
assuming certain airs which, though infinitely diversified in
their operation according to circumstances, perhaps universally
attend a too sudden accession of good fortune in every child of
Adam from the equator to the poles. The consequence was, that
Iligliuk was soon spoiled; considered her admission into the ships
and most of the cabins no longer as an indulgence, but a right;
ceased to return the slightest acknowledgment for any kindness or
presents; became listless and inattentive in unravelling the
meaning of our questions, and careless whether her answers
conveyed the information we desired. In short, Iligliuk in
February and Iligliuk in April were confessedly very different
persons; and it was at last amusing to recollect, though not very
easy to persuade one's self, that the woman who now sat demurely
in a chair, so confidently expecting the notice of those around
her, and she who had at first, with eager and wild delight,
assisted in cutting snow for the building of a hut, and with the
hope of obtaining a single needle, were actually one and the same
individual.

Togolat came down to the ships to-day to see her brother Okotook;
she was accompanied by Arnalooa, and on their arrival they were
both sent for into the cabin. We observed, however, that they
required an unusual degree of solicitation to make them go near
Okotook, or even to the side of the cabin, where he lay concealed
by a screen; and, after all, they remained in the opposite corner
next the door; and, having talked freely to the invalid for some
time, took their leave without seeing him. In the evening, after
they were gone, we found that this unfortunate though well-intended
visit was occasioning great distress to Okotook, who talked for two
hours almost incessantly about "Arnalooa's having seen him," which,
it seems, ought not to have been the case. What misfortune was to
be apprehended in consequent of this event we could not learn; but
he spoke of it in a kind of agony, and was evidently labouring
under the influence of some powerful though absurd superstition
respecting it. Towards night he suffered a dreadful bleeding at the
nose, followed by much sickness at the stomach, which, together
with the phanton of Arnalooa, that still haunted his imagination,
combined to make him extremely unwell for some hours. The next day,
however, he was free from complaint of any kind, and began once
more to put on a smiling countenance.

The caulking of our bows being now completed, the ships were
released from the ice by sawing round them; an operation which
caused them to rise in the water six inches and a half, in
consequence of the increased buoyancy occasioned by the winter's
expenditure.




CHAPTER IX.

Increased Extent of open Water in the Offing.--A Travelling Party
despatched to the Northward.--Unsuccessful Attempt to raise
Vegetables on Shore.--Decease of James Pringle.--A Party of
Esquimaux build Huts near the Ships.--Return of the Travellers,
and Account of their Journey.--First Appearance of the
Plants.--Birds become numerous.--Commence cutting a Canal through
the Ice for liberating the Ships.--Illness and Decease of John
Reid and William Souter.--Breaking up of the Ice in the
Bay.--Account of Winter Island.--Abstract of Observations made
there.


As there was an increased extent of open water in the offing, and
the weather being now, to all appearance, tolerably settled, I
determined on sending away a travelling party under Captain Lyon.
It consisted of Lieutenant Palmer, five seamen, and three marines,
the whole being victualled for twenty days, and furnished with a
tent, fuel, and every other convenience of which such a journey
would admit. The baggage was placed on light sledges, resembling
those used by Captain Franklin on his late journey to the shores
of the Polar Sea, made out of staves shaved thin, six feet eight
inches long, fourteen inches broad, and turned up before. Being
secured entirely with thongs of hide sunk by grooves into the wood
to keep them from wearing, they were perfectly flexible, so as to
be in no danger of breaking on uneven ground. Each individual of
the party was furnished with one of these, which also served to
sleep and sit upon; the weight dragged by each of the men being
about one hundred and twenty pounds, and that of the officers from
ninety to ninety-five. Each person had also a pair of snow-shoes,
a deerskin jacket and boots for sleeping in, and another pair of
boots of water-tight sealskin.

The general tenour of Captain Lyon's instructions was, "after
crossing to the continent, to proceed along that coast to the
northward, carefully examining any bend or inlet he might meet
with, so as to leave no doubt, if possible, of its actual extent
and communications, thereby preventing the necessity of the ships
entering it on their arrival there." I added, also, the necessary
directions for remarking everything of interest relating to the
tides, and the natural productions of the country; and I limited
Captain Lyon to the end of the month in returning, to avoid the
possibility of detaining the expedition.

Their preparations being completed, our travellers left the ships
under a salute of three cheers from both the crews, and
accompanied by a large party of officers and men to assist them,
for the first few hours. A day or two after their departures a
supply of provisions was lodged on shore, according to a plan
previously agreed on, in case of our being forced out to sea with
the ice before their return. Arrangements were also made for
putting an officer and two men on shore, as a guard to this as
well as to the clock, tent, or any other articles that might be
left behind, in the event of an occurrence of this nature.

In the course of the forenoon of the 15th, a message to our
medical gentlemen announced the fall of James Pringle, one of the
seamen of the Hecla, from her mizen-topmast-head to the deck; and
in a few minutes after I was much shocked in receiving Lieutenant
Hoppner's report of his death, no sign of life having indeed
appeared in him from the first moment after his fall. On
examination, it was found that the base of the scull was
fractured, and the neck also dislocated. A grave was directed to
be dug near the observatory, and arrangements were made for the
funeral taking place on the following Sunday.

On the 16th, Ewerat, with his wife and family, arrived at the
ships, bringing with them all their goods and chattels, and with
the intention of taking up their abode upon the ice near us. They
accordingly built their hut about a hundred yards from the Fury's
stern, but whether with the view of living upon us, or the seals
that frequent the bay, we were at first at a loss to conjecture.
Ewerat's household consisted not only of his own family, but of
Appokiuk and Itkamuk, the former of whom having no husband, and
the latter no relative, they both seemed to be fairly "on the
parish." Besides this establishment, a second, on a smaller scale,
also made its appearance in our neighbourhood, consisting of a
very little man, named _Koo-il-li-ti-uk_, nicknamed by the sailors
"John Bull," and his pretty little wife _Arnal=o=oa_, whose zeal
in bringing up her husband's share of the seahorses I have before
described. These persons, being eight in number, had determined on
travelling to Amitioke for the ensuing summer, influenced
probably, in some degree, by the hope of falling in with us again,
as they knew that we were going in that direction. Be this,
however, as it may, it was soon evident that they intended making
the most of us while we remained neighbours; for, on the 17th,
though the weather was favourable, and they had no food of their
own, they made no effort to procure any, except from the ships, to
which the women brought their _ootkooseeks_ for bread-dust. Though
I objected to encouraging this, and told them we should give them
nothing if they did not also labour for themselves, they were all
such favourites with our people that I believe they found it
answer very well; contriving not only to get plenty of food, but
also a number of useful presents. They made, indeed, some return
for this, by the usual barter of mittens, of which our people were
now furnished with an abundant supply.

On the 19th, after an impressive sermon delivered by Mr. Fisher,
the last mournful duties were performed over the remains of our
deceased shipmate. Nothing worthy of notice occurred till the
evening of the 21st, when, soon after eight o'clock, Captain Lyon
and his party were seen on their return over the hills, and, being
met by a number of the officers and men from the ships, arrived on
board before ten, when I was happy to find our travellers in good
health, excepting a little snow-blindness and "foot-foundering,"
of which they soon recovered. The result of this journey of
Captain Lyon's served to excite very reasonable hopes that he had
seen the northeastern extreme of the great peninsula, round which
we entertained the most sanguine expectations of shortly finding
the desired passage into the Polar Sea.

On the 23d, our neighbours the Esquimaux, who had long, by their
own account, been setting off for Amitioke, at length began in
earnest to pack up for their departure. As soon as their
preparations were finished, I sent for them all on board, and gave
them one of their own sledges, of which they were much in want,
for carrying their goods, a couple of boarding-pikes, some knives,
and several tin canisters filled with bread-dust, for their
journey. These presents had scarcely been made them, when we had
reason to apprehend so sudden an influx of wealth might produce
serious effects, especially upon the women, whose joy threw them
into immoderate fits of laughter, almost amounting to hysterics,
which were succeeded by a flood of tears. The men seemed thankful,
though less noisy in the expression of their acknowledgments. As
soon as some degree of composure was restored, we accompanied them
to their baggage, which they had stowed on two of the small
travelling sledges given them by Captain Lyon, but which they now
shifted to their own. When all was ready, and some other valuable
presents had been added to their stock by Captain Lyon, they
proceeded to the northward, the women assisting to drag the
sledge, for they had only one large dog and one puppy. On taking
their departure, these good-humoured and ever-cheerful people
greeted us with three cheers in the true Kabloona style, a mode of
salutation they had observed once or twice among us, and
frequently practised for their amusement and ours. On the 24th, we
found they had only proceeded a few miles, as "John Bull" once
more made his appearance on board, and returned to his companions
in the evening. From this specimen of their travelling, of which
we had, as yet, little experience, we had great reason to hope
that their days' journeys would be found but short ones, and that,
therefore, our distance round the northeastern point of the
American continent was not very considerable. The show fell
softer, and more melting was going on to-day than on any before
observed, though only a few black tips of the rocks were yet
visible on shore. The animals now began to appear in greater
numbers; for on the 25th, a flock of nearly two hundred
long-tailed ducks were swimming about in the open water to the
southeast of the point. Some of the Esquimaux who came from the
nearest western village also reported having seen a great many
reindeer; but they had not yet succeeded in killing any.

At the close of the month of May it was a matter of general
observation, and, of course, of general regret, how few symptoms
of thawing had yet appeared, either on shore or on the ice.
Naturally pursuing our usual comparison with the circumstances of
the former winter passed in these regions, it was impossible not
to recollect that Melville Island had, on the same day two years
before, advanced full as far as the country now before us in
throwing off its winter covering. The parts of the land which were
now the most bare were the smooth round tops of the hills, on
which here and there occurred a little pool of water, from which,
taking all together within half a mile round the ships, we should
at this time have had great difficulty in filling half a tun.
There were also on the lower lands, a few dark uncovered patches,
looking, when viewed from the hills, like islets in an extensive
sea. Vegetation seemed labouring to commence, and a few tufts of
the _saxifraga oppositifolia_, when closely examined, discovered
some signs of life. A botanist, in short, might have considered
vegetation as begun, but in the popular acceptation of the word it
certainly had not. Such was the state of things on shore at the
conclusion of the month of May. Upon the ice appearances were not
more promising. Except in the immediate neighbourhood of the
ships, where, from the constant trampling and the laying of
various stores upon the ice, some heat had artificially been
absorbed, it would have been difficult to point out in what
respect any advances towards dissolution had been made upon the
upper surface, where six or seven inches of snow yet remained in
every part. Here again, without any undue partiality for our old
winter-quarters, it was natural, as well as reasonable, to bear in
mind, that before this time we had there experienced several hours
of hard rain, than which nothing proves more effectual in
dissolving the ice. The consequence was, that for the last week in
May, at Melville Island, the surface of the ice had assumed quite
a green appearance; while here it was still as white as a covering
of snow could make it.

Under these circumstances I came to the determination, now that
the ships were ready for sea, to try what could be effected
towards their release, by sawing and cutting the ice; for it was
vexatious to see open water daily in the offing, and not to be
able to take advantage of it. Arrangements were therefore made for
getting everything, except the tent and instruments, on board the
next day, and for commencing this more laborious occupation on the
following Monday.

On the 1st of June, having launched a boat at the mouth of the
bay, I went to sound in that neighbourhood and along the eastern
side of the island, preparatory to marking out the intended canal.
A good deal of ice still remained attached to the land; but as far
as we could distinguish to the N.N.E. there was a lane of clear
water wide enough for the navigation of the ships.

On the morning of the 3d, at six A.M., both the ships' companies,
under their respective officers, were set to work upon the ice. A
line was accurately marked out from each of the Fury's quarters,
where they were fifty feet apart, diverging to two hundred and
fifty at the edge of the floe, the latter being distant from the
ships two thousand and twenty feet, or just one third of a
nautical mile. It was proposed to make a cut through the ice with
the saws, along the two lines thus marked out, and then a
transverse section here and there, the divergency of the sides
being intended to facilitate the removal of the pieces thus
detached by first pulling them out with strong purchases, and then
floating them down the canal to the sea without. Nothing could
exceed the alacrity with which this laborious work was undertaken,
and continued daily from six in the morning till eight at night,
with the intermission only of mealtimes: nor could anything be
more lively and interesting than the scene which now presented
itself to an observer on the southeast point. The day was
beautifully clear, the sea open as far as the eye could stretch to
the northward, and the "busy hum" of our people's voices could at
times be heard mingling with the cheerful though fantastic songs
with which the Greenland sailors are accustomed at once to beguile
their labour, and to keep the necessary time in the action of
sawing the ice. The whole prospect, together with the hopes and
associations excited by it, was, to persons cooped up as we had
been, exhilarating beyond conception.

In the course of the first week we had completed the two side
cuts, and also two shorter ones in the space between the ships;
making in all a length of two thousand three hundred feet on each
side of the intended canal, the thickness of the ice being in
general four feet, but in one or two places (where the junction of
the sea-ice with the bay-floe occasioned some squeezing) above ten
feet and a half, scarcely allowing our longest saws to work.
Laborious as this part of the operation had been, we soon found it
likely to prove the least troublesome of the whole; for, on
endeavouring to pull out the pieces in the manner at first
intended, every effort failed, till at length we were reduced to
the necessity of cutting each block diagonally before it could be
moved from its place. After a week's experience, we also learned
that much time had been lost in completing the whole of the
lateral cuts at once; for these, partly from frost, and partly by
the closing together of the sides of the canal, all required
sawing a second, and in some places even a third time. It was
surprising, also, to see how powerful a resistance was occasioned
by the "sludge" produced in sawing, or, as the sailors called it,
the "sawdust," continuing in the cut, and appearing to act, like
oil interposed between two plates of glass, in keeping the masses
united. In some cases, also, a saw was squeezed so tight by the
pressure of the ice in the cut, that it became necessary to enter
a second in order to release it, by sawing out a circular plug of
ice completely round it. Fatiguing as this work proved to the men,
I directed it to be continued to-day, the sea remaining so open on
the outside as to give every encouragement to our exertions.

One of our people, in walking over the island, met with a swan's
nest, which Captain Lyon went out to see, and made a drawing of
it. It was built of moss-peat, being no less than five feet ten
inches in length, four feet nine inches wide, and two feet deep.
The hole of entrance in the top was eighteen inches wide. Two
eggs, each weighing about eight ounces, were found in the nest, in
which the old birds were also sitting at first, but too wild to be
approached. The eggs are of a cream or brownish white colour, in
some parts a little clouded by a darker tinge. The female
subsequently laid a third egg, and soon afterward both birds
appeared to have wholly deserted the nest.

In the second week our progress with the canal had been
considerable, it being now completed within two hundred yards of
the Fury's stern.

At the conclusion of the day's labour on the 19th, we had every
prospect of getting to sea in forty-eight hours more; but, early
on the following morning, when the ebb or northeasterly tide had
made, and was assisted by a breeze from the southward, the whole
body of sea-ice came forcibly in contact with the bay-floe, which
was now so weakened by our cutting as to split the whole way from
the edge up to the Hecla's stern, a little to the westward of the
canal, the latter being almost immediately closed with a
considerable crush, but without affecting the ships which lay
beyond it. The closing of our artificial canal had the effect of
partially opening a natural one at the place where the ice had
just been detached; but, as this was incomplete, coming gradually
up to a point astern of the Hecla, we were at a loss to know on
which of the two our labour would best be employed. An attempt was
first made by four strong purchases, stretched from side to side
across the new crack, to pull the parts together again, and thus
to leave our original canal _in statu quo_. All our power,
however, being insufficient to accomplish this, we commenced with
the saws upon the upper part of the crack, with the intention of
widening it sufficiently for the passage of the ships. In this
work we had made considerable progress, when, towards evening, it
was perceived that _this_ was now closing, and our former canal
reopening by the action of the wind and tide. Relinquishing our
last attempt, therefore, we lost no time in floating some heavy
pieces of ice into the canal, to serve as wedges for keeping the
sides apart, in case of any fresh pressure from without again
disposing them to close.

At two A.M. on the 21st, the piece of the floe which formed the
separation between the two canals drifted bodily outward, as far
as the rocks at the mouth of the bay and the ice that lay upon
them would permit, taking with it a heavy-grounded mass that lay
near the Hecla, and on which it had before been turning as on a
pile or pivot; shortly after a second mass on the eastern side of
the canal broke off, the separation taking place upon the line
where the ice had been weakened by the sand we had laid upon it.
Our work was now at an end, and we had only to wait for a
northerly or westerly wind to release us from our present
"besetment," for, in fact, it was now nothing more. Directions
were therefore given for closely watching the motion of the ice,
both from the ships as well as by regular visits to the shore at
the end of every watch.

It now becomes my painful duty to turn from these busy
occupations, where animation, cheerfulness, and hope prevailed, to
the sad and solemn scenes of sickness and death; for with both of
these did it please the Almighty to visit us at this period!
William Souter, quartermaster of the Fury, who, in the early part
of this week, had complained of a slight sickness at the stomach,
and, having been quite relieved, was, in consequence, discharged
to duty, was again, on the morning of the 21st, affected in a
similar manner while on deck. On the 24th, his alarming symptoms
had so much subsided, that increasing hopes were entertained of
his continuing to do well. These flattering appearances, however,
received a sudden check about noon on the 25th, after which time
he began rapidly, though gradually, to droop, and between six and
seven in the evening breathed his last.

The impossibility of removing Souter from the sick bay, after the
last alarming change took place, rendered his death, or, rather,
the convulsive struggles which for some hours preceded that event,
a dreadful trial to poor Reid, whose state had for some time past
been scarcely better, the difficulty in his breathing having
increased to a most distressing degree. When Souter was dying,
Reid remarked that he should not be long after him; and on the
26th, when Mr. Fisher had attended and prayed with him, he said
that he should go at one bell (half past six), and then enumerated
all his clothes to one of the men, who, at his request, wrote them
down for him. After four o'clock he did not speak, and, gradually
sinking, expired at the time he had mentioned.

On the 28th, the remains of our deceased shipmates were committed
to the earth, with every solemnity that so mournful an occasion
demanded. They were interred in one grave, on a rising ground a
few hundred yards from the sea to the northeastward of the ships.
A handsome tomb of stone and mortar was built over the spot,
having at one end a stone let in, with the usual information
engraved on it. The sides were plastered with a kind of viscous
clay found in one of the ponds, and the top covered with tufts of
the purple saxifrage. The duties of the ships now permitting it,
Captain Lyon employed his men in building a similar tomb over the
grave of Pringle.


END OF VOL. I.





--- Provided by LoyalBooks.com ---